---..

--
lIANOBUCIl OER ORTENTALIST I K
~-
''''~J,_'''_'''~Y ,0."
J I!- ... < - - l . - . .... "'"

n5T1l AIlWUlNG

_._-"- .......
"a_ NA"a UN" oa_ MJTTLaaa O§TSN

~a""M>

KEILSCHRlFTFORSCIIUNG UNO
ALT!! GESCHICHTE VOROERASIK.....S
U>Tf"USP~.....a(~TTT

GESQ\lOITE DeIlI'OUClM<G.
SPRAOIE US\) Ul1!M'IVII

ALTKLi!TNASIATISCHB SPRACHBN
 AL TKLEINASIATISCHE
SPRACHEN

linT BEiTRii GEN VON

JOHANNES FRIEDRICH· ERICA REINER

ANNELIES KAi'vIMENHUBER . GONTERNEUMANN
ALFRED I-lEUBECK

LEIDEN/KOLN
E. J. BRILL
1969

,'
 INHALTSVERZEICHNIS

I A. Churritisch (JOHANNES FRlE,DRICH) I

1. Einleitullg. . . . . . . . . . . . . I
II. Methode und Geschichte der Forschung 6
III. Schrift und Lautlehre . IO
IV. Das Nomen I2
v. Das Pronomen. IS
VI. Das Zahlwort I6
VII, Das Verbum. I7
VIII. Partikeln I9
IX. Zum Satzbau I9
x. Das Churri tische in seincr Umwelt . 2I
XI. Textpro ben 23

I B. Urartaisch (JOHANNES FRIEDRICH)

I. Einleitllng . . . . . . . . . . . .
II. Methode und Geschichte der Forschung
III. Schrift- und Lautlehre
IV. Das Nomen . .
\(. Das Pronomen .
VI. Das Zahlwort •
VII. Das Verbum. .
VIII. Die Negationen
IX. Zum Satzbau
x. Die Verwandtschaftsverhaltnisse des UrarUiischen
X I. Textproben . . . . . . . . .

II. The Elamite Language (ERICA REINER) 54

Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . 54
Short History of Elam.i te Studies S4
I. The Sources . . . . . . 57
Evaluation of the Source Material 66
WRITING SYSTEM AND PHO NOLOGY

II. System of Writing 68

III. Phonology. 7£
VI I NHlllTSVERZEICHNIS

3.0. General 7I
3.I. List of phonemes. 72
3·1.1. fiI . 72
3·I.2·lltl 72
3.2. Many-to-one correspondence of signs to values 72
3.3. One-to-many correspondence of signs to values 73
3+ One-to-one correspondence 73
304·1. [i] 73
3+2. Homophony in the syllabary 74
3·5. Consonant Clusters . 74
3.6. Geminated Consonants 75
MORPHOLOGY

IV . Form Classes ; Inflection for Person and Gender 75

4·0. General 75
+I. Personal suffixes . 76
+I. I. RAE personal suffixes 76
+1.2. Verbal inflection 76
4. 2 . Gender suffixes 77
4.2.1. Example of nominal inflection. 77
+3· Indeclinables . 78
++ Bases 78
4+1. Nominal derivation 78
+5 · Verb-base 78
4·5· 1. Simple verb-base 78
4·5·1.1. Reduplicated verb-base 79
4·5·1.2. Compound verb-base 79
4.5. 2 . Enlarged verb-base 79
+5·2.I. Base enlarged with -ilia and - 1' -:- 7IIa . 79
+5.2 .2. Base enlarged with -n'/{.. 79
4.6. Clitics. 80
+6.I·0Q ~
+6.2.lal 80
4.6. 3.~ 8I
+6+ Illtl 8r
+7. "Moods" 82
+7·I. ME I mperative. 82
4.7.2. RAE Imperative 82
v. Nom inals 82
5.0. General 82
 INHAl TSVERZEI CHN IS vn

5.0.1. Derived nominals . 83

5.0. 2. Other nominals. . 83
5.1.1. Active Participles . 83
5.1.2. Passive Participles 84
5.1.3. Inflection of participles 84
5.1.3.1. Inflection of the active participle 8-1
5.1.3.2. Inflection of the passive participle 84
5.1.3.3. Paradigms . . . 85
5.2. Nominals of the second sub-class 85
5.2.1. Indefinite . . . . 86
5.2.1.1. RAE aM" 86
5.2.2. Negative. . . . . 86
5.2.3. The numeral ki 86
5.2-4- QlIotational morphemes 1Jla- : m all- 86
5.2.5. The RAE Demonstrative lllPif . 87
5.2.6. Nouns . . . . . . . . . . . 87
5.2.6.1. Primary nouns . . . 87
5.2 .6.2 . "Nominal derivation" 87
5.2.6.3. "Case system". 88
VI. Indeclinables. . . . . . . . . . . 88
6.0. General . . . . . . . . . . 88
6. I. P ersonal names, personal pronollls, and kinship terms 88
6. I. I. Personal pronouns. . . . . . ...... 89
6.1.1.1. "Irregular" forms of the first person
pronoun .. . . . . . 89
6.1.1.2. Resumptive pronoun . 90
6.1.2. RAE possessive pronouns . 90
6.1.3. The ME pronominal system 90
6.2. Other indeclinables. . . . . 92
SYNTAX
VII. Sentence Types 92
7.0. General . . 92
7.r. Sentence Types 93
7.1. 1. Prohibitive clauses 94
7.1.2. Negative clauses 94
7.1.3. Precative clauses 95
7.1.4- Nominal clauses. 95
7.1.5. Included clauses 95
7.2. Interrogative clauses . 95
VIII INHAL l'SVERZE1CHN IS

VIll. Constructions. . . . . . . 96
General . . . . . . .
8.0. 96
8.1. Locative constructions. 96
8.1.1. List of simple clirectional elements. 96
8.1.2. List of compound directional elements 97
8.1.3 · Construction of directional elements. . 97
8.1.3.1. Locatives formed with personal pronouns 97
8.1.3.2. Locatives formed with nominals. . . . 97
8·1.3 ·3. Locatives formed with groups of words 97
8·1.4. Constructions with uk'"" §a.m , and si 98
8·1.4.1. Constructions with l£ua. 98
8.2. Concord. . . . . 99
8.2.!. Verbal concord . . . 99
8.2.2. Nominal concord . . 99
8.:2.2.1. Examples of concord between a noun
(or proper name) and its appositions. . 100
8.2.2.2. Examples of concore\ in included phrases 100
8.3. Possessive constructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
S.3. !. Possessive constructions with personal pronoun I02
8.3.2 . Possessive constructions with a clause 103
8·3·3. The RAE genitive . . . . . . . . . 103
8+ Quotations. . . . . . . .... .. .. 1 03
8.5 · Features pointing to grammatical change in RAE. 103
Appendix. Sample Texts . . . 1 04
A. Midclle Elamite. . . . . . 104
B . Royal Achaemenid Elamite. !OS
Abbreviations . . . . . . 109
Bibliography. . . . . . . 109
Addenda to Chapter Three III
Addenda to the Appenclix. II6
III. Hethitisch, Palai sch, Luwisch und Hieroglyphen-
luwisch (ANNELIES MMMENHUBER) II9
I. F onSCHUNGSLA GE

1. Sprach- und Volksbezeichnungen. II9

§ I Einleitl1ng . . . . . . . . . . II9
§ 2 Sprachbezeichnungen. . . . . . 120
§ 3 Landes- und VolksbezeichlltU1gen 122
II. Die Erforschung der in Keilschrift iiberlieferten Sprachen
Hethitisch, Palaisch l1nd Luwisch . . . . . . . . . . . 1 27
 INHALTSVERZE ICHNIS IX

§ 4 Die Wiederentdeckung der I-Iethiter bis 1915/7 127

§ 5 Die Erforsc~ung des I-Iethitischen bis ea. 1930 129
§ 6 Die Erforschung cles I-Iethitischen bis I962/3 . 131
§ 7 Die Erforschung des Palaischen. 141
§ 8 Die Erforschung des Luwischen. I43
§ 9 Ausgangsbasis fiir das Hethitische, Palaische, Luwisehe
1962/3 147
Ill. Die ErforsclltUlg der hethitischen Hieroglyphenschrift W1d
des Hieroglyphenluwischen I4S
§ 10 Schrifterforschung an H and del' Texte. 148
§ I I Schriftgeschichtliche Ergebnisse auf Grund der Siegel
und Bilingnen 156
§ 12 Ausgangsbasis fiir clie het hitische Hiel'oglyphenschrift
uncl clas I-lieroglyphenluwische 1962/3 160
IV . Schriftfragen. 161
§ 13 Anfange del' Sehrift in Anatolien 161
§ I4 Aufbau cler lueroglyphenhethitisehen Sehrift. 167
§ 15 Zur Verwendung der Kcilschrift bei den H etlutern 173

2 . DIE V ERWANDTS CHAFT Z\VISCHEN DE l\[ HETHITI SCHEN , PALAISCHE,N

UND LUWISCHEN

v . Einfiihrung in die hethitische Grammatik . 180

§ 16 Die Sondersituation des Hethitischen ISO
§ 17 Regeln del' hethitischen Wortbildung 183
§ I S Nomen, Einleittmg 192
§ 19 Nomen, Paradigmen. . 193
§ 20 Zum Gebrauch del' Kasns 199
§ 21 Pronomen, Einleittmg . 206
§ 22 Pronomen, Paracligmen 208
§ 23 Verbum, F ormenbestand nnd Wortbildung . 2I5
§ 2-1 Ausdrucksmoglichkciten des hethitischen Verbums 2IS
§ 25 Aktiv -11I£-Konjugation, Paradigmen. 223
§ 26 Aktiv -bi-Konjugation, Paradigm en . . 232
§ 27 Paradigmen fiir das Medium . . . . . 242
VI. Die Beziehungen zwischen dem Hethitischen, Palaischen und
Luwischcn: Bewcis fiir eine engere hethitisch-lnwische
Sprachgruppe . . . . . 248
§ 28 Methodologisches. . . . . . . . 248
§ 29 Gemeinsame Nellernngen . . . . 249
§ 30 Gemeinsame Verlustcrscheinungen . 253
x INHALTSVERZEICHNIS

§ 31 Resume filr das Ur-Hetlutisch-Luwische . 259

VII. Die ursprilngliche Stelhmg der Sprachen innerhalb des
I-Iethitisch-Lu\\~schen . . . . . 261
§ 32 Palaisch. . . . . . . . . . .
§ 33 Zur ursprilnglichen Stellnng des Lu\viscben
§ 34 Die Stelhmg des Hethitischen
VIII. Die nachtragliche Auseinanderentwicklung des I-Iethitischen,
Palaischen und Luwischen in Anatolien . . . . . . . . 265
§ 35 Fremdsprachiger Einflu13. . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
§ 36 Nachtragliche Verlusterscheinungen in einzelnen Spra-
chen des I-Iethitisch-Luwischen . . . . . . . . . . 272
§ 37 Eigenwillige System bildungen oder Abandemngen des
ererbten Sprachznstandes. . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
§ 38 Der Typus der hethitisch-Iuwischen Sprachen in
his tori scher Zeit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

3 . DAS INDOGERi'lfANISCFIE EH.BE B[ I-IETHITISCH-LuWISCHEN

IX. Die hethitisch-Iuwische Nomiualflexion

§ 39 Einfiihrung . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
§ 40 Die wichtigsten Stammklassen . . . . . 279
§ -II Uberblick iiber clie hethitisch-Iuwischen Nominal-
suffixe . . . . . . . . . . . 29 1
§ 42 Die ur-hethitisch-luwischen Flexionsendungen. . . . 3 00
§ 43 Sonderentwickhmgen im I-Iethitischen, Palaischen und
Luwischen. . . . . . . . . . . .
x. Die hethitisch-lnwische Pronominalflexion
§ 44 EinHihmng . . . . . . . . .
§ 45 Flexion. . . . . . . . . . .
XI. Die hethitisch-Iuwische Verba1flexion 313
§ 46 EinHihrung . . . . . . . . . 313
§ 47 Zum urindogermanischen Verbalsystem. 315
§ 48 Aktiv Pr,isens -II/.i-Konjugation. . . . 318
§ 49 Aktiv Prateritum des Palaischen, Luwischen und
Hieroglyphenluwischen: hethitisch Priiteritum der -11/.;-
Konjugation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
§ 50 Aktiv Imperativ. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
§ 5I Die in mehreren hethitisch-luwischen Sprachen be-
zeugten Meclialendlmgen . . . . . . . . . . . 324
§ 52 Die Entstehung der hethitischen -/zi-Konjugation 329
 INI-IALTSVERZEICHNIS XI

XII. Die Stellung des I-Iethitisch-Luwischen iImerhalb des Ur-

indogermanischen. . . . . . . . . . '. . . . , 335
§ 53 Bisherige Untersuchungsergebnisse. . . . . 335
§ 54 Definition Urindogermanisch. Indogermanisch. 339
§ 55 2ur Dialektologie des Urindogermanischen . . 342
§ 56 2ur clialektgeographischen Stellung des Hethitisch-
Luwischen innerhalb des Indogermanischen. 34 6
XIlI. Anhang: Textproben . 349
§ 57 Vorbemerhmgen 349
§ 58 I-Iethitisth
§ 59 Palaisch. . . . .
§ 60 (Keilschrift-)LulVisch ,
.. 349
3-J-0
355
IV. Lykisch (GtlNTER NEUMANN) 358
I. Die Textquellen des Lykischen 35 8
§ I Das Land L ykien '. . . . 35 8
§ 2 Die Quellen der lykischen Sprache 35 8
II. Die Geschichte der Eriorsclllmg . . . . 360
§ 3 Die Bereitstellung des inschriftlichen Materials 360
§ 4 Die Deutung der I nschriften und clie Erschliessung der ,.
Sprache . . . . . . . . ......... . 361
§ 5 Die Sprachverhaltnisse il11 I. Jahrtausend v. Chr.
Geburt. . . . . . ... 366
§ 6 Die Frlihgeschichte Lykiens. . . 369
Ill. Probleme der Schrift . ..... . 37 1
§ 7 Das lykische Schriftsystem und seine Herkunft 37 1
§ 8 Einzelheiten der lykischen Schrift , 37 1
§ 9 Die lykischen Zahlzeichen . . 37 2
§ 10 Die Umschrilt (Transliteration) . . 373
IV. Lautlehre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
§ I I Moglichkeiten der Sprachvergleichung 373
§ 12 Vokale . . . . . 375
§ 13 I-Ialbvokal e . . . . . 37 6
§ 14 Liquiden und Nasale 37 6
§ 15 Dentale. . 377
§ 16 Labiale. . 37 8
§ 17 Gutturale . 378
§ 18 Hauchlaute und Zischlaute . 379
v. Wortbildlmg . ' . . . . . 380
§ 19 Wortbildungssuffixe der Substantiva . 3 80
XII INHALTSVERZEICHNIS

§ 20 Wortbildungssuffixe del' Adjecliva . 381

§ 21 Komposition. . . . . . . . 382
VI. Flexion von Nomen nnd Verbum 382
§ 22 Das Nomen. . . .
§ 23 Die Stammklassen .
§ 24 Die Endungen. . .
. . 382
383
385
§ 25 Die Pronomina . . 3 83
§ 26 Das Verbum; Formenbestand. 388
§ 27 Die Verbalendungen. . . . . 388
§ 28 N ebenformen au! -s- und reduplizierte Verben 39 0
VII. Andere Wortarten . . . . . . 39 0
§ '29 Praverbien und Aclverbien 39 0
§ 30 Konj unktionen 39 2
§ 31 Negationen 394
§ 32 Zahlworter . . 394
VIII. Anhallg: Textproben (§ 33) 395
V. Lydisch (ALFRED HEUBECK). 397
Qllellen . . . . . . . . .
I. 397
§ I Apellativa unci Namen aus nichtlycliseher Uberlieferu.l1g 397
§ 2 Lyclisehe Insehriften. . . 39 8
II. Lyclisehe Sehri!t (§ 3) . . . . 399
111. Gesehichte cler Forsehung (§ 4). 401
IV. Lautlehre . . . . . . . . . . 40 3
§ 5 Lau t bestancl . . . . . . 40 3
§ 6 Besonclere lautliehe ErseheiIltlJlgen. 40 4
v. Formenlehre . . . . . . . . . 40 5
§§ 7-10 Nomen unci Pronomen. 40 5
§§ II-I2 Verbum. 4II
§ 13 Incleclinabilia 41 5
VI. Satzlehre 416
§ 14 Kongruenz 416
§ IS Kasus . 416
§ 16 Verbum 41 7
§ 17 Satz und Satzgefiige . 41 7
VII. Stellung des Lydisehen (§ 18) 41 9
VII!. Anhang: Textproben (§ 19) 424

VI. Hattisch (ANNELIES KAMMENHUBER)

I. Das hattisehe Spraehmaterial
 INHALTSVERZEICHNIS Xln

§ Einleitung . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I
§ Geographische Begrenzung des hattischen Sprach-
2
gebietes . . . . . . . .
§ 3 Das hattische Textmaterial
§ 4 Die hattischen Lehnworter 1m I-Iethitischen und
Palaischen. . . . . . . . 43 1
II. Die Erforschung des I-Iattischen 43 8
§ 5 Bisherige Erforsclnmg . . 43 8
§ 6 Zur Untersuchungsmethode . 44 0
III. Schrift- und Lautfragen. . . . . 442
§ 7 Zur Graphik des Hattischen 442
§ 8 Probleme bei der Ermittlullg des hattischen Laut-
stan des . . . . . . . 443
§ 9 Zum Vokalismus 445
§ 10 Zum Konsonantismus 448
IV. Das Nomen . . . . . . 450
§ I I Nominalgattungen -. 450
§ 1 2 Geschlecht . . . . 459
§ 13 "Numerus" . . . . 463
§ 14 Flexion, "Kasusformen" und -gebrauch 468
§ IS Zur Wortbildlmg (Pra- und Suffixe). 493
§ 16 Komposition. . . . . . . . . 495
§ 17 Reduplikation. . . . . . . . 498
v. Das Verbum (nebst Syntaktischem). 499
§ 18 ForschUJ1gsstand. . . -. . . 499
§ 19 Nominalsatze . . . . - . . . 503
§ 20 Das verbale Negationsprafix tas- 503
§ 21 Das Optativprafix te- . . . 504
§ 22 N ackte Stammform als verb ales Pradikat 507
§ 23 Auf (gewisse) Intransitiva beschrankte Verbal-
prafixe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
§ 24 Auf Transitiva beschrankte Verbalprafixe . 512
§ 25 Sonstige Prafixe an Intransitiva UJ1d Transitiva 516
§ 26 Bedeutungsgehalte der Verbalprafixe 526
§ 27 Ergebnis zum Verbum. . . . . 533
VI. Sonstige vVortarten und Syntaktisches 534
§ 28' "Pronominales" 534
§ 29 Konjunlctionen. . . . . • . . . 53 6
 XIV INHALTSVERZEICHNIS

§ 30 Partikeln. . . . . . 537
§ 3I Syntaktisches Resume 542
VII. Anhang: Textproben (§ 3 2 ) 544
Abkurzungsverzeichrris. Bibliographische Notiz und Notiz zur
I'
Transkription der Keilschdft zu den Beitriigen Kammenhnber,
Neumann und Heubeck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547

Register . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gesamtregister (HEIDRUN WUR1I)
Einzelregister . . . . . . . . .
 TI-IE ELAMITE LANGUAGE
by
ERICA REINER

Foreword
The manusclipt of this grammatical sketch was submitted to the
publishers in January, I960.
I wish to express my thanks to them for the privilege of making a few
changes and additions in the proof for the purpose of bringing the
manuscript up to date. I also had the opportunity to add two sections,
one containing a new treatment of certain parts 01 the phonology which
were t reated in a different or less complete manner in the grammar
itself, and the other a translation of and commentary on the recently
discovered Middle Elamite bilingu<ll text.
Chicago, Decemher, I966.

IJllrodu ction

SHORT HISTORY OF ELAMITE STUDIES

It is well known to the historian and the philologist of the ancient
Near East that the trilingual inscriptions of the Achaemenid kings
served as the main starting point to t he decipherment of the languages
written in the cuneiform script. After G. F. GROTEr-END had identified
in r802 the language of the "first column" as Old Persian-whi ch he
called Zend- and the writing as alphabetic script, and opened the path
for the decipherment through comparison with Sanskrit and Avestan,
it was soon recognized that the "third column" was in Babylonian,
written with a different set of cuneiform characters in a syllabic script;
the decipherment of this language steadily progressed from then on,
aided substantially by comparison with the rela ted languages of the
Semitic family.
It was the "second column" of Darius' inscription that longest resisted
the efforts of scholars, although study of it had begun even earlier than
that of the Babylonian text. The language, variously called iVIedian,
Scythian, Susian, Elamite, etc., was found to be without linguistic kin,
 THE ELAi\UTE LANGUAGE 55

and, in fact, has resisted successful comparison with any other known
linguistic family up to the present day '). However, due to the efforts
of the pioneers VVESTERGAARD, I-IINCKS, RAWLINSON, OPPEH.T, NORRIS
and others, a first attempt to read and interpret the "second column" was
soon made, and the Achaemenid royal inscriptions could be considered
deciphered with the publication of F. H. WEISS BACH's "Die Achiimeniden-
inschriften zweiter Art", Leipzig r890 (later superseded by the same
anthor's "Die Keilinschriften der Achameniden" [Vorderasiatische
Bibliothek III, I9Ir]). About that time, when the French excavations
at Susa, the capital of Elam, turned up a number of texts written in
the same language, decipherment and understanding were given fresh
impetus, largely due to the ingenuity of that most imaginative and
original of scholars, Father Vincent Schei!.
The interest of scholars working on the Elamite texts has as a rule
been centered on one or the other of the main periods and text groups.
Royal Achaemenid Elamite, i.e., the Elamite of the royal texts written
by the Achaemenian Darius and his successors (henceforth abbreviated
as RA E), was the first to claim the attention of scholars, and has had
a renewal of interest in recent years since the excavations nf the Persian
Expedition of the Oriental Institute at Persepolis, under first E. HERZ-
FELD, then ERICH SCHMIDT, yielded not only additional royal inscriptions,
but also over two thousand administrative tablets found in the forti-
fication wall (hereafter called Fortification tablets), and in the Treasury
(the so-called Treasury tablets) '). In fact, it is the only period-resp,
dialect-of Elamite that has been made the subject of descriptive
linguistic analysis 3), The earlier Elamite material (i,e" the texts from
Susa, most of which are published in the Memoires de la Delegation en
Perse, especially l1fDP III, V, and XI) was first interpreted by the
AssyTiologists SCHElL and WEIssBACH, and attracted the non-Assyrio-
logists HDsING, BORK anel KONIG, whose understanding of Elamite was
usually biased by their attempt to establish affiliations \\~th Caucasian
languages or -with Dravidian. In more recent years, important contribu-
tions on detail were made by ''I. VON BRANDENsTEIN, and by J. FRIE-
DRICH and W. F. HINZ (for details see the bibliography), and a succinct
I) for an account of the decipherm ent, sec A. ]. BOOTH, The Discovery lI/1d D':CI'jihcrmellt of
1ft.:. Trilingual CWICljorm !Jgcri/Jfiolls, London 190:::; PAHnOT, Archeologie mcso/JQtamieJwc. J. Les
Ctnl)cs, Paris 19_16, pp. I09f1.; S. A. PAUlS, The A /ltiquit)' oj Iraq, Copenhagen 1956, Chapter
III, pp. 9_1'1.
~) A better term for these administrative documents would be, according to a suggestion of
G. G. CAMEHON, AchacmOlid ware!touse r.:cords .
3) I-I. H. PAPER, Tlte Pho/lofogy amf Morpholoc~' of Ro-yoi Aclmemenirf Elami!e, Ann Arbor, 1955,
hereafter abbreviated PAPER.
 56 .UTKLEINASIATISCHE SPRACHEN

but excellent and critical analysis of Elamite based on both the Susan
and the RAE material was given by RENE LABAT in his Structure de la
langue "lamite (henceforth referred to as Labat). Repeated collations of
the Bisutun inscription by G. G. CAMERON in I948 and I957 and his
excellent publication of the Treasury tablets in I948 spun'ed new interest
in the interpretation of Achaemenid Elamite; here the works of CAMERON
himself, and several studies pertaining to grammar based on the as yet
unpublished Fortification texts by R. T. HALLOCK have to be mentioned;
for details, see again the bibliography.
Although speaking a language related neither to Sumerian nor to
Akkadian, the Elamites were under the cultural influence of neighboring
Babylonia. They borrowed its writing system and used Akkadian in
the redaction of both royal and private documents. Scribes were trained,
as in Babylonia, by copying vocabularies and, later on, literary texts, in
the Mesopotamian scribal traclition. Periods of closer cultural dependence
alternated with periods when linguistic independence follows a surge of
political power, bringing to expression a strong and persistent native
strain of tradition which manifests itself even under the Akkadian garb.
Before the Mesopotamian writing system was taken over in Elam, there
e"isted in the region a different system of writing, which for a while
coexisted with cuneiform script but was subsequently abandoned. Tllis
writing system is as yet un deciphered, and the language it represents is
also unknown although it is usually called Proto-Elamite. It first appears
on clay tablets-of economic nature- wllich are most probably to be
dated to the Jemdet Nasr period (cca. 3000 B.C.), a little after the time
when Sumerian writing first appears. Subsequently, in the Old Akkadian
period (cca. 2200 B.C.), a more developed form of tllis writing was used
to engrave on stone the earliest inscriptions of the native rulers of Susa.
However, simultaneously, inscriptions in Akkadian and using the cunei-
form system of writing, appear in Elam; some of these are on one and
the same monument, side by side with an inscription in Proto-Elamite
(e.g., MDP VI 1'1. 2 No. I) ').
With the introduction of the cuneiform system of writing Proto-Elamite
disappears, and with a single exception, the so-called "Treaty of Naram-
Sin" (see below p. 57), no inscription is composed in the native language
until the XIII'h century. Until that time, all cuneiform texts from Susa
are in the Akkaclian language, but in an Akkaclian that, in a number of
features of script, language, and content, differs from the Mesopotamian
1) An attempt at the decipherment of the Proto-Elamitc royal inscriptions by W. Him, Tranica
Antiqua II (1962), 1-21, has not found general acceptance.
 THE ELAMITE LANGUAGE 57

dialects. Tlus indicates that the scribal tradition, after having been
adopted [Tom the Babylonian, went its own way in Elam, whether this
was due to a spirit of independence and innovation, or to a subsequent
break in communication. The differences manifest themselves in matters
of writing: both in the forms of the signs and in their values, as also in
material deviations from iVIesopotamian practice. For instance contracts
from Susa often have the contestation clause not written on the clay,
but impressed from a seal that was engraved with tlus recurrent formula.
Another peculiarity: a clay tablet containing dream-omens, also from
Susa but from a slightly later period, has on the obverse and reverse an
arrangement of columns which js unique in cuneifonn literature. As is to
be expected, the difference in culture is reflected in the content of these
texts, even when typologically they can be matched with BabylOIuan
counterparts. Documents such as sales, bequests, adoptions, etc., contain
clauses that are not known from Babylonian texts. Tlus shows that in
legal practice and terminology there was a native tradition in Elam 1).
From tombs come a few literary texts in Akkadian with prayers of the
occupant of the tomb; aside from invoking Elamite deities, their content
too shows that they represent an expression of Elamite beliefs and not
a Babylonian tradition. The few royal inscriptions written in Akkadian
also present peculiar features; for an evaluation of these, see below p. 66.

Chapte!' One
THE SOURCES

Aside from a few Elamite words-such as personal names, names of

professions or officials-in Akkadian documents from Elam, and another
small gronp of words identified as Elamite (i.e., provided with the remark
"in Elam") in Akkadiari lists, the source material for the knowledge of
Elamite is the body of texts written in the Elamite language.
The earliest text in Elamite, as mentioned above, is the "Treaty of
Naram-Sin". The interpretation of tlus text, written on clay in six
columns on each side of the tablet, and destroyed in several places, is very
difficult; about aU that we can recognize with certainty is the invocation
to the gods of the Elamite panllieon at the beginning and, in a shorter
form, several times in the text; the repeated mention of the name N aram-

1) After the studies of Paul I..::mchnl,er, ior recent literature on Elnmite legal practices see
J.l":lima, "Ledroit elamitc au lime millcnaire avo n. C. ct sa position envers Ie droit babylonicn",
ArOr XXXI (1963), :287-309; id., "Dollatio nes morfis causa, nach den nklmclischen Rechtsurl;;undcn
alls Susa," Festschrift J. Friedrich, :!:!9-5g.
58 ALTKLEI NASIATISC HE SP RACH EN

Sin ; and a curse- or blessing-formula at the end. The designation

"treaty" is based on the one phrase which can be interpreted as "The
enemy of Naram-Sin is my enemy, the fri end( /) of Naram-Sin is my
friend( /)". However, there can be no doubt that the language of this
tablet is the same-although perhaps belonging to an earlier stage or to
a different dialect- as that of t he Elamite t exts known to us from later
periods.
Although texts of economic nature were composed in Sumerian and
Akkadian in E lam in the Ur III and Old Babylonian periods, no E1amite
text is attested again until t he XIII LIi century. An apparent exception
consists of two fragmentary inscriptions of Siwepalarhuppak, ruler of
Elam approximately contemporaneous \\~th Hammurapi (about 1750) ,
which were signalled by SCHELL in RA XXXIII 152, and published by
iVI. R UTTE N in M DP XXXI 162 and 16+ Although Siwepalarhuppak is
the speaker in t his text, both the fact that this would be the only texl
extant from the Old Babylonian period, and the fact that the writing
and language is similar to iVliddle E lamite (hence forth abbr. ME), lead
me to suspect that the texts were composed at a later date. The small
fragment Lenormant, Choix No. 41 , previollsly considered to come from
the Old Akkadian period, can now likewise be attributed to the XlIIul
century, see Reiner, "The Earliest Elamite Inscription /", ] N E S XXIV
(19 6 5), 337-4 0 .
The first of the Elamite rulers to record his building activities was
Humban-umena. From llis time on, until the end of the xn UI century
(Hutelutlls-InslIsinak). there is a rich inscriptional material of dedications
of temples a nd cultic objects, from Liyan, from Susa, and hom Choga-
Zambi l. 40 kms. to the south-east of SlIsa, where stood a monumental
temple-tower, built by HlImban-lImena's son Untas-Naprisa ') . The
inscriptions are on bricks and range from four to ten lines, recording the
name of th e Icing and his titles, the name of the temple or part thereof,
or the designation of the cult object, and the nam e of the god to whom
it was declicated, with occasional mentions of the work done on t hat
construct ion by the king's predecessors and the purpose of the dedication,
and often ending with a short wish for the we][are of the dedicating Icing

I) The nallle o f the i.iug, prc" io l1sly read as eit her Uul,,!i·!·llllllbal\ or Unta;;- ,IGAL, has hccn
dCltlOI\stral cd to be Unlas--Nap(i)risa by Him, .INI:'5 XXI V ( 1905), 351-5 .1. The SUlllcrograrn
:\ N.GAL docs lIo t s tand :15 a logogram for' th e god I-Iumban, but is a compound of the SUlIIcrograrus
DI I'\G l R "god" (or :\N "hi ghes t god") amI GA L "great" and is to be rend in Elamitc as IUl pir
ri.far. l\"o tc , hOII'!!Yer, that the god of Dcr, whose Ilame is also usuall y written with the S Ul!lcrog ram
AN.GAL, is trauslated into Aldmdiall <l!:i .-JIIIIIII ral)!i "great A nu " in the lime of E sarhaddoll , sec
Borger E s;tr!L ., p. 7.]: ~O, also p. 8.1 r. .1::, aud (with variilut 'Q';::\.D1) p. tZZ, (bron. 680/79.
 THE EL'u\ IITE LANGUAGE 59

and his family. The text of any single king is styled very much in the
same way; there are usually only TI1inor spelling val-jants, and in many
instances the only words that change are the name of the temple and
the gael. Beside these baked bricks, glazed bricks and stone objects
bearing the name of the king or of the god have been found in Choga-
Zambi!. Of a stela of Unta,-Naprisa only a few fragmentary lines are
preserved (see PtzARD, RA XIII II9ff., ROSTOVZEFF, RA XVII II3ff.).
The bronze statue of Napir-asu, wife of Unta, -Naprisa, is inscribed with
an Elamite curse formula. Since the material is only seemingly abundant,
but is in fact very scanty-hundreds of bricks bear the same or similar
inscriptions-not much information can be gained from it as to the
structure and the vocabulary of the language. In fact, in the few instances
when the inscriptions deviate fTom the stereotype, they become extremely
difficult to interpret.
Little help is gained for the study of these texts from the Middle
Elamite period from Akkadian parallels and bilingual texts. The only
Akkadian inscriptions extant are several copies of one brick inscription
of Humban-umena (i"vIDP XXXII I3f., I) and another of his son Untas-·
Naprisa (ibid. 14fl., II), and the Akkadian curse formulae added by
Vntas-Naprisa on a statue which he brought home as booty probably
from [Tup]lia;; and on two statue-fragments (MDP XXVIII 321.), also
on a brick (MDT' XXXII p. 74 No. XXV/z) where they follow the
Elamite inscription. This juxtaposition of Akkadian and Elamite parallels
the practice attested in the Olel Akkadian period, when an AJ.;:kaclian
inscription was cngrav~d upon two statues inscribed in Proto-Elamite
(cf. above p. 56) . The first-and only-actual bilingual from the Middle
Elamite period is a brick inscription from Choga Zambil, published as
TZ 3I/32 (previous number: TZ 46/47) by ill. J. Steve, Iranica Antigua II
(I962), 7211.; a translation and running glossary of this text is found
below, Pl'. II6 fl.
Under the Sllccessors of Untas-Naprisa, there are not even such
virtual bilingual texts any more to give help toward the understanding
of unilingual Elamite texts. Only one short votive inscription from
Sutruk-Nahunte (ca. I207-II7I), and Kutir-Nahunte (ca. II70-II66) each
are extant in Akkadian, whereas inscriptions in Elamite of these kings
are in abundance. Neither the greatest king of this dynasty, Silhak-
Insusinak (ca. II65-II5I), nor his son I-Iutelutn,-Insu, inak, with whose
reign the Elamite empire is eclipsed, have left any Akkadian inscriptions.
Many of the inscriptions of the days of this "empire" arc votive inscrip-
tions on bricks similar to the ones discussed above, and are intelligible to
60 ALTKLEINASIATISCHE SPRACHEN

the same extent, interpretation being based on the repetitive context, on

deviating clauses that can be singled out on the basis of permutation,
and also, to a lesser extent, on Akkadian parallels. Aside from building
inscriptions '), Sutruk-Nahunte left us records of his conquests (d. below)
engraved on stelae or statues he brought back as trophies from Babylonia
(for this Elamite custom d. above p. 59). The stela with the Code of
Hammurapi was likewise effaced in part to provide room for such a
triumphal inscription, which was then never engraved on the stone.
Sutruk-N ahunte also recorded his transporting of the stelas of his pre-
decessors Humban-umena and Untas-Naprisa to Susa. The longest text
of Sutruk-Nahunte is a stela (described by LENORMANT Choi" No. 32
as "une sorte d'obelisque de pierre"), which presents great difficulties
because it is on the one hand fragmentary, and on the other hand, the
key words in it still defy interpretation. In it t he king describes how his
predecessors took (conquered?) certain objects( 1) which are termed
/t.'/fsa liitei< '), and which he himself brought to the acropolis of Susa.
Here we experience anew the difficulties that arise when no parallel text
in another language can give a clue to the general tenor of an Elamite
inscription.
I-lis successors, Kutir-Nahunte and Silhak-Insusinak, continued the
tradition of votive inscriptions, similar in phraseology to the earlier
texts. The longest such inscription is one written in nine columns on
a bronze beam by Silhak-Insusinak, yet it is not different from the usual
styling, and only adds a long and elaborate curse-formula. However, we
may observe the stylistic tendency of this king to commemorate his
building activities and ornamentation of temples and sanctuaries in
"collective documents", that is, beside bricks whjch record the dedication
of a building, and objects inscribed with their dedication, one of his
inscriptions enumerates aU the t emples he built throughout the land or
to several deities. Sometimes these indi\~dual achievements are separated
by an invocation to the deity, which introduces each section . A similar
stylistic device is used [or the one inscription of Silhak-Insusinak which
is a historical record, wherein he lists the cities he conquered, divided in
several groups, perhaps in an annalistic style. The last king of this period

I) New briel; inscriptions of Sutru !,-Nnhunte were discovered at th o modern village site Deb·i·
Now, across tlle river from Chagha ZamiJil, see R. Ghirshmall, Iranica Antiqua lIT (I9G3), 8 (in ail,
fiv e fra gments, known to me through the courtesy of M. J. 5to\"0).
~) CAMltRON, HE! p. toG and 11. 26 suggested that th e word means "precious wood", HtNl.,
ZA 50 25::1, translates "Beutekriegcr", l\lorc recently, Hin;:. suggests that the words hlJs(I hilek mean
"Hurncr-\\ricgcr", scc Or. N5 XXX[ (19G : 1 ), 3.1 ff.
 THE ELAi\HTE LANGUAGE 61

of Elamite power, HutelutuS-Insusinak, keeps the style of the traditional

Elamite inscriptions, even shows a preference for archajzing sign-forms,
but his language already indicates linguistic changes that will predominate
in the later period.
The stylistic innovations of Silhak-Insusinak create di ffic ulties for us
in understanding his language. His inscriptions deviate more and more
from the types we know from the Sumero-Babylonian tradition and which
enabled us to draw at least rough parallels in content. Hence his voca-
bulary and linguistic structure indicate that he was independent, power-
ful, or bold enough to break away from the "western" tradition and
create his own, "national" style. It is therefore the more unfortunate that,
after his reign, for about 400 years we have no records written in Elamite.
If we had, they would at the same time testify to the admission into
literacy of native Elamite types of expressions, and to the evolution of
the language which shows a great leap from the Middle period to the next
attested Late Elamite period.
In the VIllh century, our records consist no more solely of royal, votive,
or historical inscriptions. Along with these, economic and literary
documents written in the native language appear. AlTIOng the kings,
Sutruk-N ahunte II (717-699). Hallusu-Insusinak (699-693). Silhak-
Insusinak II (ca. 681-662) ' ), Tepti-Humban-Insusi nak (ca. 663-653),
and Atta-hamiti-Insusinak (653-648), who reigned in tlus troubled period
until the conquest and destruction of Susa by Assnrbanipal (640 B.C.),
continued to record their dedications in the traditional manner, although
a change in spelling and language is manifest. Other approximately
contemporary display texts include the stela of Sutruru, and a recently
discovered bronze plaque from Persepolis (SCHMIDT, Persepolis II 641.).
studied by C\MEIlON, but the exact tenor and purpose of which is yet
unknown. The stela (MDP V No. 86) usually considered as an inscription
of a priest named Sutruru (see Cameron HEf p. 159) should, according
to my interpretation, be considered a stela (or boundary-stone-no
indication as to the actual shape of the monument is available) recording
a royal grant of Sutruk-Nahunte II to the priest Sutruru; and the
districts mentioned in it may. refer to the districts to which either an
exemption was granted, or which were supposed to deliver cattle and
sheep and other produce to the temple of Insusinak in which Sutruru
was priest. It should then be possible to interpret certain formulas by

I) Conte mporary of EsarhaddOIl in Assyria; dnting' Ull certain si uce Assyria n sources mention
in hi s stead the puppet l;:in gs Humban-Haltas II (681-675) and his successors who have lcft no
inscripti ons.
62 ALTKLEINASIATISCI-lE SPRACHEN

companson with the formulas of contestation known from Middle- and

Nco-Babylonian boundary stones.
Rock inscriptions (usually called Malamir inscriptions from the name
of the nearby plain) by a local ruler Hanni found east of Susa show that
the culture and literacy known hitherto only from royal inscriptions
from Suso. and Choga-Zambil had extended outside the immediate range
of the capital. In fact, style and vocabulary of Hanni's inscriptions are
very close to that of the last known royal documents, particularly those
of I-Iallusu-Insusinak and Atta-hamiti-Insusinak. It is customary to
look for the origin of Elamite penetration in the region of Malamir by
connecting the rock reliefs of Hanni with sixteen Akkadian legal texts
thought to originate in that provenience. However, in the introduction
to JlfDP XXII, p. v, SCHElL states that the tablets in question have
been bought from "un notable persan originaire du pays de Malamir".
Notwithstanding the fact that the origin of the seller could not have any
bearing on the provenience of tlIe tablets themselves, SCHElL seems to
have let himself be influenced by it and assumed that they represent a
different archive, coming from Malamir. As proof, he adduced certain
personal names that occur only in these texts. However, in the subse-
quent volumes of the MDP (XXIII, XXIV, and XXVIII), other legal
texts from Susa were published, and in their inventory of personal names
the same names as in the so-called Malamir tablets ("tablettes dites de
Malamir" SOrELL i.c.) occur, so SOrElL's contention cannot be upheld.
Moreover, one of the scribes of the "Malamir tablets", a certain .T ae, is
also the scribe of a legal text found at Susa (No. 29). The allusion of
]:EQUIER, M DP III p. 134, to Elamite contracts coming from Malamir
now in the British Museum, refers to the group of letters that will be
discussed below; the attribution of these to the site of Malamir
results from a confusion of "Malamir tablets" with "Malamir script and
language", as can be seen from the remarks of WEISSBACH, BA IV 168.
I-laving thus established ') that the site of Malamir is not known to have
yielded cuneiform tablets either in Elamite or in Akkadian, and that the
earliest occupancy of this site is not known, I w0111cllike to add however
that I-Ianni, whose inscriptions appear on the rock-reliefs, calls himself
ruler of Ajapir, and this geographic name is attested in the probably
contemporary economic texts from Susa (see presently).

1) For a more detailed presentation, ~ee Reiner, "i\J5.1illilir", R.·! LVII (r963), r69-i.j. The
suggestion of this article, that the texts corne from Susa or its vicinity, ha<; been confirmed by the
find oi :\l(]caciian legal texts in Susa, which contain the same oath iormula (by l".!nhuratir) 35 the 50-
called i\lalamir texts.
 THE ELAMITE LANGUAGE

It is also hom the VIllh century that records which have no public
character, i.e., are not display or votive inscriptions, make their appear-
ance for the first time. They consist of economic documents, letters, and
literary texts (omens).
The economic t ext s come hom Susa; they record deliveries of various
commodities to the palace or some other economic center. They are a bout
300 in number ') . These texts have been assigned to the period immediate-
ly preceding the rule of Nebuchadnezzar in Susa ' ). An interesting feature
of these texts is that some are case tablets-while in Babylonia proper
no case tablets exist after the Old Babylonian period- and that at least
two of them are sealed with a Babylonian cylinder seal inscribed with
a short prayer in Akkadian, a feature typical of t he Kassite period.
Probably contemporary with these texts is a group of 25 letters now
in the British Museum. Although their provenience is by no means
certain, they have been catalogued with the I';:ouyundjik collection,
which would indicate that they were found in Nineveh and thus date
before 6I2 B.C., when Nineveh was destroyed. Since among the econ omic
documents from Susa there is a similar letter (111 DP IX No . 88) , and
another letter of that t ype has been found in Susa (published by PAPER,
MDP XXXVI p. 79), their dating in the second half of the VIIlh century
is very likely, although the provenience indicated by t he Catalogue
number given to the letters in the British Museum does not necessarily
indicate that they actually corne from Nineveh-see the reserves of
SAYCE, A etes <in 6' Cong!'!:.s . .. p. 756. Many of these letters are frag-
mentary and very difficult to understand. A coUation in the British
Museum in May 1958 resulted in only a few corrections to the copies of
WElSSBACH (BA IV 175ff.). Hoivever, since the syllabary of th ese texts
resembles very closely that of the Treasury and Fortification tablets
fTom Persepolis, a better reading, and, eventually, better understanding
of the letters may be achieved in the' future .
Presumably from the same period comes the only literary text in
Elamite, a tablet with astrological omens, now in the Louvre, published
by SCHElL, RA XIV 29ff. The reverse of the tablet, baclly damaged, may
contain omens 01 a different type. The only other text tha t could be
compared is a small fragment of a tablet which, according to SCHElL , has
two columns-no economic text is written on two columns in tllis period
- and published in MDP XI No. 3 00. Whether this latter is an omen
text, another type of literary text, or, as SCHElL considers it, a building
1) Published in Mnp IX; acId o nc ill !liD? XI (No. 309) and one in MDP XXVIII (No. _1 68 ).
:) AI! earl y AchaclllCll id date is proposed hy CA ~{E AOS, PTT p. ~.l fl . 2.
 AL TKLEINASIATISCHE SPRAC I-IEN

inscription, can as yet not be decided 1). Another fragment that cannot
be placed, either chronologically or as to its genre, is a cuneiform inscrip-
tion on a sherd from Susa ("un fragment de vase susien en terre cuite"),
published by SCHElL, RA XXIV 43.
In the Vlth century, while E lam was under Babylonian rule, a group
of seven texts (MDP XI Nos. 301-307), and probably one more, published
in RA XXIV 40, represent Elamite formulations of contracts similar in
pattern to those of contemporary Babylonia. One of the tablets has a
case with the statement of t he subject matter, indicating the persistence
of the tradition of the case tablet (cf. above) in that region. Two frag-
mentary tablets published by PAPER, MDP XXXVI p. So£., Nos. 2 and
3, may belong with the above group. Since the next group of Elamite
texts, the Fortification tablets from Persepolis, begin \\~th the year 14
01 Darius, the mentioned economic a nd legal texts (Tom Susa, whose
exact dating is uncertain, may well represent the bridge between
the Elamite kingdom and the much better documen ted Achaemenid
period.
As tlus survey shows, the tradition of writing in the native language
was unbroken in Elam, both in its periods as national state and through
those of foreign domination, even if there are gaps in the preservation
of materials. It is therefore not surprising that the Achaemenid kings
used in their public documents Elamite as one of the official languages
of the kingdom, and that the language-or one of the languages-of
the administration continued to be Elamite, in Persepolis uncler Darius
and his successors, as it was in Susa from the VlI tI• century on 'i.
For the royal inscriptions o( the Achaemenid kings, a convenient
bibliography is given in R. G. KENT, Old Pel'sia'lt, (2nd ed., Revised,

1) The existence of an omen text cornpcsed in Elamitc is unique, bul Olll en texts cOlllpo~ed in
Elam in Akkadian language are kn own: one is OJ. tablet with dream omens (MDP XIV pI. .IS!., sce
OrrEI'IIED!, Drcam·{JODk :::Siff.), anoth er with astrological omens (SclI!m. , RA XIV qo) . Besides
these, writing habits peculiar Lo Elam indicate an E lamite prowniencc o i sOllie Babylonian copies
of olllcn tcx ts, lor these sec \VEIDSEIt , .-If/" I lJ. 6 and n. :.
~) Recently it has becn advanced by W. VOl' SOOEN (II'Z/,,!1l LV [ I 9S9] 49f.) that mami!e was
a living language Hnder CamiJyses, 011 the strength of a Nco-Babylonian document irolll Opis
(Camb. L\3) concerning the sale oi a slave girl, in which it is specified that the c u ~ to!l1ary mark ing
on the slave's haud , i.e., the name of tbe owner, is written both in Aldtadian (ak·kll-dn·nl·llllu)
and in Elamite (c!·/,,·/IIu!·fll·ti). This p;u,sage however canllot be used as arglllllcnt for eith er the
s lIr"ival of Elamitc or fo r the asslllnptio!l that the oWllcr's name was written in the "simplified
latc Elamite cuneiform" ( VON SODES, loe . , i/. p. 50), uccause the s igns in question should be [cad,
on the paleographi c evidence of the copy aud oi the collation as given in the cited article, as (Ib ·lfl·
//Jf!·nHi, this word belng the standard terlll for the Aramaic lang:uagc in the Nco-Assyrian doeu·
ments of the previous ce ntury. Although up to now the term AblnulI' was not iound attes ted in
Neo·13ahylonbn, it is much !!lorc lil,ely to suppose that the terlll was equall y in usc in the Nco·
Babylonian period, ,mci that the marldng of the owner's namc , besides being done in Ald,adian
cuueiform, was also done in an Aramaic alphabet.
 THE ELAMlTE LA NGUAGE

1953) pp. I07 f l. ') . The first trilingual inscriptions-Old P ersian, Elamite,
and Akkadian-date from Darius 'i. The most important inscription is the
Bisutun inscription of Darius, on which one copy of the Elamite version
, contains 323 lines, the second copy, recently read by G. G. CUllmaN,
only a few lines less. On this latter copy , see the articles of CA'IERON ,
JCS V +7ff. and j CS X l V 59fl. This inscription contains over 3,000 IVords,
while all the other royal inscriptions contain together less than 2,600
words, and are mostly repetitive. Hence the Bisutun inscription is the
most important source for Achaemenid Elamite, sec HALLOCK . j N ES
XVII 256fl.
The excavations of the Persian Expedition of the Oriental Institute at
Persepolis have brought to light several t housand clay tablets represent-
ing the accounting of the Achaemenid administration . Of these, the
Treasury tablets (114 in number) have been published by CAMERON
(PTT [= OJ P 65] and twentyfive additi onal texts in .1iV ES X VII 17211.,
JiVES XXIV (1965), 167-92). About 2,000 so-called Fortification tablets
- found in the fortification wall-still await integral publication, al-
though several of them have been partially published or quoted in various
articles by CAMERON and HALLOCI(.
Aside from the two maj or groups of royal inscriptions and economic
documents, only a few seal impressions, enameled ornamental nails and
decorative tiles inscribed with a royal name, fragments of a gold plaque
with remains of a few lines of inscrip tion, and the Achaemenid inscribed
weights contain additional Elamite material. For a complete bibliography
of the sources, I refer to my forthcoming corpus of Elamite texts.
Today the Achaemenid trilingual texts are basically sti ll the most
easily accessible and understandabl e and the largest body of sources for
the understanding of the Elamite language, as they were over a hundred
years ago when the first decipherment was made. They have furni shed
us the key to the grammar of Elamite and provided much of the known
vocabulary. On tlus basis, the interpretation of unitingual texts has been
j attempted. In spite of t he reservations that we shall present below in

I
detail as to the reliability of the trilingual inscriptions in matters of
grammar, it must be said that hardly any word appearing in a unilingual
t ext, which is not attested with its Old Persian or Babylonian equivalent
in the Achaemenid texts, can be more than approximated as to its
I) S illcc thilt date, lIew iraglilcnl s Wl"re pulilished by BOitGE lt illl d BIN ?, ZDMG 109 (II)S9)
117 IT. (Di\ln), am] by CA MEIW!', IVO II (195 9) .170 IT. (XPh = Daiva).
~ ) The trilin g ual "Cyrus" ill~Cripli(l!l CMb has been ;J SSig iI Cd to Darills by Ii allock, jNl!. S XVI I
(11)55), ~56 n. ~. ;md b y R BoltGIW and W. HOiz, "Eine Darci..s- llIst:hrifl ;HI" Pilsarllndac,"
ZDMG CIX ( 1959), I I 7 - 1:! 7.
'I alldl)1!cli lil'!' Or i clltali~tili, Abt. I, Hd . II, Ahscl ll i. I f:!, Lfg.:! 5
66 ALTKLEINASIATISCHE SPRACHEN

meaning, on the basis of guesses inferred from the context. Unfortunately,

Elamite words appearing in Akkadian lists (see FRANK , MADe IV 39ff.).
with one or two exceptions only, never appear in Elamite contexts.
Thus, the Elamite inscriptions of the Middle and of the Late-the Pre-
Achaemenid-periods, as well as the Achaemenid texts from the Treasury
and Fortifications at Persepolis, will always retain uncertainties. How-
ever, there is a possible method, not yet sufficiently applied, which may
further the understancling of the Middle E lamite texts. Although there
is only one bilinglial text from the Middle Elamite period, the Akkaclian
inscriptions of Humban-mnena and Untas-Naprisa mentioned above
may be considered virtual bilinguals, in that they probably represent the
Akkadian counterpart of the Elamite votive inscriptions. By juxtaposing
certain phrases of the Akkadian and Elamite texts respectively, we can
gain some clues to the meaning of the Elamite text. This method has
been used by I-IINZ in A,.Or XVIIl/I-2 , 2SSff. Another possibility is a
comparison of the Elamite inscriptions with similar dedications written
by Elamite rulers in Akkadian in earli er periods. If we single out the
Akkaclian phrases that are not stereotyped in Sumero-Akkaclian votive
inscriptions, we find a number of topoi that must correspond to Elamite
styling. Substituting these unusual Akkadian phrases in similar Elamite
contexts, we can arrive at translations of whole sentences that, considered
in themselves, would be difficult to understand. The method can and
shou ld be applied in a similar fashion to "ungrammatical" constructions
in those inscriptions from Elam which arc written in Akkadian. JlIst as
the grammar of the Akkadian of the Achaemenid inscriptions shows
foreign influence (for the whole question sec O. ROSSLER, Untersltc!t.u.u.gen
-fiber die a'/~kadisclle Fassll'Hg del' A chiimcwideJlinsc/lnjten, Diss. Berlin
1938). we have to assume that the grammar of the Akkadian of the
inscriptions of the Elamite kings is likewise influenced by their native
language.

EVALUATION OF THE SOU RCE i\lIATERIAL

The informativeness of the source material varies greatly with the

historical periods and the type of texts. Leaving aside OE (Old Elamite)
which is too scantily attested, we may say that of greatest reliability
for grammatical analysis are the ME (Middle Elamite) texts, that is,
the texts written at the time of a flourishing period of political inde-
pendence of Elan1. The royal inscriptions of this period are numerous,
but owing to their narrow topical range are of very limited morphological
usefulness. '
 THE ELAi\IITE LAN GUAGE

The ME economic texts-from the end of the ME period-also have

a very limited morphological usefulness, since their verb-inventory is
quite poor; these texts are valuable for their rich inventory of names of
obj ects, which, however, are very difficult to identify.
The Achaemenid material can be divided into two groups: unilingual,
and bi- or trilingual texts. The unilingual texts- usually referred to as
Treasury and Fortification texts-being of economic nature, have there-
fore the same shortcomings as the earlier economic texts. However, it
is to be expected that the eventual publication of the Fortification texts
by R. T. HALLOCK will provide a wealth of material for grammatical
investigations, over and above the lexical importance of these documents' ).
The most important source material nevertheless is Royal Achaemenid
Elamite (RAE), i.e., the bi- and trilingual royal inscriptions. They are,
first, easy to understand on the basis of the Old Persian, and, to a more
limited extent, of the Babylonian version. Then they contain a wide
variety of grammatical forms ancl syntactical constructions that are not
found in the texts from the earlier periods.
However, an important reservation must be made as to their reliability.
As has been pointed out only recently by H. B. ROSEN, IE] VII (1957)
130[1. , t hey represent a translation language. It is well known that the
RAE inscriptions contain many Old Persian loanwords, and even what
may be termed "loan-transcriptions", i.e., inflected Old Persian words
or groups of words simply transposed into the cuneiform syllabary. It
is furtherm ore possible to show that the syntax, and even the morphology
of RAE, often reflects Old Persian constructions. For examples that bear
out this character I have to refer to my article in BSLP LV 222 ff.
In view of these facts, the following grammatical analysis is based on
ME texts. These texts cover a period stretching roughly from the XIII"'
to t he VIlli' century. Although there can be no doubt about the fact that
a language does not remain unchanged for 600 years, the differences
that appear over tillS period of time can be considered negligible for the
purpose of this de~cription, while the differences in grammar between
ME and RAE are important enough to warrant a separation of the two
dialects.
However, information that can be gained from RAE will be used for
the reconstruction of such forms as are not, or not sufficiently, attested
in ME, and will be identified as RAE forms in each instance. Also, the
changes that can be observed between ME ancl RAE will be pointed
I) A close invcstigatioll oi this material hns already enabled H.. T. HALLOCK to \\Tite several
pCllctratill1; s tudi{'s about morpJlOlogica l points; for rcfl'rCIlCl'S, !Oct.' Biblio!,'Taphy.
68 ALTKLEINASI:\TISCIIE S PRACHEN

out , a nd the features characteristic of RAE will be treated under separate

sub-headings.
1 am aware of the shortcomings of this grammatical analysis. Since
ma ny ME texts are imperfectly understood, certain forms could not be
properly classifi ed . Word-formation of adverbs and various particles
has not been investigated for lack of sufficient evidence. Also, I found it
in evitable to resort to a normalization of certain endings, whenever the
ambiguity of the writing system did not allow to conclude to the presence
or abse nce of a final vowel. I consider this gra mmar only as a first step
t owards a structural presentation of the Elamite language whi ch will
have to be completed and corrected as new tex ts come to light and as
Ollr understanding of the old texts grows.

WRITING SYSTEM AND PHONOLOG Y

Chapter Two
SYSTE" OF WRITI NG

\IVhen the cuneiform system of writing was borrowed to write texts in

the Elamite language, originally both the sign-forms ancl the sign-values
were taken over. The sign-forms of the oldest text, the " Treaty of
Nariim-Sin ", arc those of the Old Akkadi an syllabary, used presumably
with the same syllabic values as in contemporary Akkad. The further
development of cuneiform in Elam seems to parallel the development in
Babylonia. In the XllIli. century , from which t he next group of Elamite
inscriptions dates, monumental inscriptions, i.e., inscriptions engraved
in stone or bronze, are written in the monulll ental script in lise in contem-
porary Babylon ia which continues in the t radition of t he Old Babylonian
sign forms. Inscriptions on bricks partly use the just mentioned monu-
mental scri pt, but partly also a more cursive script which follows its own
line of development, parallel to. but different from, the cursive type of
cuneiform script used in Babylonia itself for pri vate documents written
on clay tablets. This local evolution of t he cuneiform syllabary led to
more and more si mplifi ed and standardized sign forms as well as to
changes in syllabic values , which makes it im possible for an Assyriologist
untrai ned in t he Elamite syllabary to read Elamite texts with ease I).
Just as the forms of the signs evolved in a lVay specific to E lam. so
the system of writing itself underwent a change- in the direction of

I ) For a discuss ion o f the orig in of the Elallli lc !'igll-(orm s, !iCC CAl>!I~ no:-; , I'"I"T 7 1 Ii.
 TI-IE ELAilllTE L\NGUAGE 69

simplification-affecting both the syllabic values, and the use of signs

[or purposes other than phonetic notation, Such signs are clcterminatives,
that is, markers that indicate that the word belongs to a certain class,
and logograms, that is word-signs, standing [or SUillerian worcIs but used
as word-signs in Akkadian, Among the determinat ives bOlTO\yec1 [rom

1 Akkadian are: DINGIR (symbolized as <I), that precedes names of divi-

nities, GIS, that precedes names of trees and wooden objects, and, the
vertical wedge (symbolised as In) that precedes personalnarnes. The latter
is used in ElamHe also b e[are personal pronouns and words denoting
certain classes of humans (see below S 6.1), and in Achaemenid texts is
sometimes written in the form of a double horizontal wedge,
:Moreover, two new cIetcrminatives came into use: a horizontal wedge
before place-names, and the sign MES, which is used as a plural marker
in Akkadian, served to indicate that the preceding sign or sign-group
\Vas a logogram, thus becoming a marker for logograms,
Of the Akkadian logograms, only very few remain in nse in Elamite
texts, such as the signs for the word for "god", "temple", "woman";
moreover, in the economic texts, words for commodities, snch as
"Hour", "bar Icy", "silver", etc. The Elamite eq uivalences of these words
are not always known. Apart from the~e, and apart from the use of
signs peculiar to Elam to write "king" and "man", a small number of
Elamite logograms and pseudo-logograms came into use, which can be
identified as such because they are followed by the Elamite marker for
logograms, ;VIES. Some of these logograms may be only an abbreviated
writing of an Elamite word, such as MU.MES probably stands [or 1IVltl'lfn
"earth". The pseudo-logograms, such as lia-al MES, 'II/-Iii iVIES, are just
Elamite words to he read phonetically, as the occnrence of simple l/a-a/
and '1f/-11ll in older texts shows; for reasons unknown they were provided
with the marker for logograms,
An10ng the syllabic signs, a select ion was made that achieved a sim-
plification in both function and form. The lendency that can be observed
is that of elimination of polyphony and homophony. Polyphony was
retained only in a few cases, sllch as the sign TUM having, as in Babylon-
ian, the readings both tum and ip; other signs acquired a specifically
Elamite value, e.g., the sign LAI-[ came to be used with the value 'lin"
in writing the name of the god Nahunte, and the sign EL with a value
that cannot be read with certainty yet, but which is most probably
ram or lam, or both; present evidence bears out only the value J'a.1J1. 1) ,

I) Latest discussion with bibliograplr... by J. I-L\lnl ATTA, .-1c/(I LillJ;lIistica J-llll!garica V fI955) :::!81 fT .

•
 ALTKLEINA SIATI SC I-IE S PRACHE N

The homophony of the Babylonian syllabary was considerably reduced.

Of the signs that represent phonemicaUy distinct syllables in Babylonian,
but due to the different phonemic system were homophonous in E lamite,
only some were retained, usuaUy the sign which was simplest to write.
For instance, of the signs ga, lilt, and qa which arc stiU used side by side
in Middle Elamite, qa, which requires only three strokes with the stylus,
is by far the most common , and is the only one that remains in use in
the Aehaemenid period. In spite of these simplifications, the Elamite
syUabary never reached the stage where it completely gave up either
homophony or polyphony 1).
Another simplification of the writing system in mam has led scholars
to draw certain conclusions o{ a phonetic nature. This feature, known
from the Achaemenid period, is the so-called "broken writing" , which
consist of writing CVeV,C, instead of CV,-V,C ') , e.g., -1<1I-;S, -gi-Ifl -,
-pa-ip-, etc. for -""HIS-, -g;-it-, (or -gll-ut-) -pa-np-. This way of writing
has been alternatively considered as an attempt to indicate the quality
of the vowel or as a step towards alphabetization.
To my mind, the first explanation has to be rej ected, since a compa-
rison between the syllabary in use in the early ME period and the I~AE
syUabary shows that the stock of signs represen ting syllables for every
vowel plus every consonant was reduced towards the end of ME . A
comparative chart of the VC signs will illustrate tllis:
ME lexts RAE lexts Loss
V -I- k all ik '/tl~ a.h ik 11k 0
V -I- n (l -n 1-11, un. Ci! all Hl, '(f,Jl ell 0
V -I- r al' -n' Ul' 11' Ifr a -I- C
V -I- t al it lit at Ifl , C ")
-,-
V -I- m am, un lim am
, C
"m T
V -I- s as £§ us as £§ u _L, C
V -I- s as LS 1/S as is u -I- C
V -I- p ap ip "p ap ip u -I- c
V-I- I al il 1/1 cl 'III el a -I- C, i -\- C
Wherever a sign became obsolete-for which the RAE column shows
a blank slot-another VC sign replaced it for writing the syUable. Thus

1) For a disClIssioIl of this pruIJlc lIl, sec la stly CnIElloN , PTT 7of., also HAlI.O CI', jNES
XVII ~57fi.
~) C = consonant ; V = vowe l.
lJ For a reintroduction of the sig n it in the Treasury <lIllI Fo rtificalioll tahlc ts, Sec j·],\I.J.OC I"
JiVES XVII ';!uo n. 8,
 THE EL\i\IITE LANGUAGE 7I

£.' took over the function of liS, lit that of it, etc. Tlus feature is purely
grapluc and to my mind does not indicate a phonetic clifference '). As
to those instances when the "broken writing" is used in spite of the
availability of a ve sign beginning with the same vowel as that of the
preceding CV sign, (such as -pa-ip- when -pa-ap- would be equally
possible), I am inclined to consider them analogicaL

Chaptcr Three
PHONOLOGY

3.0. Gellcral
Phonological analysis 01 Elamite is greatly hampered by the fact that
the language is written by means of a syllabary that was not devised
ior it. Since Sumero-Akkadian cuneiform, wluch was borrowed by the
Elamites, is inadequate even for expressing all phoneme distinctions of
Akkadian, it is not astonislung that it should be inadequate to provide
reliable information concerning a language for the writing of which it
W(lS subsequently borrowed. In the case of analysis of other languages
written with tlus syllabary, comparative linguistics provided an impor-
tant tool: for Akkadian, comparison with other Semitic languages, for
Hittite, comparison with Indo-European. In fact, the analysis of Hittite
could advancc only from the moment its relation to the Indo-European
linguistic family was established; this helped to differentiate between
phonologically relevant and merely graphic features. Lack of such
comparative basis still hampers the interpretation of Hurrian and
Urartian.
For Elamite, we do not have the auxiliary means of comparative
linguistics to establish the phonemes of the language. Therefore, the
analysis must be based on comparisons of graphic habits alone. While
it is easy to determine the meaning of larger units of speech, mainly on
the basis of the translations, and even relatively easy to break these
clown into morphemes, phonological analysis must remain uncertain.
A rigorous analysis based on the assumption that distinctions that are
not consistently carried Ollt in writing are phonemically irrelevant will
isolate a minimal number of phonemes, but in all likelihood not all the
phonemes ').

Il::J VII (H)57) 13:!f.

1) For an interes tin g s uggestion scc' RosJtr;;,
~) foor the writing system, see th e excellent presentation oi PAPER, Cbapter:!, pp ..}fi.; sec
also aUm'l'.
72 :\LTKLEINASIATlSCHE SPRACilEK

3. I List oj piIol/eliles
On the basis of the above assumption, PAPER, p. 36, ~ 3.I6 , extracted
the following chart of phonemes for II:l E:
p t k
s s i' If

II! 1/ r
a
y
3·1.1 /iI
E. HA"P, Word, XIII (I957) 502, proposed to consider ".1''' in the
above chart as a non-syllabic allophone of Ii;' See also below § 4.6.2.

3.1.2 Iill
Analysis of ME requires the addition of another consonant, liIl, which
can be isolated from such pairs as //'illtnII/lll llaiI5, Il/fUlfll/lllt/al!!, and
others (see § 3.5). This consonant is written by means of the syllabic
signs representing the Akkadian laryngeal fricative x (written II), but the
phonetic character of the Elamite liIl was no doubt different. Towards
the end of the ME period this llil had a tendency to be lost, in absolute
final, initial, and often also in intervocalic position as is shown by lexical
comparisons between ME and RAE : e.g., for initial liIl, /IIISS; > uss;,
hiyan > iyan, /iUI/S{f > 'lfns{f. . In ](AE the syllabic signs Vh and hV
are sti ll used, but they alternate with the corresponding vowel signs 1),
a fact which indicates that by RAE llil had lost its phonemic character.

3.2 ill{ any-la-aile corrcsjJondcJlcc of siglls 10 7JaIlfcs

The Elamitc writing system uses far more signs than there are different
sequences of phon emes (conventiunallytermed "values") to be established
for the Elamite language, due to the fact thaI this system was bccsed on
and borrowed from the Sumero-Akkadian syllabary. I n this syllabary, a
sct of three signs exists for nearly every stop plus vowel (namely, one
each for the voiced, the voiceless, and the emphatic stop); a set o'f four
for sibilant pILl:; vowel (nam ely, one each for the voiced, the vokcless,
the emphatic, and the palatal sibilant). In the Elamite system, the signs
belonging to the same set are Llsed indiscriminately; and thus three,
respectively [01lr, signs correspond to one Elamite value. It can be
established 011 this basis that Elamite has on ly one set of stops (here
symbolized as I). t , Ii). The distribution of sibilants represented by the
I) An exception is the consistent writing dll·(/II and never da alone ill the FortificnlioH Texts,
see HALLOCK, ]NES XVII I 8.
 TilE ELA 1\ lI TE LANGUAGE 73

set of four signs cannot be deduced with such certa inty. Paper's analysis,
mainly based on ,transcriptions of Old P ersian sibi la nts. isolates fl·om' the
set of four on ly t hree sibilants, symbolized as ii, S, C.
3.3 Oli e-ln-lII any corresjJollr7cll ce oj siglls 10 vailles
It is less easy to find out whether the same sig n represents more than
one value, that is, w heth er more pho nemes than those expressed in the
Sumero-Akkadian syUa bary existed in E lamite. Such might be the case
for vowels other th an i, 1/., n., and c, and consonants other than P, tt k,
b, d, g, (" emphatic") t and 'I, S, .I, 0, ("emphatic") .', /I/o, '1/., r, l, y, a nd .~.
If it had b een the case that one sign was used for two syllables which
cJjflered in one of their phonemes, th is lost in formation could not b e
recaptured un less the differentiation was ex pressed either in E l"mite
loanwords in to other languages and writing sys tems, or in survi ving
cJjalecls. In the absence of slIch additional informati on , we cannot establish
whether E lamite had labial fricatives, or latera ls, or rou nded front vowels,
or the like.
3-+ OJ/e-ta-oJ/e corrcspom/ellcc
Sin ce in an ideal writing system there is a one-to-one correspondence
between elements of the writing system (graphemes) and thosc of the
language (phonemes . strings o f phonemes, morphemes) , scholars h ave
been inclined to interpret man y-to-one correspondences as 'one-to-one
corrcspoIlllences, ClOd ha ve "ssumed for E lamite, e.g., the "sounds" i.oJ,
[iJ, and othcrs. Th e exist ence of th ese " sounels" was deduced from the
over-differentiation o f the syll"ba ry, to account for the usc of signs
homophonous in Akkadian ("II a nd Ii, etc. ) or homophonous in Ela mite,
such as ballla-, dill/II." etc.

H I [lJ
As to the controversia l problem of the exislence of a Iater"l a ffricat e
phoneme Iii, j>,I I' EIl, p. 33 § 3. LI.1, den ies the existence of such a phoneme,
which wou ld be based onl y on the alternation of sp ellings in the single
1V0rel H alalllliIHnl/a.lII li "EI"m" in l~A E. The Akkadian transcription of
the nam e of th e Elami te kin g HII/cl-lIll1s("III 5-lI siun/i) as H u l/cludi .' cannot
be cited as evidence for the existence of such an aHricate, since [i] would
not be represented in Akkadian by the sequence -11- but rather by its
inverse -tl-. The two spellings linl- /a./I/o-li and linl-Ia.-/a./II -li beside lin-/n",· /i
in RAE co uld also only indicate th e exist ence of a cluster -U-. F or the
variant spellings, especially for //(/I -la.-/n'll/-Ii represen ting older li nl-lin-
ta'lII-li, see now Ko nig , Die elamischen honigsinschriften , p. 37 n . 3·

•
7--1- :\LTKLE INA SUTI SCHE SP lL\CHEN

3-4- ~ HOl/l ophony in Ihe syllabary

However, it is more probable t hat the alternation of spellings with
variolls homophonous signs is a survival of the syllabary borrowed from
Babylonia. The homophonous signs used in ME are far greater in number
t han those of t he I<AE syll abary, but in spite of the later simplificat ion
(see p. 70) the system of writ ing did not reach the stage where it com-
pletely dispensed with syllabic signs carrying distinctions that were not
phonemic in the language.

3.5 COllsunnll! Ct'lts!el's

The cuneiform syllabary is inadequate for writing consonant clusters
in init ial or final position. As in Hittite, such clust ers are dissolved by
an "penthetic vowel which is purely graphic. A list of examples of writing
initial and medial clusters is given by PAPER , p. 10 fL, § ~ . IO, where the
purely graphic character of the epenthetic vowel is demonstrated on
the basis of transcrip tions of Old Persian words on the one hand, and
on vari a tions in spelling of RAE words on the other hand. Actually, the
cuneiform sylJabary docs provide means for writing medial clusters of
two consonants, and. only for clusters of three consonants is the mentioned
graphic device necessary ; the use of the cpcnthetic vowel, even when the
cluster could be written without resorting to it , may stem from the
frequ ency of the instances in which this devi ce was required.
Since nothing indicates that E[amite clid not have any final clusters,
we may assume that the same device applies in this case too, and that
the final vowel of a syllable combination VC,-C, V is also purely graphic,
and that the end of the word thus written has to be ph onemici zed
JVC ,C,j. Evidence for this are the differe nt ways of writing the second
person suffix. of verbs, depending on whether the stem ends in a vowel
or a consonant , such as jlll/lIa! j written hu-u!-/a-at, but j haplj and jtculj
written ha-a.p-!i and Ie-elL-Ii .
Another example of final clusters is at the same time a proof for t he
consonantal character of ME j hj. The personal suffix of the third person
plural jMj is written, when this morpheme is follow ed by jlal , both
klf-S£-ih -si-ln and Iw.-si-ilt -is-tn with which can be compared the writing
ta-al-ln-IIh-si-ta-ma, also ku-l'll -lIh-slt a/~ Iw-si-ih-si , wh ich indicates that
the endings have to be phonemicized j-M j and I-Mia/.
There is of course no way of provi ng in any particu lar case whether
the final vowel was phon em ic or ,,'raphic only. And even if we assume that
after a consonant cluster the vowel was graphic, we have no right to
disregard in the phonology the final vowel when it follows one consonant
 THE ELA~llTE LANGU:\GE 75

only. However, alternations between the signs "':/ra, "IIillla, tillelta, kilka,
PJlpilPa, after consonant clusters and single consonants make it seem
likely that the morpheme is represented by the consonant only, and the
last vowel is a graphic device to write the consonant cluster or a writing
habit resulting from [arms where this writing is necessary.
I have taken the short cut of setting up such morphemes in their
consonantal form only, provisionally considering the vocalic ending as
purely graphic I). It is, however, not excluded that the difference between
a vowel la! and /1:; in many cases is a morphemic difference. Since this
difference cannot be discerned in the present state of our studies 'I, r
have neglected it, except in cases where a consistent wrlting with the
same syllab.le~as in the case of the endings --ni and -ta~indicates that
the vowel was pronounced.
3.6 CeJl(,l:'Ilatcd COIIS01WlltS

Although many intervocalic consonants are written clouble (type

VC-CV), aHernance of such writings with simple consonants (V-CV)
indicates that consonant gemination has no phoncllllc significance in
Elamite (sec PAPER, § 2.7), i.e., there is no contrast in the lc,nguage
between double, or long, and simple, or" short, consonants. Certain words
are, however, consistently written with geminated consonants, e.g., the
verb most frequent in Elamite, I/.1IUa "to do" is written 1/1/.-1It-/a- and
never III1-ta- "). This, and other similar cases, may be orthographic
conventions, but it is not excluded that such consistent spellings are an
attempt to indicate a phonetic feature or phonemic distinction, just as
Hittite and Hurrian use double writing to clistinguish between voiced
ancl voiceless stops (STURTEVANT, A Comparative Grammar oj tile H'iltite
La1lgllage, 1951', New I-hven, Yale University Press, p. 26) .

MORPHOLOGY
CIIapter F onr
FORi\! CLASSES; INFLECTION FOR PERSON AND GENDER
-1-0 Ge1leral
There are three morphological classes in Elamite: verbs, nominals '1),
ancl indeclinables. This division is based on the class morphemes that
1) A notation that would ta].c into account "ntllbiguous grnphs that have been ph o!l c nlicizcd
as far as po~sib]c" was propo.:.ed by E. HAMJ', Word XIII (I9S7) 506.
3) For all interpretatio n oi finn] Inl and Ii! as carrying aspcct dis t!lIctio llS, ;iCC Hn:z , .-IrOr XVI 1II
!-z p. ::8::0., amI t.hc criticism o f LUI,\T, p. 39.
l) In the paradigms belo w, tid;; Yf'rb will be transcribed as (fI )l/fllI, with doublc t, ill order to
respec t the Elamitc orthography.
~) For the di,tinction in onr terllliuology between noull s alld nmninals, sec 5.U.::.
 ..\LTKLEI N ASIATl SC I-IE S PI\:\CHE N

occur or not with each of these three classes; moreover, this classification
based on strictly morphological criteria coincides with a semantic and
fun ctional classification as well.
4-1 Persoll al sII/Ji"cs
Two sets of suffixes occur in the lang uage. One set is customarily
called personal suffixes. There are six personal su ffix es, for each of the
three persons (first, second and third) singular and plural respectively.
They are:
I sg. /11./ I 1'1. 11'"1
2 sg. It/ 2 1'1. 1"'1
3 sg. /II 3 1'1. / ItS/
The last three may be murphophonemicall y analyzed as:
II. -I- "
h-l-t
II + .~
These personal suffi xes classify the morphemes with which they occur
as verbs. Morphemes followed by a personal suffix will be called verbally
inflected.
4.1. 1RAE per s onal s uffi xes
Due to the loss of 1"/ in RAE, the RAE personal suffixes take the
following form:
I sg. /0/ I 1'1. /-11/
2 sg. /1/ 2 1'1. /tl
3 sg. m 3 1'1. fSI
Consequently, instead of the six formally differentiated suffixes of ME,
there remain on ly four 10, I, -'. '11/, and the second and third persons
coincide in the singular and the plural. I t so h a ppens that no second
person form of the verbal inflection is attested in RAE ; our paradigm
assumes a /t/ morpheme for the second person by analogy with the third
person, thus, if ME iii! and /M/ both are represented by /sl in RAE , ME
/t/ and 1"'/ both are expected to be represented by /t/ in RAE.
4.1.2 Verbal inflection
The followin g comparative blblc will illustrate the verbal inflecti on:
ME RAE ME RAE
I sg . huttah 'IIltn I 1'1. ""ltalm 1fttau
2 sg. IIIIIlat "lIitat 2 pi. ""l1a"t *1IlIat
3 sg. kilt/as '1Iltas 3 1'1. III/UnItS 'u/tas
 THE ELA1\llTE LANGUAGE 77

4.2 Gender sutJ-ixes

Tile second set of suffixes identifies the word which it accompanies
as the speaker, or the person addressed, or the person or thing about
whom or whlch something is said. The last mentioned, the so-calleel
"third person", is differentiated according to whether it is animate
singular, animate plural, or non-animate. This form-class is difficult to
label, since it comprises the category of gender (animate versus non-
animate), number (animate singular versus animate plural), and person
(speaker versus person addressed versus "third person"), where the two
first mentioned categories are in binary opposition, but the last .in the
relation of a triangle. Mainly to avoid confusion with the category of
person that belongs to the class of verbs. this second form -class will here be
called gender; this name can also be justified by reference to the langua-
ges which have several genders that control concord, sllch as many Afdcan
languages. Elamite genders also control concord, see below § 8.2.2.
The following gender suffixes occur:
locutive ') (speaker or "first person") //'/
aUocutive (person addressed or "second person") /t/
\ animate sg. /f/
delocutive (person or thing spoken about) /. animate 1'1. /p/
nOll-anilnate /@: mel
The two allomorphs of the non-animate gender suffix, /0/ and /'Ille/, occur
in the following distribution: /IllC/ occurs (I) in possessive construcl'ions
(see below § 8.3) and (2) if the lexical meaning of the word refers to
an animate being; e.g., s'ltnl\~i- "king", but sn/lki-Jlw "kingship"; for
further references see below § j.2.6.2. In other positions the allomorph
/0/ occurs.
The gender suffixes classify the morphemes with which they occur as
nominals. Nominals followed by a gender suffix will be called nominally
inflected.
4.2.I Example of nominal inflection
locutive su'nki-/~ "I (the )king"
allocutive (not attested)
\ animate sg. sunk/-r "he (the) king"
delocl! ti ve animate pl. s'/( nki-p "they (the) kings"
( non-animate S 1f'll/d-1Jl,c "kingship, kingdom"

(suffix /lIIef)
1) The tcrmino\og"Y is that of J),UIOVRETTE and PICHO!' (D.:£ Mots Ii la Pcns,!c, esp. \'01. III
§~ 8r3!T.J. cited J. FOUl/QUET, L :s I~·flld,·s Philo.wJ!lhiqllr:" No. ·1 (1f)58) p. ·131.

L
 ALTKLEINASIATlSCHE SPRACHEN

JJl1(}'UIl "earth"
slJa" "temple"
Iwk "protection"
etc. (suffix fO/)

4.3 Indeclinables
A morpheme which occurs wi th neither set of suffix es will be caUed
uninflected , and classed as indeclinable.

4.4 Bases
A morpheme which occurs with eith er th e sct of personal suffixes or
the set of gender suffixes is called a base. Two t ypes of bases can be
distinguish ed : bases which do not occur with personal suffixes, und bases
which do occur with t hem. The first type may be called nominal base ;
the second may be call ed verb-base, since this class will exclude all
morphemes which occur with the set of gender suffixes 0111y.

4.-P Nom inal derivation

The addition of the suffix Jill or /kl to a verb-base changes it into a
nominal base, since personal suffixes do not occur aIter the suffixes
Inl or 1"1. These suffixes may thus be called nominal derivation morphe-
mes. For details and examples see below §§ 5.1.1 and 5.I.2.

4.5 II erb-base
The verb-base may be simple, reduplicated, or compound. All these
types may be enlarged, see below § 4-5.2.

4-5.1 Simp le v e rb-b ase

The most frequent form s of the simple verb-base are evev (e.g.,
ialt"- ) , eveev (e.g., IIIclka-) , also, though more rarely, ev (li-, ta-) or
vev (111"£-), thus, in the most frequ ent forms the verb-base always ends
in a vowel. A phonetic explanation for RAE exceptions to this feature has
b een advanced by HALLOCK, .TAOS LXXVI (1956) 44f. In ME, verb-bases
that end in a consonant are tw - and hap-, both attested only in the second
person (iteHtl and Ihaptl). An alternate analysis is given by PAPER, p. 38,
§ 5.1 ; the form s with vocalic endings are treatecl as verb-base a nd stem-
vowel; snch an analysis creates, however, a separate morpheme, the
so-caUecl "stem-vowel" , to which no specific function or meaning can be
assigneel (sec E. l-IA'IP , WOl"d XIII [I957J 502ff.).
 THE ELAl\IITE LANGUAGE 79

-I.5.I.1 Reduplicated verb-base

The verb-base may be modified by reduplication, through which a
base C, VC, V becomes C, VC,C, V, e.g., pcli- > pcpli-, hapll- > hall1)1(-, etc.
These bases do not differ structurally from bases of the form CVCCV,
e.g., hatpi-, Icnkc-, or titki- and others; the last cited, however, may be
a redupli cated base, although no base *Iilli- is attested. Simple and
reduplicated bases occur side by side; there is no sufiicicnt evidence
to state their contrast, if any.
+5.1.2 Compound verb-base
The base may aJsa be compound, e.g., Hut}' + ta-, sal + /iupa-, which
seem to be composed of a nominal and a verbal base, and others, like
slIklm + la-/sllsIUt + la- which arc composed of two verb-bases.

+5.2 Enlarged verb-base

Any base , whether simple, reduplicated, or compound, may be en larged.
Enlarged bases are of the following forms:
verb-base + '/IIa
verb-base + ,. + ilia
verb-base + "'"
The name "enlarged base" is used in order to avoid labeling the
elements / lIIa/, /l'Il1a/ , and /1111/ "aspect" or with some other semantic
term, since the available evidence does not allow us to assign a mcaning-
class or function to these elements. l'or a discussion of the proposed
meaning of the element /lIIa/ see H ALL OC K, .lNES XVIII (I959) 18.
4.S.2.1 Base enlarged with -lila and -I' + 1IIa
Not all enlarged bases are attested with all personal suffixes. Of the
three types of enlarged bases, only verb-base +- ilia· is attested in all or
most verbally inflected form s ; verb-base +- I' + IIIn is attested only in

the verbally inflected form s pepsi -I- I' -I- lIIa-h, sallti + r + lIIa-h
(beside sallti + ilia-h), andl,iti + r -1- IILa-h, all from ME; in addition,
from the inflected nominal derivatives (see below 5.0) oll"',i + l' + 'ilia
-n(i) and 'IIIisi -I- ,. -I- III a-", (a) (also m;Si -I- T -I- 'IIIn-II), the existence
of two more such enlarged bases can be deduced.
4.5.2.2 Base enlarged with -'/l1(
A base enlarged with /'1111/ is attested in on ly one inflected form:
hili + 'II'11.-h ; however, this morpheme can be extracted from the
nominal clerivati,'es till'll -I- 111t +
'II-(ME tilT'll -I- '1/.1/.-11-11) ancl '111/£ -I-
'I/.'II-'II-(RAE '11l/i -I- uu-U-P).
So ALTKLE INAS IATlSC HE SPRAC HE N

From the verb-base fir i· "speak", there is au R:\E ior m /lirimallfllll. alles ted in two inscrip tioll;;
ill the sa me context, and corresponding to il li Old Pers ian firs t persOIl plural. This was interpre ted
by 1-1,\1.I.0CK, .l NES XV I II IS, as I. pI. oi "Couj ug:atio n H Im" , i.e., '-crb -basc liri· -I- 1IU1 -I-
I. pI. sllITix -111111. The o il ly o ther aLtcs la liom; o i a suffix -111111 ~rc the 1. pI. forms writtell 'lII 'lf /-li-
lill-Ifll ' /III-iw and IIII - ll /-ti-illt-IIIJ-I; - {Ja. T he forlll. phollcmidr.ed as ' lifti/lllllllp" I . was te rmed " pur-
pos ivc" by p,\ r!':u, p. 57. § 5.8 , but ;malyscd as a I. pI. wit h the personal c ndi ll g - 111111 by HA I-I.OC I~ ,
I. C, p. Ir.. III Ill y analysis, the [Ort ll is I lItliIl/IIlP/. i.c., II tii -I- 1111'''''' (sec bdow § 5. 1.3), and so there
is 11 0 need ItJ po:;il a I. pl. suffix ,111111. The form ti,ill/llIHlII \Vo uld rat her be a base c lil arged wit h
bo th the clemcllts !/III and /III, w it h tlte d~ri va t io u a t s ulTi x -II, aud would be rccollstruc tcd as
·tirimallllll/J, a plural belollging to lh e lIumillai cla!!s . por the omi5sioll o f the g..:ude r ,; uffix in
cer lain RAE form"" sec betow § 8.5. If thi ,; analysis is currect, we would have to add to the typL'S
of e nlarged oasc,; t hc type ti,i -1- ili a + IlU - , i.e. , the bases of the furm verb-base -I- /JUI -1- nil -.

+6 Clities
F our endings occur after either a personal suffix or a nominal deri ~
vution su flix; these may be subsumed under the general term "clitics".
The following clitics may occur in this position:
{ti : IIi : 110./
JaI
/Ia/
{1I1/
The name "modal suffi xes" sometimes given to this class is only
justifiable for t he morpheme {Ii : lIi : /la/ which can be identified in ME
(through parallels from Akkadian) with certainty as the precative
morpheme.

4.6.I !-ni{
The precutive suffix has the forms ni, ua., and h, tha t occur in free
variation. In OE, the only occurring form is {II:{, in ME {nil, {nn{ and {Ii{
are attested as precat ive endings, occurring wit h the same stem and
inflected forms, and in RAE only {lIi{ occ urs, e. g., OE IIlIm-le-ti, Imru-k-li ,
IIa..',,-I,,-1i (all uncertain). ME IIi-II-ii and IIi-il-lIa beside more freq uent
IIi-II-lIi, RAE IIalp i-s-ni, etc.
Not to be confused wit h the precative suffix {lla/ is the ending {na/
attested in ME, e.g. in the form l/I.i.'il'llI!LIUI, wh.ich has to be analysed
as 'misl:-l'-ma-J1-a. i.e., nominal derivati ve / 11/ +- "connective" lal. ror
which sec below.

_1.6.2 {(//
The ending {a-/ was convincingly analyzed [or RAE by HAL LOCK,
.JNES I8 Sf., as a " connective" which occ urs when the verb is not in
absolute final, but another verb or ano ther clause [011011'5. TillS analysis
and interpretation is equally vatid for ME. In this connection the ending
/ya{, previously considered a variant o[ the first person suffix, may be
 THE ELAl\UTE LANGUAGE 81

reanalyzed. Tltis ending occurs in RAE after a base ending in -i; it is

also sporadicaUy attested in ME in the same position, but there Iyal
alternates with Ihal, as in, e.g., pepsiy" beside pepsi"n. This " first person
suffix" can be analyzed as the first person singular suffix 111.1 + con-
nective la/. When towards t he end of the ME period final a nd intervocalic
Ihl was lost (see above § 3.1.2), the first person singular of a verb-base
ending in -i with the connective lal became -ia, thus pepsi"a > pepSin.
This ending li"l was written i-ya, possibly to reflect a pronunciation
with a glide 1). The few exceptions in RAE when - )la occurs at the end
of a paragraph-thus when no connective is expected-may be considered
analogical forms based on the much more frequent occurrence of the
ending -yn. a ft er bases ending in -i. If the explanation of an analogical
transfer is rejected, this may affect the interpretation of the suffix lal
as connective, but not the interpretation of /)'al as an aUomorph of
lal after N·
+6.3 Ital
The ending Itaj has variously been interpreted as a pluperfect
(HlNz, A,.OI' XVIII/1-2, 284), as a nominal suffix -t followed by the
enclitic determinative -a (Labat p. 38, § 31), as a relative (PAPER, p. 49,
§ 5+2), and as final, i.e., occurring when the verb "expresses a complete
and final action " (HALLOCK, J NES XVIII 61.). Whether any of these
in terpretations is adequate cannot be said as yet . Against the interpre-
tation as a relative see HlNz, lac . cit., HALLOCK, lac . cit., and below § 7.2.

+6-4 ll/tl
The assignment of the RAE ' ending lutl to the clitics is uncertain.
It has been isolated from its occurrences (a) after the first plural personal
suffix Ilml > RAE luj, i.e., from the ending -hut; (b) after the "locutive"
gender suffi x Ik/, i.e., -Iwt, and (c) after the animate plural gender snffix
IPI, i.e., -put. As will be noted, only in the occurrence sub (a) does it
occur in the same position as the other clitics. However, unless we regard
I"tl as a separate morpheme, the forms put and I",t cited sub (b) and (c)
must be interpreted as another set of persona l suffixes, namely another
first plural Ihutl - so HALLOCK; in our phonemicization 11Itl from It +
'l(t
-as was done by HALLOCK, JNES XVIII 2f. He assigned Ilmtl as
"1. 1'1." ending to his "Conjugation I" and Ikitl and IP'utl as respectively
"I. sg." and "1. 1'1." endings to ltis "Conjugation II". Note, however,
the ending 'ut aft er nominal first persons and plurals in hI/Uu-/Hlt, mitu-
I) Thus also HAI.I.OCI'::, JAOS LXXV I H II. 6, alld JiVES XVIII Sf.

Handb\Lch de r Oric Lltalis til;:, Abt. I, Bd. II, Abscllll, I/z, Lfg, ::

L
 ALTKLEINASIATISCHE SPRACHEN

k-"t, /mpn-/I-'I't, hl-n-k-ut and in sal1,.-p-ut, snnki-p-1tI, and after phrases,

in sm,ki + nppini-k-ut (all RAE). The meaning of this ending is difficult
to see; possibly it has an emphatic [unction.

4.7 "Moods"
Among the above ditics, only i"i/. as mentioned above, can be called
modaL Of the two categories usually called " moods" which are not
covered by the morpheme analysis discussed above, the prohibitive will
be discussed under § 7.1.1 since it is formed with the prohibitive particle
m,i foUowed by a nominally inflected form; only the imperative mood
need be taken up here.

4.7.1 ME Imperativ e
There has to be made a differenti a ti on between ME and RAE. As
already intimated by LABAT, p. 36, § 26, the category of t he imperative
does not obtain in ME. Fornls functioning as imperatives are morpholo-
gically not different from the 2. sg. and pL respectively. They also may,
but need not, be preceded by the personal pronoun, as any other verbaUy
inflected form . There is, so to speak, no difference in ME between "you
do" and "(you) do!" Moreover, in similar contexts, the precative form
(i.e., 2nd person + "i) alternates with the simpl e 2nd person form.

4.7.2. RAE Imperative

The situation is different in RAE. Old Persian imperatives, and in
one case a Babylonian imperative, are translated by 'mile (var. mita) for
the singular, and ""ite-s, hulln-s, halpi-ii, /wPi-s, -nusi<i-s and t"rn-s, the
latter group coinciding with 3rd person forms, for both singular and plural.
For a discussion, see PAPER, p. 55f., § 5.7. Beyond this simple statement
of fact, no interpretation can be advanced. If one may be allowed to
speculate, it could be alleged that in the attempt to render the Old
Persian forms, the missing category of the imperative was approximated
by either the verb-base itself (formally also the 1. sg.), or by the 3rd
person foml, in this period identical for both singular and plural.

Chapter hve
NOMlNALS
5.0 General
Morphem es which do not occur with the set of p ersonal suffixes,
but with the set of gender su ffixes only, constitute the ciass of nominals.
They may be divided into two sub-classes.
 THE ELAMITE LANGUAGE

Due to the nature of the corpus, it happens that second person forllls, bot.h in the verbal and
in the Ilominai iuflection, itrc very SCillltily attesteu. In the verbal inflection, second person fOfms
occur Dilly in COil texts wh ere th ey call be interpreted iudificnmtly as imperatives or secoud persoll
fiuite fOrulS, see above § .1.7.1. III the nominal illilcctioll , the gender suffix -f of the seco nd person,
Le., the al1oculivc, is attested Qllly with participles, sec below § 5.L3.! and § S,I. 3.:.!, The forms
oi address to deities that occur, itl r-.IE texts, after the interjection.: are the oil ly nominals that
might be expected to tal.e the allocutivc elldilL g -t, if this interjection lH! iuterpre ted, as has been
done, as a voca tive exclama tion, and translated "oh". Thc cfl{liug of these won)s is, however,
.r, i.e. , tha t oi the dclocu li vc uuilllatc s iugular. This fact has led J. FR IE DRIC II, Or. NS XII p. 30,
to assume that -r is the suffix o f bOlh the second and third person. While it is possible to s lale, with
1'1II1WrtiC II , that nominals, with the exception of participles, have the same gender suffix, Ilaillely
", ill both the allocutivc alld the delocutivc anilllale s ingula.r, I prefer to account for this use of
., by assuming thc syntaclica l rule that after th e int erj ection conly deloculivc forllls are uscd;
in doiug so, we leave -*t corresponding' to the participial inflectional endings -II-t· and ·k-t ill the
allocutive, just as -, corresponds to -u-y and -kAY ill the dclocutivc, and preserve a lIen t parallelism
thro ughout the nomilwi inflec tion.

5.0.! Derived nominals

The first sub-class comprises the nominals that are derived with the
morphemes /"/ or Ikl from verb-bases (see above § 4+1); they may be
given the name active participles (form: ' verb-base n), and passive +
participles (form: verb-base + k).

5,0.2 Other nominals

To enumerate the morphemes of the second subclass would amount
to listing the greater part of the lexicon . The following subdivision
attempts to group them by a labeling according to meaning only in order
to facilitate a description. A further differentiation in this subclass may
also be made on the basis of whether they are free forms or bound forms;
however, this distinction will not be the primary one in the following
because our evidence, owing to accidents of attestation, may not be
conclusive on this point. The following groups can be identified:
1. The indefinite morpheme nkkn;
2. The negative morpheme ;"//.- (bound form) ;
3. the numeral k£ "one";
4- The quotation morpheme mn-: IIlnn- (bound form);
5. In RAE only, the demonstrative I",pi/;
6. All other words that are neither verb-bases, nor indeclinables, nor
included in the above enumeration, and which, for convenience sake,
will be called nouns. Note that in morphology no distinction can be
drawn between nouns and adjectives.

5,1.1 Active Participles

Active participles are formed by the addition of the morpheme In/
to any verb-base. Example: Inlu-n- "writing", hali-n- "toiling", tUI'1HI'I I-Jl. ,

L
 ALTKLEINASIATISCHE SPRAC HE N

5.1.2 Passive Participles

Passive participles are formed by the addition of the morpheme /1,/
to any verb-base. Example: hlllta-I,- "done", /'/1./"11-1,- "said", hllila-I,-
"messenger" (lit. "sent"), miiii-l'-lIIa-I< "ruined( ?) " .

5.L3. Inflection of participl es

Since the inflected forms of the active and passive participles have
been, in previous studies, incorporated into the verbal paradigm as
inflected verbal forms, I shall anticipate here briefly my treatment of
nominal constructions (§ 7.1 fl.) to single out these inflected forms that
lend themselves to an interpretati on as finite verbs, and to point out the
difference between this form-class and the verb-class.
It is the great merit of R. T. HALLOCK to have extricated the inflected
forms of the participles from the baffling looking paradigms of RAE, by
assigning them to two supplementary "conjugations" (II and III) . It was,
however, LABAT, Pl'. 37ft., §§ 31 and 33, who first recognized the nominal
character of these "conjugations".
Ou a number of points in detail, I take exception to lhe iuflected forms that appear in HALLOCK'S
paradigms of conjugations II and Ill. They arc: Conjuga lio n II I. sg. ending -/iiI (example: ~ iIllJ/l ­
kit.) 1 take as JiJIIlllk + k + III, see above § 'I.U.,I; ibid., fo r 3, pI. and 1. pI. ouly olle iorm is needed,
the form s hould be IwU/lk -p; lhe form fJu oted by H,\I.t.oCn, Jill/IIIP, is a nominal iuflec tcd for the
plural, i.e., Jillllll-P, parallcl to such HAE iomls as sn fu -p , 11I1111-1!, hulfi-P, etc., and to !'lIE kilu-p,
III /Jui-IJ, etc. Thc 3. sg. form III/lin/:: is actually the lloH-:Iuimatc form, although in H,..\E it is tllcreas -
illgl), used in replacement of the animate singular. In Cuujugatio ll III, r. pI. should be dele ted:
the form 'llft/illll/! there quoted is actually IWl/i'II/III), Le., Il1Illi-III1-II-/J, aud !lot different from
the "3. pI." IlfnlllllJpi, i.e., IlIrna-II -/I; the formlirilllllJlII1I I interpret as a mistake for lirimmlllll/J,
i.e., /i,i-III1HIII-II-P, a form corresponding to hlllli-JIIHI-IJ, but frolll the enlarged base with -II/I!-
(sec abovc § .1.5.~.2). The Conjugation II 2nd person fo rm is correctly cited, but incorrectly analyzed
a!:i klllll-,... 1 in stead of /.:11/1111 -1 ; ill the Olle occurrence wh ere the baSe is not a passive participle (XPh
.\0), the parallelism with ll111pi-1I1 ill the sallie !.>('uICHce- as Iw/lI -/.:-r is parallel to hlli/!!'-k-r ill the
nexl se rdence-shows that the correct form sho uld haVe been /.:"llf-lI/.

5.L3.1 Inflection of the active participle

Inflected forms of the active participle are (only attested forms are
cited) :
Base Enlarged Base
locutive kill/an-I< silhn-ma-n-h (Fort. scramanlw)
allocutive kll/tall-/ (not attested)
( animate singular ""/tan-/, hllfta.-ma-n-r
delocutive I) animate plural Il'IIlIan-p tir£-ma.-n-p
non-animate hulla", tani-'IIla-n

5. L3.2 Inflection of the passive participle

Inflected forms of the passive participle are (only attested forms are
cited) :
 THE ELAi\IITE LANGUAGE 85

Base E nlarged Base

locutive s/>wn/:k « :l:s£n.n/:k-h) (not attested)
allocuti ve kata./,-I, (not attested)
\ animate singular kat1t,/;.-·}' (not attested)
delocutive I animate plural kat ak-p (not attest ed)
{ non-amInate hutia.!, siya.-11la-h

5.L3.J Paradigms
Compare the paradigms set up by H allock as "Conjugation II"
(inflected passive participle) and "Conjugation III" (inflected active
participle) . In t he following, HALLOCK'S paradigms from ] NES XVI II I
are given aIter re-ordering the persons to facilita te comparison with the
above two tables of inflected forms, and his "Conjugation I " (for which
compare above § +I.2) adduced to exemplify his system.
Conjugation I Conj ugation II Conjugation III
1. sg. haita T. sg. §i'Jl:J I!f(k it 'Jla:1lJ~i
2. 2 . sg. Iwtlll~ta. halta'lltl:
3· III/ttas 3· sg. hllital, lmttfl.uJ'fl.
L pl. III/Uahat I. pI. huttin'u.n
3· 1'1. sinJl.1rp lUJ'IIfl.1Jlpi

It is easy to see how the inflected forms of the participles, t ake n as a

paradigm, resemble the verbal paracligm. The basic difference lies,
however, in the categories according to which the forms inflect. The
parti ciples inflect for the form-classes here called gender, whereas the
verb inflects for person; there are five genders whereas there are six
persons. The absence of the "second person plural" in the inllection of the
participles ("Conjugation II and III" above) could not provide the clue
to thi s difference, since in RAE this person is missing from the verbal
conjugation, along with the second person si ngular. On the other hand,
the distinction of a " first person plural" and a "third person plural" in
"Conjugation III" results from, in one instance, wrong analysis, in the
other, from a probable scribal mistake (see above § 5.I.3).

5.2 Nominals of the s"col/(I snb-class

The nominals b elonging to the second sub-class will be taken up here
by the groups disti ngu ished in § 5.0. 2. Th eir inflection will be illustrated
in the subsequent paragraphs and in the discussion of concord, sub
§§ 8.2,2, 8.3, and SA.

L
86 ALTKLEINASIATISCI-IE 5PRACHEN

5.2.I Indefinite
Attestations are restricted to delocutive animate singular and animate
-plural, viz. akillH" and aMa-p "any". Example: sl/.'I/./,i-P nrpn-p akka-r
"kings olds any-he", i.e. "any of the old kings"; RAE !!/,ka-r "anyone"
(see PAPER p. 99, § 7.2-4.I); aJdm-p is attested in ME only once, in an
obscure context. The lack of the two other genders (locutive and allo-
cutive) is probably due to the definition of the indefinite itself, since the
speaker and the person addressed are never indefinite. The "pronouns"
usually grouped with the indefinite akka- and called relative pronouns,
i.e., aMa and app!!, are in reality interrogatives and belong to the class
of indeclinables (see below § 6.2 sub d and § 7.2) .
5.2.I.I RAE aklm
In RAE, the originally indeclinable interrogative a/dl!! forms the
plural akka-p when "who" functions as a relative (see § 7.2). Since
animate singular is ak/~a and not akka-r in RAE, the interrogatives must
not be taken as inflected and belonging to the class of nominals in RAE.

5.2.2 N ega ti ve
The base of the negative is ;'1/.-. It is only altested in the inflected forms
ink "I not", in,. "he not", inp "they not", and i,,"ne « i'l/.-mc). This
last form, 'immc, also inni, which according to the other nominal patterns
should refer only to non-animate, is used already in ME for any of the
other inflected forms. In RAE the form 'inlli is generalized for all genders.
5.2.3 The numeral k-i
The only numeral that is written syllabically is the numeral "one" .
Its form is ki when it refers to non-animate, e.g., pel-ki-Ina "in one year",
/u:-r when it refers to animate singular, e.g., nth lu:-r "one man", Oiher
inflected forms do not occur. Of course, by definition, animate plural
can not OCCUT with this numeral. For the use of the numeral "one" as
indefinite article as calque from Old Persian, see BSLP LV 225.
5.2.4 Quotational morphemesma,-: ma'l/.-
Quotational words are used at the end of citations from direct speech;
they indicate that the preceding is a direct quotation, even if the quo-
tation is not introduced by a verbum dicendi. Two such morphemes
are attested: lIIa- andlllan.. , but most probably they are allomorphs of
the same morpheme. Attested are forms inflected for the locutive:
man/I, for the al1ocutive: mant, for the delocutive animate singular:
",anI' and 'm ar, and the animate plural: 'IIIanp and lIIap (see below § 8-4).
 THE EL:\i\IITE LANGUAGE

5.2.5 Th e RAE Demonstrative l"pi/

This demonstrative, meaning "tha t" ("there-deixis", see PAPER,
§§ 7.2-4-7, 7.2-4-8, 7.2-4-9) is widely used in RAE. In ME, only the
writing hll-u./i.-be occurs, in two passages in the later ME text from
Malamir (see above p. 62), and in one of the contexts this form is
replaced in the same text by 1111.-1/011.. Elsewh ere in ME, only the form hit
is attested, but very rarely, probably with a demonstrative meaning.
It may be assumed that a ME demonstrative /11"11/ or /111111/ was replaced
in later periods by an enlarged stem /huPi/ > /'IIPi/, when the loss of /11/
made thi s demonstrative indistinguishable from, e.g., the first person
pronoun lui.
The RAE inflection of this demonstrative is /""P':'·/ for animate singular,
/lIpiP! for animate plural, and /npi/ for non-animate.
5. 2.6 Nouns
Nouns can be divided into plimary nouns and derived nouns.

5.2.6.I Primary nouns

Primary nouns have no explicit characteristics. It is the lack of such
characteristics that identifies them as primary nouns. They include,
besides native Elamite words, loan words from Akkadian, Old Persian,
and possibly from other languages.

5.2.6.2 "Nominal derivation"

A noun which by its lexical meaning denotes an animate being, upon
taking the non-animate gender suffix /lIIe/ (sec § 4.2)-instead of one of
the gender suffixes that indicate animate gender, as the suffix of the
locutive, allocutive or delocutive animate singular or plural-passes
into the class of non-animates, which usually results in an abstract
meaning. Thus SIl1l1,i- "king" but su.u."i-lIIe "kingdom, kingship", satin-
"priest " but satiu.-me "priesthood", lipa- "slave " but lipa-me (RAE)
"servitude" ; for other words that take the ending /Ille/ the base word is
either not attested or their meaning is uncertain. Such words are sit-me
(ef. sit-tail-·me). lak-ute (also takki-me) "life", liIUl-1IIC, Slit-me, sat-me,
Imt.ri-me, sfl:lJl.mJ-1J/c (uncertain). mani-me (beside a verb-base mmz£- and
a plural ·m ani-p). Some loanwords take this ending, e.g., tuppi-lIIe "tablet,
inscription" from Babylonian !u.ppi "tablet", beside endingless tuppi or
tip,:. This suffix has been characterized as the "abstractive nominal
derivational suffix" by PAPER, § 6.IO.I, and its lexical [unction may be
in accordance with this term. However, in terms of our morphological
 88 ALTKLE INASIATI SCHE SPR:\CHEN

analysis, there is no reason to separate this ending /1110/ from the non-
animate gender suffix. For examples of this ending in context, sec
§§ 8.2.2.2 and 8.3.

5.2.6.3 "Case system"

Contrary to previous grammatical descriptions. El;:unite has no case
system, except for personal pronouns (see § 6.1.1). Postpositions express-
ing direction can be added to any infl ec ted form to express relations that
other languages express by means of a case system or prepositions. These
constructions will be discussed in §§ S.T and H.

Clta.ptcr Six
I NDECLI NABLES
6.0 General
To this class belong
a) personal names, personal pronouns, and kin ship terms;
b) variolls words that have a grammatical function in the sentence.

6.1 Personal nalll es, perSOllal pronolllls, and kinship tcrllls

The indeclinables mentioned above under a) can also be defined as
words on which nominal concord does not operate in the constructions
where such concord normally obtains, such as appositions or included
phrases (see below §§ 8.2.2.1 and 8.2 .2.2). In positions where other words
are classified as belonging to one of the five genders they are not thus
classified because their lexical meaning already identifies them as
belonging to one of these genders. A personal name carries its own
identification, and 5 0 does a personal pronoun which by its lexical form
diHerentiates the person or persons spoken to or of, from the speaker or
speakers. The kinship terms sak, "son", aJll.ma "mother", 'I'utu. "wife",
ike "brother", SlltH "sister", T'IIhu.sak "nephew", e tc ., are self-identified
when they refer to a particular relationship to a person named and need
no classification as to gender, except for the plural, but are not identified
when they refer to anybody 's kinship relationship; on ly in the latter
case are they nominally inflected 1). An indication that the personal
pronouns and kinship terms were classified with personal names by the

I) In a nUlnuer of languages kin ship terms, along with certain other wurds, belong to the gr<l lU~
malical category dubbed inalienable possession (possession inalie nable) by LEVy- BRUHl., and dirTcr
in their IIlorpho logy and syntactical cons tructioll rroll\ other noun!; of th e lan guage. For this group
of terms sec las tl y H. B. Rosh., Liu r: ,,11 VIII (t9591 :!f)7fi. ami V. l\lWI',\ , [nSOA S :\".\'\"/I
(196.\) 43.1 f.
 THE EI.Al\IITE LA NGUAG E 89

Elamites is the fact that in the writing-sporadically in ME, consistently

in RAE- -they are determined by the same marker, the verti cal wedge,
as the personal names.
Of this group, only the personal pronouns will be taken up here,
because they constitute t he only word-class in Elamite which has a case
system. The case system ass umed for E lamite nouns by PAPER', p. 69ff.,
§§ 6.0 n., applies only in one particular instance of RAE , and will be
treated under § 8.3.3.
6.1.1 Personal pr ono uns
l'ersonal pronouns have a nominative, an accusative, and, besides
these, some irregular form s that cannot be sufficiently iliterpreted as
yet a nd which may b e forms of a third case.
Nominative Accusati ve
1. sg. I/. nn
2. sg . " '11 (beside 1/.-, bound form ?) 'Ilu'n
3. sg. 1'- (bound form ?) (probably both
, . : /.1'

writings represent /,./) ')

I. pI. nu/w : u:ika unkmt
2. pI. 11'11 m : 1f11 n 'U UIJI.1I 'n

3. pJ. p- (bound form ?) aplll/. > apill

6.1.I.1 " Irregular" forms of the first person pronoun

In RAE, the followin g forms of the first person personal pronoun, not
classifi ed above, occur: written 1f-ir iT,1 two references; in one of them,
(DB § 21) it is the only occurrence with the verb pepti- which elsewhere
is construed with a locative, and the expected form is H-ihkimar, this
then may be a mistake; in the other (DB § 13) the context is one in which
the narration shifts persons: after third person forms, a direct quotatiOl\
with first person forms follows, and the first of these is written ·!! -il'; this
again may be thought a confusion between ,It'll first perSall and £1' third
person.
The forms ·zt-ua.-ill (DNa 4), zt-lIa-lza-in (DSi 5), and z;-ua -n ll-I"" (DSf
9, 16), which appear to be accusatives, have been discussed by PAPER,
p. 95f., § 7.2.I.4- They occur always in the phrase (n) .m llki z;.-Ila.-(Iza)-in/
" -ua-1/." -k,, Izllitas, to be interpreted ·either as " (as to me) king me( ?) he
made" (so PAPER, lac. cit.), or "(me) king ... he made" where the forms
in question could correspond to appil/.i "o f them", or to another lex ical

I) Formally, ::1 11 rc s umpli\'.!.~ proll OUIl5 arc writtcli iI' , in oue case o llly ill.
 go ALTKLEINASIA1"I SC I-IE S PRACHE N

item. (The Old Persian version has only "made me king" .) No explanation
of these form s can be offered.
For the use of the form u, i.e., the nominative, in accusative context s,
as a calque on Old Persian, see BSLP LV 223f.

6.1.1.2 Resumptive pronoun

In agreement with the characteristic of the indeclinables, i.e., that they
are self-identifying, the third person personal pronoun is used only as
a resumptive, that is, only in a context where the person to whom it
refers has already been identified by name or some other means (demon-
strative, article, etc.); thus, -ir murt"h "I placed him" refers to the god
just mentioned by name. Most occurrences of this resumptive pronoun
in RAE can successfully be interpreted in tlris way; for examples, see
PAPER, p. lOaf., § 7.2+4, sub " here-deixis personal singular", and p. 74f. ,
§ 6.3, sub "accusative".
The corresponding plural pronoun has in ME the forms apu.: "pi,
"pun: "pin; in RAE and in the Achaemenid economic texts, three
forms: "p, "Pi,., apin are attested. Of these, "pin is used as direct object
(accusative). ap and apiy as incl.irect object (dative).

6.1.2 RAE po ssess i ve pronoun s

In conformity with the RAE "genitive case" with genitive ending
-na, see § 8.3.3 , the first person singular and the tlrird person plural
pronouns also appear in tlris case , the fomls being lI",inalnnin; and
"PP':"';, i. e. , un; + l1a/lI; and appi + na/"ni, hmctioning as independent
possessive pronouns "mine" and "theirs",

6.1.3 Th e ME pronominal syste m

Ii In ME, the situation is different. There, a certain number of morphemes,
that seem formally to be connected with the pronouns, occur before both
I verbally and nominally inflected verb-bases. The following forms are
attested:
@ r II p

i ., 't1t ip
'it- 'It
"
'W ' un up

The difficulty lies in the lact that most 01 the contexts are ambiguous,
and the form s just cited may be attributed to any person, and their
function mal' be that of subj ect or of object.
r THE EL A~llTE LANGUAGE

Hence, two classifications are possible: according to the vowel, in

which case we would classify the horizontal row with i as third persons,
the horizontal row with" as first persons ; or according to consonant, in
which case the classification would be in vertical rows, the forms with r
as animate singulars, the forms with p animate plurals, and the forms
with @ or 'It as non-animates.
It is tempting to assume, in view of the parallels from the nominal
inflec tion, that the forms in the above table are the bound forms M
and IP/ of the personal pronouns (see above § 6.I.I), and that they are
construed with the nominally inflected base, i.e., the participle, just as
they are with directional elements, e.g., in " -uklm -rir and P-IIMu.-pip
(see § 8.I.4). If we also assu me a bound form Inj of the second person
pronoun, thi s interpretation can apply to the fo llowing attestations :
animate sg.: 'IIr-tumpa.-n-ra (phonemic jt-lll,,,,pa'll-,.j ?) and similar
fomlS from other bases, e.g., lIr-lallan-rn.
animate 1'1. : ip-tahan-pi (phonemic IP-iaha'II-p/?)
· \ in-lwtil,-Ii (phonemic jn-Iwlik-tl ?)
aIIocu t Ive : I ·u,}l.- lI' tSau-tl
" . (phonemic jll-II-isan-lj ?)
However, we have to seek another explanation for the case when the
base is verbally inflected. While in the above examples the pronominal
forms can be interpreted as belonging to the same gender as the gender
suffix of the participle, in the verbal inflection the pronouns represent a
person different from the one indicated by the personal suffix of the
verb. Thus they may be analyzed as independent pronouns in the accu-
sative, functioning as (direct or indirect) obj ect. Most of the occurrences
of verbs preceded by pronouns can be satisfactorily accounted for in
this way; pronominal objects would then be i r for animate singular, ip
and np for animate plural, and i and in for non-anima te. In tIllS system,
the form un ('III' docs not occur with verbs) as pronominal object would
represent the accusative of the first person singular, parallel to, e.g.,
nun, with which it shares position and distribution pattern . Some of the
clear examples are:
up san",,,,,:s he ... them parallel: '/Ilt smnm,i/t§ they . .. me;
i,' Ita·n ih I love him paraliel: nl! hani, he loves me;
i simalail I dedicated(?) it
i tuniil I gave it beside in tn'lIih, bu t also 'Un tnnili;
i tallat yo u ... it beside in ta lt al, and nominally in-
flected -i tahakn";. but also n talla/mi;
 92 ALTKLEINASIATlSCI-IE SPHACHEN

i tmnpah I ... it also nominally inflected i tnll/Pan

(also i tumpaSta he ... it) beside in tn1lLpan, and i tumpa!,a.
The other occurrences are too uncertain to either confirm or contraclict
this interpretation. Ambiguous are verbs which are inflected for the
second person and are preced ed by un or .,:.", or for the third person
and are preceded by iI', i.e., where the pronoun and the personal suffix
could denote the same person, and hence the pronoun may be classified
as either subject pronoun or as object pronoun . Such forms are :
ull-tnni-t-(ni) (phonemic /n-tnni-t-/ or /nn In"i-I-/)
in-taha-I-(1Ia) (phonemic /n-Ia!/{{.-t-/ or /i" laha-t-I)
ir-hnni-s-ri (phonemic /r-ha1li-5-r/ or fir ha1li-ii-r/).

6.2 Olher i"decli'1Iables

Indeclinables that are neither personal pronouns nor personal names
or kinship terms can hardly be discllssed in the grammar. An exhaustive
list of these belongs in the dictionary, but they may be referred to here,
I
grouped under the following headings:
a) the con j 11 nctions ail "and" and "bu t", / Imta/ (written Iw -nd-dn) ,
"ancI";
b) the prohibitive ani ;
c) the interjection e;
el) the interrogatives akka "who" and appa. uwhich":
e) directional elements;
f) words denoting temporal, local, or modal specifications, usually
translated as adverbs;
g) the RAE clemonstrative /i/.
Constructions with (b) (the prohibitive nlli), (d) (the interrogatives) ,
and (e) (directional elements) are discussed below, §§ 7.I.!, 7.2, and 8.!
and ff. respectively; for constructions lVith (e) (the interj ection e) see
above § 5.0.

SYNTAX
Chapter Seven
SENTENCE TYPES
7.0 General
In tlus chapter and the next will be treated sen tence types and con-
structions in volving 1110re than one word, such as locative constructions,
possessive constructions, and matters o'f concord.

J
 THE ELA i\UTE LANGUAGE 93

The organization of this section is based on the structural patterns

peculiar to Elamite and thus di verges from customary treatments of
syntax. Moreover, certain matters of syntax that are usually discussed ·
in the tradi tional presentati ons cannot receive attention here because
of the uncertainties rem aining in our present state of knowledge of the
language.

7.1 Sell/enee T ypes

I shall be concerned only with a disti nction of sentence types according
to their predicates, since such a distinction corresponds to definite
functions that can be recognized in Elamite. I do not propose to define
the sentence or its parts; the terms sentence, clause, predicate, subject,
etc., are used in their customary acceptation.
If we examine whether the morphological dist in ct ion between the two
inflections, i.e., the verbal inflection of the base and the nominal inflection
of the nominal derivative (= participle) distinguish ed above §§ 4.1 and
5.1.1 and following, corresponds to any distinction on the syntactical
level, we find that verbally inflected forms occur at the end of a text
and nomin ally inflected forms, with certain exceptions to be discussed
presently, do not. Where a verbally inflected form ends a text, 1 shall,
without lurther definition of what is a sentence, consider this form the
predicate and the sentence it ends a n independent sentence. The appear-
ance of a verbally inflected form will hence be the criterion for delimiting
sentences, even though not every verb necessarily ends a sentence 1).
Sentences or clauses with verbal predicate need not be discussed further,
except for the interrogative clau);e, which will be taken up in § 7.3,
because esta blishing such a category sheds light on other syntactical
constructi ons.
Since nominal forms do not normally occur as predicates of independent
clauses, the conditions under which they so occur and their fun ction in
other positions wilt have to be discussed.
In final or predicative position as defined above, a nominal occurs
only if
a) it is preceded by the prohibitive particle a'l Ii;
b) it is preceded by the negative i' /JIi;
c) it is followed by the precative ending -I/.i;
d) it is a noun (as defined in § 5.0.2, sub 7).

I) Segmentation 01 a text iuto scntences this Wily is confirmed by the corrcspondillg Old Pcrs.ian
or BabyJolli:m ycr; ions wherever such call b{' adduced .
 94 ALTKLEINASIATISCHE SPRA.CHEN

Clauses with a nominal form to which none of the above conditions

apply will be considered and treated as included clauses 1) .
For the discussion that follows, I will consider each type of occurrence
of a nominal predicate as determining the type of the clause, i.e., speak of
a) prohibitive clauses,
b) negative clauses,
c) precative clauses,
d) nominal clauses,
e) included clauses.
It may be stated here that Elamite has no relative clauses distinct from
the above enumerated ones. Relative function is expressed in ME by
means of the included clause (see § 7.I.5), and only in RAE by a second-
arily developed relative marker (see § 7.2).
7.I.1 Prohibitive clauses
The prohibitive clauses have as predicate an inflected nominal deriv-
ative in -n (active participle) preceded by the prohibitive particle ani:
locutive am: in-kut'll-n-Il
allocutive ani 1(.n-h':§,,-n-t, RAE a'l/./I. kuita-n-t, etc.
\ animate plural: a'I li tn-n-p, all/l. tlll''II'''''P (= tJ(.l'/la-lI -p)
I
delocutive animate singular ,alli 'II.cC1{-1l "may he not go",
I
and non-animate : his ani pili-n "may he have no
descendents (lit. name)".
In prohibitive clauses, the animate singular and the non-animate
genders coincide, i.e., the animate singular does not take the gender
suffix /1'/ .

7.I.2 N ega ti ve cia u ses

The negative clauses have as predicate an uninflected nominal deriv-
ative in -n (active participle) preceded by inni. The form hmi (delocutive
non-animate, see § 5.2.2) makes it likely that the active participle is
inflected for delocutive non-animate, with gender suffix g, which of
course is indistinguish able from the uninflected participle, and that
negative clauses have as predicate an inflected nominal.
Verbal sentences and included clauses with the negative also occur, but
these conform to their respective sentence types.
I) f rom examples cited by HALLOCK, lAOS LXXVI .13. it appear;; that in the FortifkatiOIl
texts nominal predicates occur at the end of a sentence. The problem can be investigated furth er
only when the pcrtincl\t material is published. Nominal predicates, inflected for animate plural
o nly, ;Ire attes ted o therwise on ly ill thc apodoscs o f thc on ly c~tant Elamite OIilCII tcxt (sec abO\'C"
p. (3), in positions wht!re :\Id;:auiau parallels usc the prescnt-futurl' tense of the verb.

J
[ TI-IE ELAMITE LANGUAGE 95

I 7.1.3 Precative claus es

Precative clauses have as predicate a nominal derivative 'in -/~ (passive
participle) followed by the precative ending -·lIi. Examples:
hatH . .. 1tkkU-l'il' ta-k-ni "may the terror (emanating Irom the
god or the king) be placed upon him "
11I'liak '/al-ik-IHlle lilla tela-I,-ni "may my work (lit. my what-has-
been-done-and-toiled) be accepted(?) by (you)", etc.
Since the precative ending may follow a verbally inflected form,
precative verbal sentences also occur:
RAE Uramasda un ni§ki-s-'ni "may Ahuramazda protect me"
ME pet':r-II-ri "i-pat rllrta-t-'lIi "may you trample(?) my enemy
under you" .

7.1.4 Nominal clauses

Nominal clauses have as predicate a noun as d-efined in § 5.0.2 sub 7,
inflected in ME, not always inflected in RAE (see below). Example:
'It ..• s'ltn/oi-k "I am king", JlII.!m wnlli-p "we are kings" (RAE),

The clitic -1It sometimes appears after nouns, see § +604-

In RAE, the interrogatives aklw. and appa are used, as a calque on
Old Persian, to introduce an appositive or predicative noun; in this usage,
aMa and appa can be translated either by the definite article or by the
relative plus copula, e.g., kam'/J!ata aMa makus "Gaumata the 'Magian'"
or "Gaumata who is a 'Magian'" corresponding to Old Persian Gall.'lllllta
llyn magus. This function of the interrogative eliminates the necessity of
inflection, while in lVIE nominal concord was the sole means to indicate
syntactical relationships.

7.1.5 Included clauses

Included clauses by definition never occur at the end of a text or a
sentence, and their subject is different from the subject of the main
sentence. In such a clause the subject can be named or not ; in the latter
case, the subject is named in the main clause where it functions as object
or locative.
For examples see § 8.2.2.:2, where the concord which obtains between
the subject and the predicate of an included clause is illustrated.

7,2 Interrogat ive clauses

Only one interrogative sentence is attested in the Elamite corpus.
The reference is from RAE (DNa § 4, line 32): appa hamal, day"us appa
 ALTKLEINASIATISCUE SPRACHEN

Ta.,.iy"m"1(s s1(",ki lIlarl'l:iita "How many (?) are the countries which King
Darius held?" (after the Old Persian, KENT OP' p. I3S).
This sentence r,';ves an example of the interrogative a.ppa (non-animate),
both in its use in the main clause (appa l"tllI."k dayal/Ii) and in the depen-
dent clause ("ppa Tariyamal/ii sl/.nki ma.rrista) , and at the same time
identifies clauses that are introduced by appa (or for animate, by aMa)
as interrogative clauses, functioning. as in other languages, as relatives.
In some of such relative clauses, as in the one cited above, the verb is
followed by the clitic -ta, which has, for that reason , been regarded as
the relative morpheme (see above § 4.6.3). However, other similar
occurrences lack the ending -ta , and, moreover, the most common
construction of the "relative" is not with the interrogatives ald~a and
appa, but with included form s, for which see below § 7.5.2.2. For inflected
akka in RAE, see § 5.2.I.I.

Chapter Eight
CONSTRUCTIONS
S.o General
A justification for treating the possessive and the locative as syntactical
constructions instead of including them in the morphology as case-
endings, can be found in the foUo\Ving distributional facts:
a) The directional elements (formerly called "case-endings", e.g.,
PAPER § 6.0.2) occur after the vel"b as well as after a nominal;
b) The morphemes /N (plural of the nominals) and /1"/ (formerly
taken as third person or "substanth';zing" /1'/, PAPER § 6.10.3)
occur after the verb as well as after a nominal.

S.l Locative cO Jl.stnlctiolls

A locative construction is a word or phrase followed by a directional
element. Directional elements can be simple or compound.

S.I.I List of simple directional elements

ma "in"
,,101m "upon, over"
pat "under"
Illtk (RAE kit,) "with" or "after"
.,:/d"," (il'hi) "to(ward)"
i'}}t'}Ila: 1·'H.'}l./: : 'wi: )la "out of (a material)"
sara " over" (possibly: "under")

J
 THE ELAi\II TE LANGUAGE 97

tina "for(?)"
51
'l/W/, (RAE only) "from (a ptace)"
ita.l,a (RAE onty) "with"

8.1. 2 Li s t of compou nd dir e ction at el e m e n ts

sarama " over" (= sara + IIU1); see, however,
§ 8· 1.4
ii/k illla./, (RAE only) "from (a person)" (= il.:/"i -I- III a/')

8.1.3 Co nstruction of directiona l e te m e nt s

Directional elements form locatives with personal pronouns, nominals
and groups of words.

8.1.3 .1 Locatives form ed with personal pronouns

'I/.;-pal. "under yo u (sg.)"
II-I.:il.: "with (?) me" (RAE)
i/'-I","II "wi th (?) him"
1111-1/ kku "over YOll (sg.)"
upi/'-illki "to(lI'ard) thi s person " (RAE)
'/IJ1-li-l1a. and i// -l i -//(/ ') " for ( ?) yo u (sg.)"
II- iilki " to me" (RAE)
It - ild\~ i -+ lIIar "from me" (l~AE)
J.1' -JJ /fI. "against ltim " (RAE)
a1J-II'" "against them" (RAE)

8. 1.3.2 Locati ves formed with Ilominals

Sl yau -wfl "in the tem pte"
Ari-ya-11l{[. "i n Aryan (language)" (RAE)
lat/WoJI JIlt III-ild~i "to (wards) (?) the sanctuary"
Ma./a-p-ikk i "to(wards) the Medes" (J~AE)
a/dw -r-I I/du~ "to anyo ne" (H.AE)
JVa.!llIJ1t c ak iVap ir .~(! rnlll(t. "under the Sun and Moon" (lit. "the
Sun and Moon (being) over (him)?)

8. 1.3.3 Locatives formed with groups of words

l1api-/'-u.-/'i-ikki "to(wards) my gael"
siva.n "PPa. 1.://.,ili-lIIa "in the te mple which r built"

I) Perhaps 1I -liIJI/ , !"ce § II. f.]., al"o a~s illl ila l c d to uf/ illll , illll:r!.

Il aud huc h tier Oriclli alislil;, :\1>1. I, Bt!. II , :\ h"elm. ' / :, I.f:! . .! 7
98 ALTKLEINASIATISCHE SPRACHEN

Parti Ca1U~ Tal'£sa-J' -Z:ld~i "to Parti, Lady of Tarisa"

NUlVIUN '1tll./w-mi i/~ki + mar "fTom our family" (RAE)
hi 'll./d~1f.
1ItUl''lflt "over Illis earth" (RAE)
ruh iUlJ'ih£-p -itaIm. "with few men" (H.AE)

8.1.4 Constructions with ·lthk'lf., sara, and si

Certain locatives composed of personal pronoun (3. person singular
and plural) and the directional elements ,,!dill, sam, and si, take a suffix
at the end:
j'-ukklt-rir (\VT. ri-nk-ku-ri-ir)
p-,ltkkn-pip (we. pi-uk-lm-pi-ip)
I'-sal'a-m (we. il'-sa-m-(il')-I'n)
f-St-ta (wr. 'ir-si-l'a)

All these forms may be analyzed as pronoun (written with the syllable
ri or pi before a vowel but with the syllable ,:1' before a consonant to
express the initial consonant cluster, see § 3.5) +
directional element
+ a suffix, which may be interpreted either as the same pronominal
element that occurs at the beginning, or as a gender suffix.
If we consider the endings -I' and -I'il' gender suffixes of delocutive
animate singular and -pip of the plural, we must class the directional
clements uldw., sara, and s/: with the nominals, since they s~em nominally
inflected, and not with the indeclinables, as was donc in § 6.2 sub e,
However, the syntactical construction of the above forms is ambiguous,
and the reduplication of the gender suffix as -1'i1' and -pip unparalleled
in the nominal inflection. \IYe may also compare the forms u,kkll-rir and
pat-pllp-in which -IJII!' possibly represents the ending -pip-and the
forms I?iri-plfp and l~ir';-IJ ip, which are all uncertain ill meaning and
construction. Forms with the ending -me which, if a gender suffix, repre-
sent clelocutive non-animate also occur: uldw -mi-'Il{l, pat-mJ-'Ila, and
'111d",-",c; the latter may be a variant of 1I1,lm -:- 1IIa (also attested) and
comparable to the compound directional element sara -1- 'lila- unless
sarama should be taken as another inflected directional element, standing
for sara--m e.

8.1.4- I Constructions with lilla

Beside the form 1I-lina posited above § 8.1.3.1, the directional element
liua (also lima) occurs with the pronoun following it, contrary to the
normal order: proIloun -I- directional clement, illustrated above § 8,1.3.1
and ff,
 THE ELAi\IITE LANGUAGE 99
Attested forms are:
li"a-(a)pnll "for (?) them"
li1ta ~'1llt'mlf 11 " for (?) you (pl.) "
lim a~JI.'It "for (?) yo u (sg.)"
Note that in the above examples the pronouns are in the accusative,
not in the nominative, as in the normal construction. On this basis, it is
possibl e to assume that the endings -rir, -I)i/J or -/In/), and -Ine(ua.)
discussed in § 8.I.4likewise represent accusatives. However, th.is evidence
is too little to se t up a special category of suffixes; it can safely be said
only that 'II.!Ii",", sara, /Jat, s':, and li"", under undefinable conditions,
behave differently from the other directional elements.

8.2 COl/cord
Two types of concord operate: concord of subj ect and verbal predicate,
and nominal concord.

8.2.1 Verbal concord

Concord of subj ec t and verbally inflected predicate is not completely
symmetrical, since to the six categories of the verbal predicate correspond
only five categories of the nominal class. The concord can be illustrated
as follows:
Subj ect Verbal Predicate
locutive 1"1 I. sg. 1"1
a!loculive (not attested) 2. sg. !tI
( animate singular II'I \
/3. m
~
) non-animate 10: I/I el sg.
delocutive
\ I. 1'1. I"nl 11111 I 11111 II 111111 III I III1111111I III
( animate plural lPi . 2. 1'1. I"tl 1 0.07~00166J2 •

13. 1'1. IIiSI .1S.:.:.1l <.S)S yo ..~t;S

8.2.2 Nomina l concord

Nominal concord obtains between nominally inflected forms-or
indeclinables of the first group, i.e., personal names, personal pronouns,
etc.- that have reference to the same class of nominals. This concord
requires that the last of the sequence of the nominals take the mark of
the class that they belong to obligatorily; the other nominals, optionally.
Phrases in which concord operates are a) a nOlln and its appositions;
b) included phrases; c) possessive constructions; and d) quotations .

.. .... .....
lOa ALTKLEINi\SI:\TISCI-IE SPRACHEN

8.2.2.I Examples of concord between a noun (or proper name) and its
appositions
locutive '1/ ..• s·ltnlt.i-/~ "I, king"
animate sg. sllnl\~/-}'peti-/' al\~ tari-r "a king, enemy and .. ."
(= an enemy and ... king),
Ins'If.{inak na.pi-r risa-r "Insllsinak, great god"
animate 1'1. su,nki-p ,/{I'PIl-P "old kings"
,/{I'i-p sckpi-p 'l!Iclli-p }[aln.lllli-p "old (n ... -s, leaders
of Elam"
non-animate siy(l.'1l lulia
In RAE, the apposition is very often joined to the noun b y the inter-
rogatives aMIa and (l.jJpa, as calque on the Old Persian definite article,
c.g., Uralllusia aldw L~a-r '}Ia-fJi-r "Ahuram azcla, the grcat(cst) of the
gods", where ME says insu§i'llak r.q({-J' napi-r. For this feature, sec above
§ 7.1.4, also BSLP LV 225.

8.2.2.2 Examples of concord 111 included phrases (see § 7.1.5)

locutive anel clelocutivc animate singular:
1{, • . . JVa./I/UI/c !wlau-h 1m/a-a. r-tlfm/)(W-r ah turnn-k IlltUan-r
" I having prayed to Nahunte, he having heard this (?) prayer and
having done as I said" (can core! with locutive (pronoun '11) in /14,
with animate singular (god Nahuntc) in /r/).
'If, . . . s1f'I/,kimc-IUl. Illf}}Wll - l:, IJlsllsiua/':' uajJi-r-'lI-r r-taha'J/.-r "I having

taken the kingship, TnsLlsinak, m y goel, havjng hc lp ~d (me)"

locutive:
h-lIttahlllllcn-k "I made it at great pains" (llIflla-li: predicate; Ilft/elf-k:
included form, loeulive)
ailocutive:
"alpin-I. ':,,/aml! Ifelf-/ "when you arc dead, you will be blessed" (RAE)

animate singular:
al,ka JIIctl.:an-r "who will change (the inscription)"
snnl'i-p '/fl'plf-jJ ail/w-r ... ilf -r Ilffttalf-r "none of the ole! kings having
made (it)" (concord: animate singular in /1'/; literally: "kings aIds
who-he not-he making-he")
aldUl ... "lllcllmu-r hall£ IJ/,slf,~i'/lak r-Ifkkll-rir I.ak-·Jli "may the terror
of InslIsinak be placed upon him who changes (the inscription)"
(Example of concord on all members): nldw. 0a1m/f-If-?JW /1//JllflIl-r
 THE EL:\!'.I1TEL:\)JGUAGE lor

ak"'fl, 111111111-1' aldat IlIppi-m e III cllw-Jl-r ald~a h i,~- If -me slIlwn-r
(concord with animate sg. in jrj). Note however alilia hllllla-5 aI, hal
itiya-ra lemell-I" ak";(l hIlJJ/(I - ,~ oJ. man-/' hillfl.'n-r alt'lm. II1I1Jla-.{ a/;.
111111'/1.-1', Tllis case is an unexplained exception, wh ere the modify ing
phra se contains an inflected verb: ltu1IIa -s; we expect- as elsewhere
-hllllla -Il-r for these [arms too.

animate plural:
DN ai"~ DN , /1111111./I.-j; "(t he gods) DN and DN, having do ne"

11 on-animate:
siy aJ/ JJ/ §If .~iJ/ a/\'- III C IIJH/I-iIllJllr/. "'/( .\'-/,'-0 uk JIl. i.~irm (w, - e-a If. ercnlum-
imllla /w silt "the temple of Ins'usin ak was built of (\1nbaked) bricks
and, having fallen in ruin s, I rebuilt it o f bak ed bricks" (concord:
siytlll ... mi.Grlllt1Il-0)
siyall /w~: i-s ak mi.Grm fl ll-@-o IIlwsi-/i "(kin g RN) built the temple,
and it bei ng fall en in ruins, I rebuilt (it)"
'20 ~ iyaJl /IIfSalllt: m isir-mal,'-@ (concord with siY(( I/ . non-animate).

8.3 l )oss()ssi7J(, cUll s/ruclioll S

Concord also operates in the possessive constructions . The order is
rcgens-redll III , and bolh the regens and the rec tlllll are followed by the
gender-suffix of the rq;ens. When the regens is an indeclinable of the
first group, it rcmains unmarked, but a gender-suffix corresponding to its
gender-class appears after the rectllm, to indicate that the construction
is a possessive. Th e aUolllorph Imcl of the suffix of the non-animate
gender is used in the possessive construction (see ~ -f .~). When the rectum
is an indeclinable, the fact that a gender suffix appears after it indicates
that the gender-suffix docs not identify the rectum as to gender, but that
the construction is a possessive one. When the rectllm participates in the
nominal inflection , the fact that a second gender suffix a ppears after the
inflect-cd rec tum indicates that thc constructi on is a possessive one. In
other cases, where both regens and rectum are inflected , for the same
gender, t he construction can be analyzed as either an appositional
construction (see § 8,2.2 .r ), or as a possessive; in these cases it was
probably the word-order that indicated whi ch was the case. E.g. , "':.'a-I'
naj;r'-I' "great of the god(s) " seems to be a possessive, because "great god"
is elsewhere ex pressed as 'lI(fiJi-r ris(f-J'. while }'i.~a.-r 'l/a.iJ/'-·/>-r, with two
gender suffixes after the rectum is defi nitely a possessive, meaning
"great of the goels". Examples:
10~ AL TKLEINASIATI SCHE SPRACHEN

locutive:
'II U,"tllii-Naprisa sak HlI'lHpanllmella-ki "I, RN, son of RN," ').
51111ki-II Aui'a n-S'lIslIlI-"a "(I), king of Anzan and Susa"-the mor-
pheme - /~ is usually written -1m , also -Io:i, after this word which
ends in a consonant.
allocutive:
Not attested (see also § 5.0) .
clelocutive animate sg.:
S'lftr'I I"-Nahmlle sali Hnllltl.i -III.'".'iilak-ri- the late construction
(pre-Achaemenid and Achaemenid)-NN NN, iia k-ri-is under the
influence of the Old Persian genitive construction rectum-rcgens
(see BSLP LV 223), but uses the same morpheme.
I(1'ririsa ... amma '1Iapi- p-r "K iririsa , mother of the gods"
5'1/.·I I/,i-<1' > mllrU/I hi lIk/w-ra-ir-ra. "king of this earth" (RAE)
delocutive animate plural:
nappi-p Hatalllh-p "gods of E lam" (or: "E lamite gods")
nappi-p SII'\W-P "gods o[ Susa" (or : "Susian gods")
delocl1tive non-animate:
kllkllllnulJl. hdllsi1luh-me "sanctuary of InslIsinak"
lakloi-1II c HIIlcllll llii-Ius'IIsi 'lI((k-IllC "the life o[ Hutelutus-1nsusinak".
In a later period of iVlidcUe Elamite, a change of -ille to -'IIi can be
observed, but, perhaps due to scribal tradition, -ille persists alongside
of -ni.

S.3. 1 Po ssessive construction s with per son al pronoun

In the same way possessive construction with a persona) pronoun as
rectum expresses personal possession, this construction standing for
the possessive adjective of other language types. Examples:
tald~i-me 'Il-m e "my life"
ku llak 1f,-me "my prayer"
pullll lillsi/, II-P all Nail.lIJllelltll-p "my offspring (lit. offspring
created -of-me) and that of (my
wife) Nahunteutu"

1) old stands for the loeutive gender s ufI ix ,1,-/, but tilis sufTix is writt ell -'d-;k if the prl'ccding:
word ends ill a consonant, e.g., sal:: f{afl"frl .{- fl d ll sillak-ki-il,-, silk AII/I,.ldllllt·lii·;", but !lol e Jali
SUlrfl"-Naltfilf/.:-lIi-ik (nncc e\'en -ki- Ik-hi) as ag,lill s t frequent .{I1" SlIlnd' ·!VIf/lIl1Ifc.-ik/ki. This Ih/
morpheme see rns to have become a s pirant ill late ~IE, since , ill th e in:;criptiolls of 1-lallut1l 5'
InsliSillal(, S utru l; · Nahullte I I and l'Ian ni, we find: ,{ali HllplIlI -/almll, -!III, Jill. Talthi-hi, sal:: [-{II/Trill'
It:/)ti-Iw, au d, with hypercorrcc tioa, ':ia/;: HU/Hlllill1':lIa -ki-il::-ki.
 THE ELA~llTE LA NGUAGE 103

klilla/~ Jlika-me "our prayer"

a-a-ni-ip lIi"a-p "ollr relati ves (?)"
lakki-me PH/lit llika-JJw "the life of ollr of[spring"
11 slI nki appini-I,'-1I1 " I (am) their king" 1) (see
§ 4. 6 -1)
Itiya.n ap-1I1c " lheir ... "

8.3.2 Possess i ve c o n s truction s w.ith a c l a u se

P ossessive constructions also occur with the rectum being a clause
with verbal predicate. Examples:
peli-p III.!,. /.iJIIl/laJ-p (also: /.iIl/./IIa-s-!J- lIa)
ta.ri-p .'ali siras-p
P"il" ... inlli pailas-p-lla

8.3.3 The RA E geniti ve

In Achaemenid Elamitc, the possessive construction o r the above
structure was replaced by a genitive "case-ending" in - lIa, whi ch is
indi f[e rent to person a nd number, e./j. , a.!d",. r(i) sar lIap-lIa (or 1/a·pi-p-na)
" who (is t he) great(est) of the god(s)" bnt the old possessive construction
is also attested in a.!dm r(i)sar lIap- r, parallel to ~'lE riliar lIap-r (or
lIap,:-p-r), see § 8.3 .

8. 4 Qll ota l i ons

Concord opera tes also between an inflec led word and th e quotational
word (see § 5.2.4-): e.g., with the verb-bases tiri- "to say" a nd l1a- "to
speak", RAE ioclltive: tiriya. ... mall/,' , 11m",' ... mank, dcloclltive
animate singular : t.h'is ... mar and 1/(Wr . .. ilia}' , aIlocll ti vc: naul .. .
lIlalll (DNa § 4-); Fort. delocutive animate plum l lIallp . .. JIIop(a) cited
H AL LOCK, ] NES XVIII I S n. 32; a nd withou t verbum dicendi , ME
delocuti ve an imate singular : I{ulir -Naltlt'l1lc . .. .')iynu I JIs1lsilla/l-mc nltw}l.
kusill -k-mnr ak im me /msis "Kutir- Nahunte (said) 'I wa nt to build there
the temple of Insu"inak' -lIIar but did not bu il d (it)".

8. 5 Features poin t.ing gra mmatical change in RrJ E

(.0

The features discussed under §§ 5.~.I.I , 5.2.2, 5.2. 5, 6.1.2, 7·1.~, 8·3·3,
point to a lrend of grammatical change in RA E. If we consider, in spite
of the new RAE patterns evolved under Old Persian influence which I
discuss in a separate article (BSLP LV 222 [L) , that the Achacmenid
I ) Th e genrler su fTi:-: of the first persoll wh it: h is oft l'1l olni ltl'c1 ill [{ AE a ft er tire TI QT llinat La wh ich
it refers re:tp pe:trs in concord situ::r tio ll.
ro_~ ALT[\LEINASIATISCIIE SPRACI-IE:"J

texts wcre still written bY11ative speakers, this trend may be sllmmarized
as follows:
While the persons of the verbal inflection continue t o be used as in
ME (although the absence of attesta tion of the second person and the
peculiar constructi on of the imperati ve, sec SS -~.7. 2 and 5.0, must be
noted here), the categories of gender undergo a simplificati on. The 11 0 11-
animate docs not participate in any inflect-ion, and in the animate
category only the opposition plural-non-plural is consist ently marked.
The plural marker /p/ appears also on words not inflected in ME, and is
opposed to a "singular" marker /1'/, which often refers to the "first person",
the speak er (former loclltive), as well as to the "third p erson". The suffix
/14 is preserved only in frozen "forms, such as -k-ut., and possibly others.
The suffix /t/ of the "second person" appears only with the nominal
derivatives.
I have purposely avoided the use of the terminology established for
the category of gender above § -+.2, and speak of animate~l1on-ani111at e ,
singular-plural, first person-third person oppositions, since the
formal elements p and 'r are vestiges only of the ME gender categories,
and form a different system in RAE .

.-1 p/)wdi:c
SAMPLE TEXTS
A. MIDDLE ELUlITE
Brick of Unbs-Napri; a (MOP XXXII No. XXrrrjr ~ MOl' lIT No.S)
TransH tera tion :
'If, III U J/-ta§-A l"l.G AL sa-a.!l: mll,Hu-'If lII-ba ll-u,lf-JJlC-'Il(f-I,'i slf-!f,/l-/~i- i k
A '}l-:;a-an S-u-su.-1f.'I I-lw.
Transcription:
n Untas-l"laprisa .~ak HUlJlj )(lu/l-lll clla-h s'lf!1I'/~i-k A'1l ca. Il-Sll.~If}/-k
Transposition: ')
I Ullla.' -Napri"". son Humball/IIIWI/a.-LOC UT IV E iling-LOC UT ITiE
AIl§ml Susa-LOCUTIVE
I) The "tran sp os itiu n," as differe nt irmll the eOllnel>ted sc ntc nce-fo r- scntence tran ~ [ation gi\'e ll
at the e nd, is a m orphellle·for-morph eme translatioll. Grammatical nlorpill.!mc5 whi ch ha ve all
English cfJuival cllt :-Irc so translated; for (" xample, th e personal sllfiixes afte r \·crbaI for1lls ; l S " - ["
(the -/I or ze ro s1lffi x for th e 1s t ~g . ) , "-yo n" (ih e ·f suffi x for the :: nu sg . ami pl.) , et c. i\l o rphellles in r
which 110 such E ng lish cfJui\"al ent exists are. identified b y their me allin ~ , i. e ., by the n~!lll e uf the
.! !rammatical ca tego ry 10 which they refer, sllc h ,IS the gcmler morph emes LOCUTIVE , s ing-Illar
(SG),plural (Pl.), :Wl p erson ( .1I~D ), COK N ECTI VE, o r h y their Elamit e form , sti ch as i\IA , TA.
The " q uolation a llllnrph ellle" is rendered b y Q UOTE. WheH the Engli sh gerund or pa s t participle
cndill g lrnn sbtcs t1 H~ corrcsp ondin g Elamit e emlings , t!i pse ending s (·in g , -cd , c lc.) are separat ed
[wm the vcrb s tem by a \· crtical bar. Compounds arc d ivided b y a + ·sign.
 TI-IE EL\l\IlTE L\ K GU:\GE 10 5

Transliteration:
s/:-ya-Ct}l tlSillllft a-ah d'NIN-a-h-mc It-pa-at 1t1f-lfs-si-ijJ-JJlc kll- [si-ilt]
Transcription:
si,),an Simlft ok Belct-dU-mc upal IIltssi-p-mc /ms/:-II
Transposition:
lelllp/c ::jill/.llialld /:Wct-rili-it brick bakcd-PL- it bllill-I
Transliteration:
rlS /:-JIl.lIt a-a/~ rI·lVJIV-{/.-lt: la-all-sl:-ti-ip-j;tt a-'jJlf-lf.It a-ha-(tJl }JUt-itt-wit

Transcri ption:
5illlll/ at, Betel-(ili /1/1/ -I- sili-p npllli aJ/a1l IIlllr -I- ta-h
Transpusition:
S'illllli alld BiJ/c/-rili II CW ( ?)-PL IIw//. Ihere enrth -I- plac.:<I-I
Transli teration :
II If-lIt-l-ak /w,-Ii-ik-u-JJlc rl.S i-mill a-a/~ d'N ! IV-a-if si-y a-an-/w,-'Il/l- pa
Ii-'ll{/, tc-la-ak-ui
Transcription:
II1(tta-/,~ hali-k-u-mc Sim.'lfl a/~ BClct-rf/i s/)'an -I- klll,'-p tina tcln.-/(,-n/:
Transposition:
lIIa lde loil lcd-I- il Sillllli alltt Billet-rili lemple -I- heavell-PL Jor-yon
accept[ed( ?)-llIa,'

Trans/.alion
!, Untas-Naprisa, son of HlImbanllmen<l, king of Ansan and SlIsa,
built the temple of Simut and Betet-ali of baked bricks. I in stalled there
new (?) (statues of) Silllllt and Belet-ali . a Simut and Belet-ali of the
<lcropolis (?), may what I m ade and toiled (?) be acceptable ( ?) to you!

B, HOYAL ACHAEl\IENID ELA?lIITE

DNa §4
Old Persian text from KENT Olel Persian p. I37, II. 30-47.
Babylonian and Elamite text from WEISSBACH KIA PI'. 88ft.; see
also WEIssn,lcII, ZDMG 9I 86 anel FRIEDRICH, 01'. NS XII ~5.
Ole! Persian :
fkitiy Ddra yrtvau s :rs(iyaOiya A J(}'rtma:;dd ),aOr; avai·un imam bt7m.im
yaudatim. pnsdvarlim
Babylonian:
Da1'l;ya'JJ/lI.~ ,{arn, iqabbi A/wrmazda. I~; im'ltfn millate annUl: n'i/~ra11la
ana tibb£ alf(lmeS s1{.IIIm:ull1(.
106 :\LTKLE1NAS IATI SCHE Sp RAC HEN

E lamite:
mDa-ri-ya.-lIla-H-i.(; IIIs'ltuJa: ua-(l'JI.-r £ flU-rrr. -mas-da sa-ap ~i-'Ya-sa Iii
1Il'/l.- l'Ir-u:JI. piJ'- fa-·lt.1/t-pi-ram lIa IIl-lak
Transcri ption :
Trtriyamal/..;; S'1I1l1~1: un-I' -J' U}'a.1J/.u§ta sap ciya.-s-a Iti JJl,nrllJl jJr(l.lJlj;ralll
1m. 1IUa.-k
T ransposition:
Darills l,i'lIg spclI./,'lillg-SG Alwrallla.:da as (?) saw-3 R D-CON-
NECTI VE this carlh conjllsiull throllgh -:- give l'" ( ?),
Old Persian
JJuwa Jrabara 'IIliim xsriyaOi'Yo.m a/wllflus adam .1:sriyaOiya fl.IIUY
Babylon ian:
ar ki al/rilw iddallJ1.flSiuili 1/ al1(Uw. I lia I1wblti.{il1(l. allit sarr ir/II ipte-
qidanni a'llii/w sarru
Elami te:
m e- Hi IIIlf tl'I l-J/ (l-as III Ii. IIIslfnl\~ i It.-no-in IW-Ilt· las /lid /IIslt/l.A~i-gi-1ft

Transcription:
m cJ1./: u t1{.'na-.~ n S/{I/./~i If-Hall hulta-s If snnki-k-l(!
Transposit ion :
IliclI I gavc-3RD I killg I- oj-il ( ?) 1I""fe-3RD I 1"'lIg-LOCUTII 'E-
iurieell (?)
Old Persian :
va.~ltn Auramazdtfhri adamsim gtiOavti lliyn§tfdaYfllII tynsam ada.m.
a8alt(l}Jl. (1.1)a rrlumn.va
Bab ylonian :
ina $illi so. Ahu}'Iuazdn. mlliJm. ina aSl'i§ill11 'lIltesib§£u(i/.'l/. 'I t so. muik u
aqabbaSiiimit-n ippnlia
E lamite:
=a-u.-mJ-i ·1t flU- r a-mas-da,-ua //I I i ';s-ka.I -le-1JUt m:lfr-da ap-pa III Ii. Cl.P
lnr-1'i-ra JIII-be Im -1ft-tas

Transcription :
canm£n UramaSla-11a. 'II- islmte-mn. m ill' + la appa '1{ ap fi r i-1' hit-p i
lilltla-Ii
Transposit ion :
grace Ahllrama.da.-oj I jetters-in carlll + IJ/1t-I wlint I Ihem say-SG
iliat-olle lIIade-3RD
 THE ELAMlTE LANGUAGE I07

Old Persian :
"aed 'IIujm lulJlln. dlta yadipatiy malliycflta.iy tya ci yalmrn.m aha avtl
da.lly6va.
Babylonian:
iibb'it §a ana/Uf. ~"ebalw II h; taqabbll. nmma lIui/(ilc annit·/{. ah/uiJi/u' l:bSd
E lamite:
sa-ap /lilt /za-n£ -ra ~i-ln all-1m sn-Hlk. ram( ?)-man-da ap-pa Ita-Illn-ak
IIIda-a-ya-u.-i§ Ilu-bc
Transcription:
sap 'If. //(f.ni-r lila. (w./w sarak rall/.a-n-t. appa hama./~ dahyava.s Itnpi
Transposition :
as I wislt-SG so . .. thinkiing-yoll "which lim.es cU/f:Jltrics that-olle
Old Persian:
tYf; Dtirayavalls :\:sdynOiya ndal'rrya pnlikanl didiy
Babylonian:
§a. Dal'iyamns Sa/Tn kulln :';aIJJ/nlli.~IfI/.ll am'll]'
Elamite:
ap-pa 7IIDa-ri-ya-ma-lf-i,\; IIIsunlu: mal'-ri-is-da. 'l1 a-ill-da 1II:){l-ui-mc $i-i.~
Transcription;
appa Tariyam.alls sHllki marr£-.~-t(l. lla-Jl-l [aime ci-.~:

Transposition:
wlliell Darius kiug tool.,-]RD-T_-l " say Ji'll g-w'II, "elic! look!
Old Persian :
tya/:)' gtiOlf1n baraliy avada ;tsutiS(;/z.y ((datai)'

Babylonian:
sa /wssi aU'ita '1/a5·11. ina hbbi tHlllassiHuuiftn
Elamite:
ak-lm'l-b c GIS /W'i-at ku.-ul-ma-lUlI- pi ha-mi tUI'-llfl-in-ti

Transcription:
aklm-p Ilni klll(i)-lIl1l.-1l-P ami tlll'lla-Il-I.
Transposition:
who-PL tllrolle ca.I'ry-MA-illg-PL III el'c kllOWJi'llg-YOll
Old Persian:
nzdti bavatiJl PdrsahJl(i murti"ahjl(i ti.1fraiy a)"stis paragmatd adataiy
108 :\ LTKLEI NA:5 IATl SC HE SPRAC I-lEN

Babylonian:
i 'lla 'ltJll //.~ lIl11a imuiudakka .~a. amiHu. Pandya nSJJlClI'l7§u. 1'ItQll iUil.'

Elamitc:
!/It,-pi-IJlc-ir tur-lIa-iu-li 1IIJ'1/11.111 ES -ir-ra. IIlPar-sir-rn-'II(l sCl-da-Jli-ka ,1
GIS "i-/'If-III//. hi pa-ri-ik
Transcription:
IIpi + mer IUflla -'Il-t I'Ilh-r Parsi-r-llu ,~ala.nilt'a sirulJl. i pari-k
Transposition :
lliell kllowli-II!;-),on j}/(/.II-SG Pcrsi<lIl- SG-oJ Jar s!h'aJ" il Ro ill e
Old Persian :
lI:rid bavdtiy P/il'sn JIIartiYlI dt7raynpi y Ita cit P tirsa
Babylon ian :
1:'}/a 'l7,mll ,~ IIIIt.a. im./lil/.daldm .';t! ClIlICII1 Par.wiya. /"It!]1f '/filII III(/ti,~l!

E lam itc:
Irll -pi-me-ir 11l1'-lIfl-iu-ti IIIrull.llJES mp{/}'-sir-ra sfI-dfl -lIi-h'U.1 III Par-sin
ill-ka,,-m(ll'
Transc ription :
IIpi + IIl cr (url/a-II-I fuh Parsi-r .~(flaJ/ilt'{/ Pars/:1I iklw + iliaI'
Transposition:
Ih en know!iJlg- YOll man Pcrsiall-SG ja r Pasia fr om.
Old Persian
pn rtal'am j)(lli:vnja/Ci
Babylonian :
:mltam cpus
Elamite:
be-ti-Z(f -Ill a -i Il-d n.
Transcription :
petiea mn-1t-t
Tra nsposition:
JOlIghl QUOTl iug-yo lI.

Tmllsiatioll (oj Ihe Elall/ile)

King Darius says: when Ahuramazela saw that this earth was in
confusion , then he gave (it) to me, he made me king over it, I am king.
By the grace of Ahuramazda I restored order (lit. put in its place); what
I said to them, that they did as I wished. If you wonder , saying , gllote:
 THE EL:\ l\JIT£ LANGUAGE

" How ma ny are the countries which Eing Darius held?" look at the
reliefs (of those) who carry the throne, from that yo u wiU knoll'. Then
you will knoll': "The spear of the Persian has gone forth far", t hen yo u
will knoll': " The Persian has fought far (indeed) from Persia"-end of
quote.
Notes to DNa. S -1-
FIU ETlIW':JI, ill Or. NS Xi i :zs cit cs ihis paragraph ill s uppor t uf his lhesis t hnt thc quota t ioll
fo rlll of the "SCCOlld person" is 11Il1II/a (11 <'11111. ); (hi!:'. has bcc II acceptcd by P ,\I'En, p. 58 , § 5.9 , I prefer
to l,ll'e IIII-ill-du wilh WEI SSIJ AC!!, KIA p. 90 n. y, uS ;l ll[)cILti\'c of 1/(/- "to say", fur II'h.ic h see
01 1£0 the refs. frolll the Fo rtifi ca tion tcxts cited by H ,\I.I.och:, ./NF.S XVII I I Gf" and (a he as thc
lluoia tion form t he last three syllab le,; of the paragraph: /IIII-ill-ilil . This ncc c;;s it a(('~ a di fferent
illi erpt'ctatioll of the word immetiiately prcccdi llg, which was fur!ller ly read !,dj ':IIII/II-II -fll, ami
\ran!;Ja\ ed "du sc h \[i g:~ t" (llllJ ene'my, Ptlil, by WEI SS II,\ CII , ZDMG 9 1 SU , "hat . . . dell Feind
!;cschlag:clI " or fl!lE Dlt l CII , lac. cit. "Elicm~'" COl Hlio l u t! ex prc!'!;cd hy Pd; al o ll t!, the won! shou ld
have lhe J;l'nd er s ufii x /rl or fI'l for sing ular or plural; hCllcc I preit·' lo CUl 1'<'1i:/I'/I/lIIIII1, and
iUh'rprct pdi:a ei t her as a compu uud o i I,di, or pus:;;ibly as a l ra llscripl io h oi Old P" r;;i,III />a(iyajlliti ,
j'OIl II'acted to ·paliialli, aud rc mlcrnl/,di'<(j ill Elamil e tr;lIlsnipt inn.

ABBREVIAT10 NS
Af\": Archiv fiir fI,'-~i{schnjlfursc l!llll g
:\rOr .·! rchiv O l'i~lIf(ifui
:\5 .-1,~s '''l'iolo!;iCllI Sll/(li(.~
B.-\ lJdlrllg.: :ur .-J .~s yriologi,;
Roq.;er E,;arh. Ie BO I((;ER, Di.: /1I ~T hn/fcl/ _· l s{/ rJ/(/dd(m ~' 'h.-jjlligs ,1m/ .-J S,~}''';': II (Archi v fiir
OriclllforschulI g Ue ihe il 9), Gra;>: 195('.
CamCWlI , II E I G. G. C,HI£ltOl', Hisle"." vj Earl)' [rlW (193u)
Camcron, p-rr G. G. c.uumo/; , Pascpulis Tr <'ll ,w rJ TflMd s ( = (lri('ula ll ll,;t il ul l' P ublie:l liulIs,
Volullle LXV), I9-1R
IEJ Ism,.} I! .r/J/oralirll/ ./nllrlwl
J:\US jUl/mll1 of Iii,; .·lmcriwlI O)'i.-lIflll Sf),;i<'ly
J CS jOl/mll1 (If C I/I/.:ijo ),1II 5 fl/lli .:.\'
jNES ./Vllrllill of N ,!()r l~'ll s/all Sludi,'g
L I' I Wl'IlL; lIlt ( hoix F. L1OI'OIOI,\I',(, Clwix d<, T~'.rl,:,<; CUIIJijorm(';; , Paris, 1873
~ I .-\ u(; ill ittdlllll1:"11 ,iI')' .-J /I(ll'i~ ' II{flisch "1I GI's,·II~cI/IIfl.
\ I D I' "I ,:m o irc,~ d t: III Mi,~si(/ II A rcll<:u/ut;il/lIl' ,'II I mll, IJdcga t ioll "II I', ·rw.
~ Ill ' Or;<'lIflll Il l.~/itll/.: Pu blicatiolls.
U" Ol'imtll/iff (:"JS = No va Series)
RA N~v lI~ 11' .'f ss ),rioloJ:;i'; d rl'.-i rcl:,:.,lo;; i.: Uri.:./flll.:
VI)I r·t.!sinil, ON/III"; Is/vrii.
WeiSSb,lCh, I..: 1:\ F. H. \\'E ISS ll,\CII, Di(' Ilc ilillS chrijl,:/1 da .,lcll1immidt.!11 (Vurderas iati s I'lH~
Biblio t hl'l( I I [ ), Lc ip;>:ig 1\)11
WO Die W, '1i ,t.:.~ Orie l/Is
\\'Z I": \[ lVi<'lIt:1' Z,!il.l'rfln/f fiil' tli.: l\1I1111.: d~,<;. M(!)'g/l lllllllh' .~
ZA Z<'itu /lI'1/t fii,. .-!s!i},,.io!ogi,;
Z IJ \ IG 7.,'if.l'c/' I' /j! Ikr 1J.-'lf,~cllC.1I !ll flrg':lIJ.im/iMIi ':'1 (;c,~ d/scllllfi

BIBLlOGRAPH Y
The bibliogruphy OIl (Achac lU<..:lIid) Elamite text pu hlicatio ns ,Iild atte mpl!; nl the ir dt:ci pht'fIlU!lll
begull by WEISSBACII, Dj.: .·! chiilm:nid<'l1iI18c.ltrijf<'1I ;lI'dtcI' , .. I,.t (As5rrini()gisc hp. Bibliot hcli. IX )
Leip7.ig, ! 8~o , aud brou ght up lo 189.1 ill hi s Nt' l /( [1.:ilrll;;.: ;/1 1' A' !II){I,~ d .... 5 U Si.~fh';l! I lIsr./ltljl<' n
(Ab haml lu llgclI del' l\ oai gli clwll Siicilsiscl\cn Gcs!'lischaft dc-r \\,i ~se !l scJ wftl'll, Ph i l. ·H i ~t. 1\ 1asst:
X I V, p. i3 1), was continued lip to the year 1915, alll1 exH.'!lfk(i to r on'r all Elamit e mall'rial, b~'
1·11);5 1:-;" , Il il' l'illhdmis c"~11 QUi'1hll :11 ,. (;,'uhirfl(,' I':IIIIII ,~. i.rip;>:i;!, 1[}lfI.
rIO ALTKLEI NAS IATI SCHE SPRACHEN

Ideally, a bibliography compiled today should con tinue tllese !is ts, preferably in the maune r
-numbered ilnd in chronological o rder-established by Wli l SSUAC Il and H OSING. Such a ll approach
is however [Jot only beyond the scope of this public:ltion, but would prove confusi ng, and s hould
be replaced by a critical bibli ography which tries LO separate the cha ri irom the wheat. All attempt
at such a bibliography will be made ill Iil}' edition of Old and Middle E lamitc texts.
I sha ll have to restrict the iollowing bibliograph y to major tex t cditifJlIS, a nd gr:lIlllnatica l
a na lyses. Lcx ico~rap hi cal arlicll';; am) st udies 011 t he Pc rscpolis Tr c a~u r }' a lld For tiiicaliOIl tex ts
iiml their COI llributiolL \0 Old Persian linguistics ami hi~tory will be onliUed. The reader interes ted
ill these will be easily brough t up to date by t he material lis ted after 19.IB- the public<lliuu date
of C.UUCRO:-<"S Pasepoli s Treasury 1'(ll!lcts-iu the l\ei15chriftbibliographic published by A. POllL
ill OrieJI/lllill Nova St:ries and the bibliugraph}' publiShed by E. W.E ID :-<'.EII ill Arclliv fiir Orit!IJI-
forsellllllg. ;\ selected bihliography ur lex t edi t io lls a nd s tudies 011 gramm ar is included ill t he
Bib liugraphy given by P,WER, (11..155), p. II:! IT.

A. TEXT EDITIONS
IfQr uelails , sec In troduc tion )
1. Middle £1(llIIilc
(i\I OP = ~rclllo irc5 de 1a Mission Archcnlogiquc e ll Irau)
V. SCllIoll., Tcxtcs ,!/iullil':S-rlll:;mlift!,; . Prcmie re sc ric, Paris 190 J ( = MDP nl); Deuxieme seric,
Paris 190., (= MDP V); Trois i(:flle scric, Paris 1907 ( = MUP IX); S1 " atricme sedc, P ;lris
IfJt 1 ( = MDP XV).
:'II. Pf:zAR D, Mission Ii /jcllda-Bollchir, Paris 191.1 (= MDP XV)
?II. RUTTEN, Ardlin/ogit! SUSit!ll IiC, Paris 19.19 ( = MDP XXXI).
- - , LtJ.~ docul/ICllts c/Jigfllp hiqlles til ! 1'cllol]lI Zt!/Ilbil, Paris 1953 (= MDP XXXII) .
l';:Ol'IG, cd. , Corpus Illscri/'tirmlllll Elllmimrum 1, Halllto\'cr 1926.
G. Hjjs l ~G, Die e iulicillli5Chcu Qucllc li zu r Gcschich lC ElillllS, I. 'rei!. AltclalJlische Te x tc (Assyria-
lugischc Biulio lhck XXIV/t), Leipzig 11]1 6.
F. \\1. I';:u:-<' I(; , Di~ dlllllischm !\· iJlli!Zsill .~chriflt!ll (Archiv fiir Oric lll{ ur~cIH ltIg Bcihcfltfi). Gra1., 19(j5.
1\1. ./ . STEVli, Tt'Xtt! 5 ,~!lIl11it,;.~ Ih' TchoMha,Z"lIuil, l ranica :\utiqua I [ (11)(i::) :!z-7(j ami iiJid. [I ! (l!)fiJ)
lO:! - I:!).

_. A dlllo!mo! lIil/:
F. H. WEI!;50,\CII, Die ]';:cilillschriflCrL del' :\ch ;i rtLCllidclL (Vordcrasiatische Bihliol hcl, II I), Ldpzig
19 1 1.
R. G. I\EN'J'. Old Pasillu: (;m lJl//U//', T,·.rt.~, Lexico/!. :!lld rev. cd., New Havcu, I!J S3 (with corllpldc
bibliog raphy of edi t iull!' of AchaCIlH:llid text;;, illcludi ag the Elnmite n·rs iolls).
G. G. C,\ .\I EROf';'. IJ<'fs,'I)oli.~ Tn-a sury Tllblds (OJ P LXV ), Chicago, II).,B_

n. GRA i\DIA'rI CA L ST UD IES

I. COlllj,r<'ilcllsiv.: Studi.:s:
BOR I>, F., H/llm (Sprm:lu). NLI- III ( 19:!S) 70-8J.
L AII,\T, H., St ructure Ii,: 1(/ 1(llIglIC .3/lllItih·. COll icrclICC:; de 1' lus til11l de lillgllis l ill llC de l'Ull i\'ersilc
de Paris IX ( 1950 '51) :!j -.p.
PAPlm, H . H., 'I'll .: Plwllu/ugy 111111 Mor/I/m!ngy nf Un)'1I1 .-l ch{/~lIItJuid 1~·(lIlIIi/.' , A rm Aruor 1f)5S.
:!. Strlllit!s oll lld(li/:
BORK, F., V i.: E/umiseh.: KI(lIIIIII~r, .-1/0 IX (193J-3.' ) :!9:! IT.
FUIEIHUCIl, J., Die Parlik':/'I d.:r :;itjal'~11 R.:d.: ill! _-l chd m<'lIidisrlt-FlflllliscJsm, Or ~S X I I (!!J.12) 2) IT.
- - , .-I/Ip.:r.~iscl/Cs IIl1d HIlImiscll.:s, Or NS XVII (19.'9) 1 fT.
1'!I:oJZ, W. P., EI!llIIi,~c llcs, .·/rOr XVIII/I':! (1950) : 8:! ff.
1·!.\uocl':, I~_ T., Nellieli' uf PffPcr, j.-IOS LXX VI (195(,) -13 JT.
The/illil.: Vc:rb i ll .·l ellfltJllwl ifl H/al/lit.:, ./ IVES XV III ( 1959) I fi.
Noks 0/1 .-lcllII~III':lIid E/llllliftJ, j iYES XV lJ (195M) 2Sfi fT,
ThtJ PrO/101IIi1l1l1 SlIffi.rc.~ ill :/c/trIClIIwid FJlllllit.:., j.v/~S XXI (190Z) 53-Sfi.
Til,; ValJIII NOIIIIS ill _·lcJII/~m cl/id 1::IIIIIIilc, .-IS 10 (11)65) 1:I , z5.
I Usn:n v, j. 3., Ehwaki,' XO:ill j.~t!!.:ml}'e /)oklllll.:llfy i:; SII: - U gm mlllllfil,·." ,j.t fOI'/I11/x X IJS
(=- U II the GrarUllI:l licai Fonus nf the EcolI"mil: !)rlClll n<:ul,; nf Susa l, I'DI It)63/ :! , -:0"':09.
 THE ELAMITE LANGUAGE III

ADDENDA
10 Chapter Three
In Chapter 3, I have elicited for E lamite, as a minimal system , only
one series of stops, and I have symbolized them, as customary, with the
voiceless set /1', t, k/. Similar assumptions lrave been made previ ously;
however, H. H. Paper was the first to exhaustively collect variant spellings
to show t hat Elam.ite has no more than one series of stops. The variants
collected tended to indicate the equivalence, in the writing of EIamite
words, of syllabogranls which, in the translitel'atio~ of Akkadian,
represent phonemically distinct sequences. I had similarly accepted, on
t he phonological level, another conclusion resulting from Paper's distri-
butional analysis regarding the status of geminate consonants. According
to this, all consonants, whet her writt en single or geminated, were normal-
ized as single consonants (Paper, p . .7, S2·7)·
This conclusion was based on the variation between CV ane! VC-CV
in the writing of some lexical items. In fact , this var ialion applies to one
part of the corpus only. With regard to consonant gemination , the corpus
falls into three classes: I. worcls which are always spelled with a single
consonant, i.e. , (C)V-CV, 2 . words which 'are always spelled with a do uble
consonant, i. e. , (C)VC,-C, V or CV-VC,-C,V'), ancl 3. words which arc
spelled at times with a single, at times with a clouble consonant, i.e.,
sometimes (C)V-CV, sometimes (C)VC,-C,V or CV-VC,-CtV. The spelling
variation of the third class should not be taken as characteristic of t he
whole corpus . To extend the range of varialion over the whole corpu s is
tu make the description of the orthographic system weakly adequate
only: not only are thus graphically geminated consonants pllOncnlicized as
single, but, as a corollary to this feature, any intervocalic consonant
phoneme may be spelled gemimrtecl. This description disregards t he
constraints operating on members of classes I and 2, and will allow
genullation in 111cmbers of class I ~where no gemination is present-as
well as absence of gemination in members of class z- where gemination
is not absent-thus describing non-existent spellings. Such a description
whkh treats three classes as one does not carry any in formation about
the constraints imposed upon the structure of the E lamitc spelling syst em.
The constraints define a variety of three, i.e., a choice from three
possibilities, whereas a description of the corpus without constraints

I) In the te x t printed aLu\'C I ha\"c indica ted th o "graphic" gClIli nntinll ill the tralls l:riptioli of
th ose Elamitc w or d ~ which arc, as a rul e , writtcn wilh ;j rlouhle cOll so na n l , hoth ill thc ex amp les
ami in the p:lradi l-l ll l;; (sec p. 7:1 II. :\ ).
1I 2 AL TKLE I N ASIATI SCHE S PRACHEN

shows a variety of one, i. e., no variety, no choice, no information con ten t.

As opposed to this minimal variety system, a strongly adeq uate
description will take the donble spelling practice as its basis, and describe
th e maximal variety system. The maximal variety system can be reduced
at any time to the minimal variety system by an opti onal orthographic
rule simplifying a double consonant. In other words, what is to be de-
scribed is under what conditions the Elamite writing inserts a VC sign
in front of a eli sign when the latter alone is sufficient to indicate t he
consonant. It is all tb e more necessary to explain t hi s " redundancy"
because the geneml trend of tile Elamite writing syst em is to reduce t he
number of signs borrowed from the Sumero-Akkadian syllabary (sec
p . 701.); the use of red undant signs in the writing wo uld run cOllnter to
t his t rend of simplification.
The correct procedure is to collect th e forms showing t he maxinial
orthographical variet y, establish the maximal orthograph ic system, and
examine whether they express phonological distinctions which arc
necessarily lost in the minimal system.
I suggest that the spellings with geminated vs. non-geminated con-
sonants in Elam ite loans co- vary with spellings of two different ki nds of
consonants in th e so urce language; e.g., in the transcripti on of Old Persian
names and words geminated consonants correspond to ot her segments of
Old Persian words than do non-geminated consonants. Since there is a
convenient collection of transcription eq uivalents in Paper's book,
I will first show on the basis of Paper's examples wh at relevant con-
clusions I think ca.n be drawn from this variat ion for the phonology, and
then add frol11 the corpus of ME furth er examples which cOIToborate my
conclusions. 1
Th ese conclusions are as fu llows : intervocalic consonants speUed
geminated can be equated with Old P ersian voiceless stops, and those
spelled sinf:lc with Old P ersian voiced stops. Consequ ently , ill a maximal
system of Elamite phonology, we should posit for Elamite two series
of stops (and perh"ps sibilan ts i1S well), disting uished by a feature whose
exact phonetic nature can, of course, not be specifi ed . Th e evidence for
this comes ultimately from the writing sys tem, for which t he foll owing
spelling con ven tions can be deduced :
1. In non-intervocalic (initial, final, or pre-and post consonan tal)
position no distinction is made, e. g., OP ~agabllxsa- = ];>a-ka-pll-uk-su,

I) Th e tran,;crip tioll uf Old Pc r;;i.1!) names in the Ebmite Pe rsc [1ol is ta ble ts , lis ted ill E. r~Cl!·
\·cu is IC,Til,e., d 'Will S 1)I·o/J /·<"~ or iraui.:u flUet":/!, P;lri:;, 11)(16, 77"97. does n u l contf.1d it;t th ese
l"olld usio l' S.
 THE EL\MlTE LANGUAGE II3

OP Piiti;;uv.lri- - ga-ut-ti-iS-mar-ri-is, OP Cispi- - ~i-is-pi-is ; OP

Artavan;!iya- = ir-clu-mar-ti-ya, OP Marguniya" = mar-c;Ju-nu-ya;
OP haUlllavar~a- = u-mu-mar-lsa-ip.
2. An OP or Bab. voiced intervocalic consonant is rendered with a
sequence (C) V-CV, e.g., OP Bagiru-, Bab. *B;igili = ba-Ei-li, OP Aragaya-,
Bab. a-m -l1i = har-ga-ya; OP Nagitabaira-, Bab. Nigintu-Bel = nu-ti-ut-
be-ul, OP tigraxallga- = ti-ik-ra-ka-ll-ga; or A sa~arta-, Bab. sa~~a-ar­
ta-a-a = ~ts-sa-kar-ti-ya, OF 8ata~u-, Bab. sa-at- ta-~ ll-ll = sa-ad-da-
Isu-is, OP Btq~ayaQi - = ba-~i-ya-t i-is, OP 111a~ 1l-, Bab. ma~u s u = ma-tn-is.
3. An OP or Bab. voiceless intervocalic consonant is rendered with a
sequence VC-CV, e.g., OP Kapisakani- = I.a-ap-pi-iS-s,,-I.a-nu-is; OP
GaumfLt'l-, Bab. Gu-ma-a-tu = ka-ma-ad-ga, OP An ahita-, Rlb. a-na-
ah-i-tu-u 1 = an-na-hi-ug-Ijil, OP Autiyara-, Bab . ll-ti-ya-a-ri = ha-ut-ti-
ya-nt-is, 01' Datuvahya- = da-ag-gu-man-ya; 01' Vahaul;a- = ma-ll-
u~ - ka . OP Saka- = sa-ak-ka .
.f. Tile spelling correspondence can be meaningfully interpreted only
for the stops, a lthough the graphic renderings of non-stops (especially 5)
also show non-random gemination, e.g., OP xSa~anl = sa-is-sa-lllll, OP
A~agarta- ,
Bab. ~a-ga-ar-ta-a-a = {l~-~a-kar-ti-ya.
5. A sequence CVC is not necessarily equiphonemic to CV-VC in a
sequence CVC-CV or VC-CVC, .i.e. , CVC-CV or VC-CVC is not equal to
CV -vC-CV, and consequently in a sequence C, VC,-C, V or VC,-C, VC,' C,
docs nut necessari ly represcnt geminatiun. E.g., OP Nabunaita-, Bab.
Nabi:i-nulid = na-pu-ni-da-na and nap-pu-ni-da-na (but not *na-ap-pu-
ni-da-na), OP Patigrabana- = pat-ti-ik-re,b-ba-na (but nut *pal-ti-ik-ra-
ab-ba-nlt); or Garmapad.a- = I.ar-ma-p"t-la';, OP l~u ga naI.a- = I.u-uI.-
k . 'tn-na-ka-an; OP Haga-, Bah. ra-ga-a 1 = rak-ka-an (but not *ra-ak-ka-
an); and, for non-stops, OP paruzananam = p~tr-ru-~a-na-na-um and
ba-rll-~a-na-na- um.
Sporadic deviations occur in single itC111S. as fo llows:
1. OP voiced intervocalic cunsonants are spelled geminated, i,e.,
with a sequence of VC-CV , e.g., 01' Dubala- is written du-ib-ba-[Ia];
2. 01' voiceless inter vocalic consonants arc spelled single. iVIost
frequent is the absence of gemination in the OP endings -zati, -yati,
and -vati, written -za-ti-is, -ia-ti-is, -ma-ti-iS, etc.; OP intervocalic -t-
is often written V-ti-. Moreover, 01' intervocalic -p- is written sometimes
as CV-b,,-, -t- as CV-du-, CV-cla-, and -I.- '15 CV-I.a (with the sign Im.,
normally used for the sequence ka) or as CV-kar-, CV-bi n-.
Since in the vast majority of examples there is a covariation of graphic
gemination in Elamite with the feature of voicing in Old Persian words
![alldbll ch del' Oriclli ;llis lik, :\bl. I, Bel. ]f, Absc hn. I/~, Lfg . .. s
 .-\1.TKLEINA S1ATlSCI-lE SPRACHEN

in such a way t hat, as stated above, the distinction in the writing between
geminate and non-geminate consonants COlTcsponds to the distinction
between voiceless and voiccd consonants in Old P ersian, wc can assume
that in native Elamite words the difference in spelling likewise cOlTesponds
to a distinction of some feature, which mayor may not be that of phonemic
presence or absence of voice. Note again, in this connection, that nOI1-
stops also show non-random gemina tion.
There remains to be found a solution to gemination and the lack of it
in the same lexical item . Two hypotheses may be envisaged : 1. geminate
spellings are to be considered basic or normalized, ilnd single spellings
deviant or defective, as is often th e required solution in Akkadi an
for similar variations; 2. gemination and single spellings may be taken
as a graphic renderi ng of a condi tioned feature, such as length or stre"
in a particular syntactic environment. \IVhat t he nature of th is feature
was cannot be determined until the vucabulary, and hence the segmenting
of lilamite is better known.
The orthography of Akkadian words or loanwords occurring in ME
texts does not contradict the evidence gained from the transcription
of Old Persian words in RAE; Akkadian voiced stops in intervocalic
position are rendered by single consonants , as in the proper names:
Egih written e-ge-ih
Nirigu- written ni-ri-Ell
mt-ridftti written pi-it-ri-tu-ti
KUQUf written kll-ti-ir
KaQusman \vritten ku.l-ta-as-ma-all
Tab-mi~irsll written ta-ap-mi-~i -ir-sll
U!-;ar- written (l-~arar
P'-.i!,:im-Adad written ri-ki-im-diM
Lajfamal \Hitten la-~a/ ~a.l-ma-al/ar
gi!-;unu written ku-ku-llI1-nll-Um
Exanlplcs arc less nmllcrous for the writing of an Akkadian voiceless
stop; in all examples the spelling with clouble consonant corresponds not
only, as posited, to a voiceless stop in Akkadian, but also to a geminate
(or long) voiceless stop, the orthography being further incapable of
expressing both the voicelessness and the gemination (length) of the
.consonan t sim ul taneously.
Blt-Nappal)e written pi-it-na-aE-Ea-he-e
Sippar written si-iE-par
tuppi written tn-l1[,-£i, ti-i£-Ei

J
 THE ELAMlTE LANGUAGE II5

PuraHu written pu-ra-a!-1UTIl

Akkadu written ak-ka.t-tmn/du-unl
A pair of words in a recently excavated text from Choga Zambil
(TZ 46 and 47, Konig I3a, I3A, I3B) is in my opinion to be interpreted
as Akkadian, in spite of the fact that one of the pair violates the just
established spelling convention. The pertinent phrase is: (ill/linn) ki-
t1/.4-uuz,-ma a-alt- p[-ln,l-H:Jn-'IIla (also written: ku-d'/t.-ma a-ak pi-ll£.\-ma,
Iw-d·/t-w1t -'IIUl a-ak !Ji-M'T'l/:1Jl.-ma, lu:-d·/t-IlIJ/.-IJta a-alt- pi-dn-'lf.JJL-ma) , which
I translate as the "outer and inner wall"; "outer", ME "i/I",-d/l./tll.,-"'''''-
(-'ilia), cOJTesponds to Akkadian kidn, "outside"; "inner", ME Pi-dll/tn.,-
·nm-(-lIla) to Akkaclian bit", "inside" (lit. 'll<Juse'). We expect, for the first
word of the pair, the actually attested spelling, but for the second we
would expect a spelling with a double consonant, such as *P[-it-llf-1tm-JJlCt,
to render the Akkadian It/. However, since these words fonn an assonance,
rhyming in the vowels, it is not unusual to find them even more closely
rhymed-in this c'lSe,.rhyming in their intervocalic stops, too. An almost
identical example can be adduced from Hungarian; the pair of spatial
adverbs hiviit-bel-iit, meaning "outside and inside", have been made
more sinlilar in popular style by intruducing redundant alliteration in
their rhyming ending: Idviil-bJviil; the second member beviil has been
derived after the pattern oj the first Idviil , exactly as in Ebmite.
Obviously the situation described above is similar to the spelling
practice called "Sturtevant's law" in Hittite; Sturtevant's observations
were based on alternant spellings comparable to those in Elamite. In a
recent study, "A propos de ]a 'regIe de Sturtevan t' en hittite cuneiforme",
Lingu.istic Research i /l Beigi·lIl11. ed. Yvan Lebrun (1966), Pl'. 23-32, Louis
Deroy gives a model for this law, presenting the exanlple of the trans-
position of Sanskrit loan\vords into spoken and written Talnil.
In Tamil, there is morphophonemic and phonological opposition
between tense and lax; tense consonants arc realized as sinlple voiceless
stops initially and as geminate voiceless stops intervocalically; lax con-
sonants are realized as simple voiceless stops postnasally, and as simple
(usually voiced) fricatives intervocalically. The orthography renders
the phonetically simple consonants with single graphemes, the phonetic-
ally geminate consonants with double graphemes. In Sanskrit loanwords,
the Sanskrit intervocalic voiceless consonants are spelled double, the
same as the 1'a111il inter\,ocalic voiceless consonants, whereas the Sanskrit
initial and postnaS<ll (both voiced and voiceless) and the intervocalic
voiced consonants are spelled single. Thus only in intervocalic position
is the Sanskrit opposition voicecl vs. voiceless maintained .
rr6 ALTKLEINASIATISCl-IE SP RACHEN

The Tamil spelling of Sanskrit words provides a model for spelli ng

practices observable in ancient writte n la nguages, not only in Hittite
but, as I have tried to show above, in E lamite too, and, in the a bsence of
another model, it may be suggested that t he phonological system of
E lamite and possibly, but not necessarily, even its ph onetic realization,
lnig ht have been analogolls to that existing in contclnporary Tamil.
As far as I can see, these revisions to t he Chapter on phonology have
no bearing on, and do not necessitate a revision of. t he morphological
analysis.

ADDENDA

to I he A ppeJl(li:c
Since the recently discovered Choga Zambi l bricks TZ 46 and 47
(according to the edition of M. J. Steve, I rancia Antigua II [196~J 68fl.) ,
constitute the first Middle E lamite bilingual, I will here translate t he
lines which exis t in both a n Elam itc and an Akk adian version. A first
parallel t ransliteration was given in t he mentioned article of Steve, PI'.
72f.; a transliteration and trans lat ion was then given by M. Lanlbert,
Iranica Antiqua Ii (1965) 261. A transliteration and not es . but no trans-
lat ion, is also g iven in F. \ ,V. l":'onig, Die clamischen Kon igsinschri ften,
p. 66fl. . as Nos. 13A and 13B.
Translation of the Akkadian version :
he who will shoot an arruw against the wall of Siyankuk, make a breach
(in it), strip its brickwork, burn its [... J. or an enemy who will approach
and wage battle agains t the wa ll , let the wrath of Naprisa , Ins lIs(i)nak,
and Kiri risa of Siyankllk be upon him anll let his descendance not
prosper under the SUllo

R,It'Jl.H'il1g glossary:
Elnmilc AI.,kadinll
akka [sa] who
huh un duru wall
siyankllk Siyankuk Siyankuk
-111a ana to
sa of
kll-ta-a qanu arrow
ahar there
li nasaku throw
(akka linra sa inassukll who throws)

j
 TilE ELAMITE LANGUA GE II7

tul(l)in niksu breach

ahar there
ta nak5.su breach (v.)

E/am ilc _-1kkmi ian

upatipi libittasu its brickwork
tuha nasalju tear out
haltete
lumu qalu burn
a-ak u and
peti nakru enemy
sin(n)i le bC, approach
hu-EL ealtu battle
ahar there
tump" p.peslI do
ha-a t Ijalttt wrath
ri-ukku-rir ina IllU bbisu upon him
ta sakanu place
Nahun te ~a1llas Sun (god)
ir-sura-ra ina supai under
par zeru descendance
ani Ia not
kutll escru prosper

Nol es 10 Ih e Ic."feal equivalcllces

A_ L e:ticoll. New equ ivalences are: IlItlt lt/f = dii.nt 'wall', see Steve,
Iranica Antigua II 73; I.:II -Ia-a = qan·li. 'arrow' (lit. ' reed'); Iw-EL =
~(lltu 'bllttlc' (thi s latter eq uivalen ce is based on the reading sc-et-In (!)
instead of se-d-/l/. ( ?) given in the previous tra nsliterations; selill would
thus correspond to Akkadian ~c/Ill . a variant of ~altll , 'battle', well
attested in th e idiom ,<alta (~ eila) CpeSll 'to wage battle' , see CAD 16 (~)
p. 88a).
Other equivalences cannot be nan'owed down with such prec is ion ,
since they enter into idiomatic constructions, both in th e Akkadian and
in th e E lan1ite version. In the E lamitc v ersion, the verb ta 'place' is
used with !-1I1(I)i·1{. and hat ; only in the latter case is t he Akkadian trans-
lation salul'II" 'place' the eq uivalent of the Elamite verb; in t he fi rst case,
the Akkadian uses the etymological figure nil.:sn uaMs//. 'to breach a
breach'. Another idiom is El"mite l/'ll-EL .. . tmll!"' , translated by Ak-
kadian $alta epes" 'to wage battle' . In this case, it is the Akkadian
lIS ALTI';:LEINASIATISCI-IE SPH:\CI-IE~

expression that is idiomatic; and thus we aTC not permitted to equate

tumpn. with cpeslI; most likely. Inmpa expresses a lneaning in the general
range of 'to direct, lead', or the like. corresponding to Akkadian S'II/CS'U1'lf,
a meaning th at woule! more or less fit the other attestations of lump" ,
conveniently collec ted by Konig, op. cit., p. '333, ane! M. Llmbert,
Iranica Antiqua V 36 f.
E , Grammar. The grammar of the Elamite tex t, controll able now on
the Akkad ian cou nterpart, is as expected and as described in this gram-
mar. An excep tion is the form .~i-i !l-Hi, where we would expect an endin g
/r/ of the delocutive 'lIlimate singular, ill concord with the preceding
word pelir (pcfi-r); of th e two fragments on which this word is preserved,
one breaks off a fter s£-in-Jli, and it is possi ble that th e s ign -ir is to be
restored in the lac una; the oth er fragmcnt bas pc-ii-it Si-'Ill' , A uniq uc
exception to th e gender system oj t he nominal declension is found in th e
form ·,i-Im-fi-p i which COlTcsponds to Akkadian huitt" 'bri ck'. Elsewhere,
the word occurs as IIpat , and it has already heen suggested t hat its mean-
ing is 'brick' (see ~l. Lambert, RA XLIX [I 955]. _pl. H ere, the wore!
appears with an ending /p/ that is otherwise restricted to animate plural;
since in other texts "paf is qualified by 11115Sil), likewise with a /p/ ending
(a concord feature that in th e contexts in which the expression occurs 111USt
refer to "paf), we arc forced to the conclusion that the word for brick,
-upal , belongs in E lam ite to the class of animate nouns.

j
ABKORZUNGSVERZEICI-INIS, BIBLIOGRAPI-IISCHE NOTIZ UND
NOTIZ ZUR TRANSKRIPTION DER KEILSCI-IRIFT ZU DEN
BEITRAGEN KAMMENI-IUBER, NEUMANN UND I-IEUBECK
I. ABK URZUNGSVE I{ZElC HNlS

A. Aldtusn th'
n.a.O. am a ngcfiiilrtc li Drtc
AM. DOG AbllfllllUUlIg da D ell/schell Oriclll-GcsdlscJlflft - Berlin
Ahl. Abliltlv
"BoT A IIlwm ..-1 I'kwloji. llfii:csilU/Cbull/lilt/! Boga:l;(jy Tahldlcri, cd. h:. BALI\::\N,
ISlaniml I!J.18
Al1schn. Ausdlllili
Abtl. ..\bl ci!un g
ACME ..J IIIlnli I!dln PI/collr; Iii Filoso/ia c Ldfcrc del/a Ullivasj/li Sta/nl.: dj Mill/Ito
- Mailanli
Adj., adj . Aujck liv. adjcl(t ivisch
Ad"" adv. Adverb, adverbia l
iigypt. iigyplisch
A£O A I'dliv jiil' OricllfjorscllulIg • Berlin/Gra?
AGI "I,.,IIi"o Glottologico /tnfjUIlO· Florcnz
AWN AliI/ali tid [ still/fa Ulli1!asi/al'io OriCllfalc Ifi N fl/Joli. Rom
AlA ..Jm.:riCilII JOIlnW! of .·ll'cllluolngy - B;11t irnore
:\j Phil AII/crt'clln .lvI/fila/ of Plril%cy - Baltimore
A.JSLL Alllaicnll .Ivurllul of Scmilic LllIIg llrlg..:S III/Ii Liliera/u/'cs- Chicago
Ald(. Allkusati\'
akkad. alibJdisch
AI; l. Akliv
a lba .. . albal lisch
altassyr. altassrri5ch
altiud. altindisch
altper;;, a ltpcrsisch
allnt, ;\nalolisch
Ane. Anfaag
:\nl1l. AIIIII Crl(U11 t:
,-l uO, ,.J I/lI /c:clll O,,;cllllllill ' Rom
a.O. augcgcb cucn Orb
:\OA \V A lI:cigcr cl.:/' Uslerr.:ichisch":l1 A /md..: mie (IeI' W issellsclwjl":l/ • Wicn
Arch. Or, A/'ch i ll Orir: lll1illli· Pr:lg'
armen. al'lllCnisch
;\SAE AwUl/.:s If// Sa:!icc' (k~ Alllif/llifJs d'/~g)',,/e . Kairo
AT ,-llIe ,~ Tes /(llI1m!
AU s, So~nn:R
Al1fl. Auflar,;c
awest. awcs tiscJ l

BAI.1',\:-:,I'cmal
Ldfao/ King
AII !IIII-Hjrbi Ldl.:1' of Killg Alllfm-H j/'1Jj oj Mallia 10 Killg W(lrs/mllllt of /{(/"ish,
Au], ara 195;
ObservlItiollS Obs..:n mliol/ s olllhcC/:roIlO/og ictll Prob/..:ms oj tile J{iil'lllll A-lill is, Al1i;:ara 1955
halt. ba lHsch
i3:\SOR BII!ldill oj/llr: ..J mericlIlI Schnn l oj Orj":l1/a/ Researc/t - New Ha\'cn
J31l Bczzcllbcr gcrs Deilfli'Re - Gotlingen
BCH DlIlldil1 de Corres/wl/dm!c!: l/dlb liljllc - AUten/Pari s
Bu. I3:ll\d
Br::ClITEL, -sl:- I3 r.C ll1'l::L, George, Hi/tilc J-crfls ill -.'i ll-, Ann Arbor, i\lichig::t.n 1!]36
Bcih. I3cih cit
 ALTKLEINASIATISCHE SPR.ACHEN

EdldCII (ziticrt nach l~aszil,eln, SaYI) Tilt!' Tarilb I';:umus u . Ankara

B EN\"EN IS1'E, Emile
Hcl Hillile ct ll11iocllropJcll , Paris 196z
Origines Origilles dc fa [ol'lIIal ioll des IWIII S ell Jlllfo·El/rop~:C/!, Paris 1935
bcs. besollders
Bib!. Bibliographic
BiDr Bibliotl:eclI Oriclltalis • Leidcll
Do un\'cruiicntlichlc Bogazl(oy· Te"te (Istanbul)
BOR Thc lJabylvllitll' fwd Orienlal R ecord.
B05sllrn', Helmut Th.
Hl';:S Ell! ItdlIilisclies /';ulligss iq;d, Berlin I!H.I
BoSt. Bogltw;/iiii·SluiliclI - Leipzig
DaTU FORRER, Emil, Dic Bog'/{r;;kIiJ'·TL·,I'/I~ ill Umsclmf/ , WVDOG .p, 4Z, Lcipzig
19zz· z6
DphW Berlillcr philologisc1w WoellclI.I'c/u'ijt· Berlin
BSL Bulle/ill dc III Sociite de LilZguistiqllc de Paris· Paris
DzN B.:i/riig.: :ur Namc,,[or,~cllIlJIg • Heidelberg
b z\\' . bezicliungs\\·cisc
c. commullc
ca. circa
CAD Tlt e. ,·Jssyr illJ/ DiciiolltlrY oj Ihe Oricn i ll t Ill stitute. oj ClJicngo . Chicago}
Ghickstadt 1956 if.
Cat. s. L\ltaCIlE
TEN C,\"r!! S. s. H OUWINII: TEN CATE
d. conier
CIH s. i\ I ESSEii.SCHMIOT
ClllssQmfrt 1'h.: C/lissicnl QI/lIrlcrlJ'
camlll. COPlmUll1!
CO:HEJ:AU, Georges
EBI-! Elelllcl1ls de bibliogmphi.: hilti/e, Paris J9z:
SEBH SlIjJplbu':lI( nu:r ilelllclIls de bibliof!.rapldl! hiltitl!, Paris 19Zj
Cor. fillg . Corol/II lillguislicrt, Fcstschrift F. SOMMER, Wiesbadc.n 1955

clnss, dassclbc
Dat.,dat. Dativ, dativisch
J)m~mL, SL 5f/l/lcri ,'dlcs LexilwlI, herausgcgcbctl von P. DEI MEt.., :\nton, Rom
d.h. das hdl3t
d,L dilS ist
Diss, Dissertation
DLL s. LAROCHE
DLZ lJeu/sche Litallflll':d/llllli - Berlin
dt. dentsch
Our. Durativ(um j
Dur.·Dis tr, Dumtiv·Distrilml.iv(umj
D li pi. Duplilm t

cd. edidit
EN E igcllname
cnldi t. cnklitisch
crw. cr \\'eitcr t
etc. ct cclera
ctrusk etruskisch
cvll. c\·cntucll

r. fentininulIl
r. folgendc
fntis!;. falisldsch
fa se. iascicnlc (Faszikcl)
Fern., fcm(in). Fcmininum, fcminiu1!!ll, fcminin(i sch)
If. fol gendc
 ABKVRZUNGSVERZEICHNIS 549

FFc F.:slscl:rif/ Johan nes FRIEOJHCII ZIIIIl 65. Geburtstag, H e idelberg 1959
FHG Frug1Jl':ll ls hiUit.:s tI.: G':IICU.:, eLi. E. L,\ItOCIIE, RA 45 (1951) 131-138,
I8.j-I!H; .\ 6 (195::) ·~:: -50
FCkHist s. JAC OB Y
FitIEDIUCII, Johannes
E"I:ijjerllll gsgescll. EIl/:ifjct/l1Igsg.:schic1tf( iI,'r I/cllIilisch':ll Hi.:rogll.phclISclIrifl, Die Welt als
Geschich tc, Beihcfl ) , St u ltgar t 1939
HE [-[.:lllitischc.' ElOI!~l!/arbllclJ I, I, Auf!. 19-10, ::. Ann. 1960, Heidelberg
HG Die Hclh itischCli Ges,:t:t, Leidcn Ig59
HW Hdhitisc h.:s WiJr/abu ch . Heidelberg Ig:'i::-5.~
H W I., ::., 3. Erg. llcthifiscll.:s !ViJrlcrimeil 1. Ergiill :'lI 11gsltejt 1957. ::. Ergiill:'I/JlCS/li:j/. 1961,
3. Ergtill:.mlgsl!.:jl 1966, Heidelberg
Vutr. 5/aafsvo!/'lriige des t ra!ti·R.:ic!Jes in !lethit:seh>.!r 5prnelJ.: I, II, i\IV:\eG 31
(lg.:::Ci), 3.1-1 (Ig30), Leip:dg
FRISK. Hjulmur
Gri.:eh. &IYIII . Wb . Griull;sch.:s ctym% giscl/l:s JiTar/abut!: , Hcidelbers 1954- ff.
FS Fcstschriit
Fu r< Forse/JUI/ge" wui Forlse/l ritt~ - Berlin
Fut. Futur(tIIo)

G.:ti': lrli sclJdjl BoSSmtT A /lado/u tl ra,~tjrlllal(lri (j KF) Bd. J I. t - .:::, Jstanbul 1965
Gnu, ignace J.
HH Hillile Hi,;rog /yplls I-Ill , Chica go 193r , 1935, 19-1::
HI·IM HiIlil.: I-li.:roglypllic MOll lllI/CIIts, OIP ·~5, Chicago 1939
Gen. Gcnitiv
german. gcrma!lisch
GGA Gvllillgisclle G.:i.·/o'I.: .-i1l:.cig.:11 - Giitlingl!!1
Gf.: s. i1IERIGGI
GN Giitte m;une
GOET ZI.:: (GOTZE), Albrecht
:\?l1 Die AIllIfI/CII des MIIJ'.Wis, i\IVf\eG 38 , Leipzi g 1933
J}(lll. [lalll/W H. :\IVAeG '::: 9.1 , Leipzig 19::5
M at/d. Mat/tillle(IU(IS, j\l VAeG 3~.I, Leipzig 19.:::8
NBr N':lIc Bf//cllstiickc :.11111 gropc!!. Text tl.:s [It/lIl/si/iS !Iud d.:u Parnlldlc:r;/.:n .
I\IV.A eG 3.1.:: , Leipzig 1930
GOI.::TZE-PIWERSEN, i\IS A. GOieT ZI: - H. PED ERsrw, Mudili§ Spmchlii/lllllmc, l';:openhagell 1934
GOET ZE -STURTEVANT,
TI/JU/. A. GOETZ E - E. 1-1. STURTEVANT, Tlte liilli/.: Rifunl oj TllfllUl wi. New
Haven 1938
got. gotisch
griech. griechisch
GUTitROOCK, Han s Gustav
SEo Siegel aus Boii,lI:.kiiy, AIO Beiheft 5. 7, Berlin 19.10, 19.;.:::

HAB s. SmIMEH
hatt. llilttisch (protohattisch)
fla/t. s. GOETZE
Hdb. Or. l-lmuibllcll !fer OrienfaUsl;k, Ll!iden tgs:: fi.
heth. llethi tisch
heth.-luw. hetllitisch·luwisch
HEUDECI~, Alfred
L),i1ia/la Lydinkli, Ulllersuclumgr.n :u 5ch,,!I, 5Pracl/C m/fl Gallet/mil/an (ier L-J'dcr,
Erlanger Forschungen, Reihe A: Geisteswissenscbnftcn, Band 9. Erlangen
1959
HG s. FUIEDitICII; 5_ STURTEVAST
HH s. GELD
HH l s. L,\Rocm:
I-IBM s. GELD
hier.-Juw. hierogl },phenluwiscil
11.-lllw. hierogl ypIlen Iu wiseh
55 0 ALTKLEI NASI ATISCHE SPRACHEN

Homcr. -Gricc h. H 0 mcri sci! -G ricc! Lisch

I·loUWIr.'K TEN C,\T~, Ph. H. J. TiI~ Llm'i(lll Po/mill/ioll Gro!l/J.~ (If L~}'cili {Iud Cilicia Aspem tit//,-
jug IlIC I-!d/~llis!ic Period, Lcidcn 1961
l·llwz:,;Y, Bcdfich (HrWZNY, Friedrich)
IHH L.:s illscnjJ/i(l/lS hillfte::; lric5/'oglypln"qlles 1-111, PrO'lg 1.933-37
SH Die SPracllC del" J·Jdlril':l", l3aSt. 1-:: , Leipzig 19 17
hrsg. hcr;}usgcgcbcll
HT [Jill;/,; T exis iI/lite: CllIwjorm Clwracler /rolll Tabl.:t s ill flu: nrifish lllU U IIIII,
London 19::0
hurr. h urrisch (churrisch, churritisch)
HW s. FruEDuICH

ibid. ibidcm
180T .' stu lI/JIII o·l rli~oloji M{i:duilld~ bull/111m Bugn:/liJj' Tabldlai, Istanbu l
J9H if.
idg. indogermallisch
Idg.Jb. illtiogulIl(!lZiscilc s .llIlIr/mc" - Slr.. Dburg/Bcrlin
i.e. id cst
IF IlIIlor;crllluIlisclte Fu,.schllllU~'1l . Berlin
lmpcr. fmperaU"
Illdci. I lldefinitmn
Indil;. Indii<ati"
r1If. luJinitiv
I nstr. Ins trumcll lal
In terr. III tcrroga ti VIl!! 1
intrilIls. ill transi ti \'
ita!. it alisch
HalicH. italienisch
I lcr. Itcrativ

JA jOllrnal _·ls/nlil/llc - Paris

J ,\CODY, Fcli x
FGrHist lJi.~ Fmgm clI!': (Icr gria hisclull Hi,~·lor ili,;r, Bcrliu 19::3 iL, Lciden 1940 ff.
JAOS .lollrnal uf till; o·jm.:riC(/ 1l Oric ll/n l Soddy ~ Baltimore
J CS '/OIIf/lill of CUllcljon" Siudies - NclV j·la vc!l
Jh . Jhd . Jahrhulldert
J l..::r .I (lhr/)J(cll i ii/" klei 11(I.~inli.~c h~ Forsclllmr; - ll eidclbcrgJ Istallbu I
JRAS ./ollnml ()f Ih.: Royal .·l sl((lie SociC/y - Loudon
Jt. Jallrtallsclld

KA LI ~KA, Erns t
TL Till/Ii '-yei{/ ~ Lil/glf{/ Lycilf COlIscri/JJi Vo l. J dcr TAM, Wicn 190{
T'-\~I Ti,u/i. A s i(r~ Mil/oris, W iell 190t fi.
KA:\IMEt-;"IIUllER, :\nnclics
HijJJJ. Irdll . l-fl)pofogiil 1I.:11Ii!ica, Wicsb adclL 19fiI
I,ar. l;ari sch
1\80 l\'~ilsch/"ifllcxl~ {11/ .~ !Jogha:!;Oi - Lcipzi g/Bcrlill (Lei Zilalen stcts 1"::130
mitangef iihrt)
r..::JF !\old'lflsillf isc.!le ForsclwlIg.:iI, \Vcimar 19:::703°
!c. -IU\\'. I,eilschrii t · Iu wisch
K ltoNASSER, H cinz
E HS EI.I·lIIolo:;le th'r hdlriliscllw S/INlcI/c. Dum! I . Wiesbadcn 1966
VLFH Vcrgh'icl/CIulc LIIIII- IIml FOrlJl~1I1dlrc tics H.:I!ti(i.~eltc lI. H e idclberg 1956
KUB J\ci/schrijlu rkuwiclI fill S I1ngl/fl:kiii - Berlin (bci Zit.. tcn oft n ur B;mdall-
gabe ill r6rnischCll Zah lc n)
[(u/! . Fc/"tmg ,IT,,r§ilis II. mit Kllpa n ta - (I KA L usw; FUI!':DRICII , , Terlr. t 95 ff.
KURYI.OWICZ, JCf'.r
A tJo/JluJIIic L'A/!opflOlli{' ell [ndo -B 1/m/l,!e", Wrocbw 19S6
KZ Z.::"f.~c"ri/t /iiI" Ve:rglcichcwfc S/Jmchfonclllmg, begrunrlct von :\. I';: ulIt; •
Gol tin gclI
 ABKU RZU NGSVERZEICH NIS 55 I
L Nr. LA ROCHE, HH I, Zitat n ~u::h NUIHmcru
Lal/g. L ang//age • Baltimore
LA noel''' , Emmanuel
,al. Catalog ue des h'xle" lJillite ,' , l~ i-I A 58·Go, fi:::!, 19 SG' SB
DLL D iet iollllllire de [a fill lg" , [ollvife, Paris 1959
HH I Le~' /-/ii r og/}'ph.:s Hillifcs , Premii;re Partie : l'':critlll"c Paris 11)60
Ollom . RcclfI: j[ (['ollomnsfiqll':: liiWh' , P aris 195::
lat. l ate i n i ~ch
latein. latcin isch
I.e. loco ci tato
U S· Licferung
Liei . Lidcruug
Li t. Literat ur
lit. lilauisch
LolL Lokali\'
luw. luwi;;ch
Iyd . Ir J isch
L"dia/m s . i-I EUflE CI;
JyJi. l yldsc h

ID. JIlilsculi n\llu, masli:ulin

lIlasc. , Mask. , masl;: . Itiasculi nulII, Masl, ulinum , In as kulin{isch)
lII.a.\\'. mi t amle rcn \\;or fcn
i\ IDOG :l!ilfi.'illwgcH t/a D~'lf lsc " c lI OricJlI -GcscllsclU/jl - Berli n
m. E. lllcim!s Erachtcns
i\l ed. :'\[cd ium
M Clfll . Mcddcldsa
i\ IEILI.ET, An toine
lllfr . I Jl/frod llCtiOIl Ii ramie compafllt iv.: des III1:gll'-:s illllo'C/Iro!'CCI/J/cs, 8. Auil.
bearhcitet YOIl B E!'v"!' lsnc , Paris 1937
Ma. Jl/.:JlllI gCS
i\IE!lI GQ t, Piero
D a;f . L(/ D~'cl ill (/ :i(JIIC lid ticio, R cw/ico lli i Ildln classc Iii sciclI:c lIlomli, Mo richc,
.: fif%gie/I<" Iidill R':lI /': .,Jecad.:mill .\'II:iU/mic {h'i Lilla i , Ser. V" \'01. IV
(11)::: 8) ,lIoff.
Gl.: Hicro;;JYI) hisc h - h<'lh ifisclic.~ GIOSSIII', z\\'c ilc vi.illi ::; u!n gcarbeitcte Aufbge ,
WiCSU;H]CIl 11)6:::!
i\IE 'i"E II SC l lm Dl", Leopo ld
CU I CorptI .~ I lIscripliu Illl m I1.-tl i iiCllrJlm, l\I VA G, Lcip7,ig 1900- 1906
1\11 0 tlfilfd/lll/ gt:1l {I.:s i I/ st i lI/Is jiir Or;cllijor schlllfg - Berlin
i\[S s. GO ETZE. ' PEDEH >:Er,
i\15L Jl1 ':lIIoir.:.~
de /11 Soci'!/,: ric Lillg ll is liqu ,: • Paris
1\155 Jl1iillChcl1u SllIdiell :IIr Spmc/l1t,js.~ '1/!,\·c/mf{· i\liinchell
i\ I VAG Millci/llll g':l1 nIT I -onl(fasjrl/ isc/I':II G.:sdlsc1mfl - Lei pzig
i\l V:\eG M iffcil//II g':JI (fa l ·orll.:nuillliscll-_,I.:gJ'/JlischCII Gcscll.~cl/(fji - Leip zig
Ma iM. s, GOEH E

N. Ko rnina\i\'
n. ne u trum
N F.. U~IA~N, G iinte r
Weilerlcbm U llfe rsuc/twlgc lI ::11111 )Jlci fcrlcb':11 hdlrili.~chcJl 111/11 IlIIi'i scilell S/Iff/C/tglltcS
ill IIdlcllis/ i.\·c/i.:r IIlId rii lll isrher Zdf , Wiesbaden II)Gr
Henlr. !lcu tn!!Il
K f. Nell e Folge
NOIII. Komin aliv
N5 No \'a Series, Neue Sed c
ntr. ncutrufl l, neu tral
o oil. od l'r ;i1u di ch
ObI. Obliquus
OIP Ori':lIll1 i I " Stilllt.: Publicatio ll s - Chk:lgO
55 2 .UTIU-EI NASIATISCHE SPRACHEN

O LZ Or ic,,{{dislisc/u Litcrntm':citllug' Leipzig/Berlin

O~ Qrt s[J alTIC
0, NS Ori<1J1/Hlifl, Nova Series - Rom
os lm -umbr . osl;o-umbrisch
OTTE~ , Heinr ich
LTU Luvischc Text,; in Vm sc},rif!, Berlin IlJ 53
LUTI. ZI/ r gHlIIJII!(liilw.lisc/UII mui lc.dlm liscllcn n~'s/illlll1l/J1g d.:s Luvisc/wl!,
Ber lin 1953
lI lC K J1I}'IIIr:11 I10111 Golt,; f(/lII/(/rbi, NCII': Fragmen t.:, Berli n 1950
TR Hclhitischc To/c uri/lll1le, Berlin 1958
p. pagina
pal. palaisch
Par., par. Parallcle, p:lr:lllel
Part. Partizip
Pass. Passiv
PJ3R Bdfrtl r;e ; llr GI~scll ichtc der lh' utsclll:n SprnclllJ. mill LWaafur. hrsg-. von
H. P.\UI. und W. BitAUt:Ic · Halle
P£ Ol.mSE:'; . Holger
flitt . Hitfilisch lind die fll/derl: 1l i/l(loe !l/'Op{i'isch~'1I SpraclllJII, Kopcnhagcll 1!J38
Lul-' Lykiscll IIIl1l Hitfitiscll, Kopen ha gcn I~HS ( = z. Auf!. 19.19)
M.!I. Mt!lllIIges lil/ B flislique,~ o fic r ts;\ i\l. Holger PEDERSES , I';:openha scn 19 37
Pers. Person
Pcrs.-Pron. Pcrsoil aipronolllc il
Pl. , r im. Plural
PN Pcrsoncnna mc
POIWIISY, Julius
l dg. dYIII . Wh. IlIIlogcr mnl! l\r:lles dy/llolQ!;ische.~ JI·ii rferbucfl, Bern 1951 if.
POIl 7.IG, Walte r
G/itd.:nlllli Di.: Glia lenllll; des i miagamall;scillJ lt Spmchgebid s, Heidelberg 195.1
Poss. ·Pron. Possessi\-prOIIOl licll
Priis. Priisens
Prflt. PriilcrituT11
prcllLl . prc uOisch
Pran. Prolloille ll
Pr:;o Priiscns
Prt. Pr[ltcri tunt
PRU IV I.e Pa/nis Royal d'Vgndl IV, Paris !9Sfi
PSBA Proce.'fiillg_<; (If the Society of Bibliwl A rclmeology - London

QI G Quadcmi rid Isfilufo d; Gloflologirr • Bologna

RA RCVI/c fl'.-hsyriologi e ct Ii'.-Irc/mcvlog i ,; Oriel/tnl.: · Paris

RE P ,\U I. y·\V ISSO WA. Rcn/j:ll cy c!oPtlCdi,; dcr Clflss;sclJeli .-Jlfutll mswi,o;sClI ·
sclurft . Stultgart
Rel.·Pran. Reiativpronolllcn
resp. respective
Rez. Rezcnsion
RGG Rdision in Gt1schichl.: If/ld G.:geli'n rt, 3. Auf!., Stuttga rt 1957 ii.
RH A Ri1vue hiffitt d asialliqul! (ziti crt nach .Fasi.ikeln) . Paris
RfL I~ClldicOilli dd [sli/u/o Lombardo· :\Iailand
RLV EDERT5 Refllk'l:ikvlI lI.:r I( vrg.:sclu'ch!c , Berlin I9~- I · 3~
Rosrm lmA:-;z. Bern hard
Dei/l. Dei/riige ::m' £rJo n cll1lllr; des Luvi.H:llt1l1, Wiesba dcn I95~

,. siehe
S. Seitc
530 s _ GOTEltUOC I':
>c. scilicet
SCIDl ola:I. , Hartmut
l\ullrlrgt'sclJ. (I. AD 1\/Iltll rgl!sch iclIIC lies ..111m Oriwl, Stuttgart 1961
 ABKURZUNGSVERZEICHNIS 553
SCIIW YZIW, Eduard
lJ.:I.::' j)ialcc!orum GmccllT/l/ll CXlllllpl1l c/J igrapllicil pOliorn, Leipzig 1 9 ~ 3
Sg. S ingular
SGD I COI. LIT Z, 1·lcr ma n n u n d B£CII TE L , F riedrich, Sfllllml:mg (Ia gricc1lisc llen
Ditr!ckf·!I/sehrijtcu, Gotli ugcll 18 B.~ ft
Sing. Singular
~L s. DEl.\WI.
slaw. slawiscll
5.0. s ichc ohelL
SO DEN, Wolfram yon
ABw ,·/ klu/(f iselt cs fl aw{;;'iirlaull eh , Wiesba dc n 1959 ff.
SOAW Sif;l/l/ gsbcriclllc dcr ()slcrTeie!t i.~e lrjlll ,-!hadc mjc I/r;r W issel/sellnjlcl/ - Wien
sog . sogcnanllt
SO~DIER, Fe rdin and
AU Dic A [lbi;a:lli - Uri."lIl1dc/l, ilHln chcn I93~
HuH HclI/i/a /Illa Hdltilisch, Stultgart 1947
SOht!>lEll, F. - FA I. I(EJ-;S TE I N, Adam
HAB Dic hdhiliscll-lIkkmiisc/te Oilil/gll'; ti,;s f/ultllsili l. (LtlUfl rJm I l.) , iltiinchetl
193 8
Sr· Sp alte
SPA\\, Sit:;I/1/ ~.'ibcrichh· del" Prcu j] i sc/:clI .·I k(l(/clllic dCl" lI' i ssc lIsc/mjtclI , Phil.-hisL
j\ lasse - Berlin
SI'E ISEn, .Ephraim A.
IlI/r. lllirod/l cl i ollio Hurr inll, Net,\" l·l avcn 19.P:
SL S.lallu lI , S liilllllle
S T oLTEsnElla, Hans L.
Tamil. Die t crmili ~c1ljl Sprnclie tl'/:iCIIS, Le \"crlmsctl 1955
STU ltTEV,\!'<T, Edgar H .
HG (P) ...1 CO II/pam/ju,; Grall/llln,- oj 1/1,; 11ill;/,; Lall glla ge , I. :\ u fl. 193] , _. Aui!'
Bd. I 1951, New J-Iavell
STURTEV ANT, E.H. - BECHTEL, George
Chrest. .-I H il/if,; Ch r ,;sl oll/olllJ', Phi ladelphia 1935
s.u . siehe Ull tCIt
S ub j. S ub jcl\t
S ubst., subst. SlJb ~l:1 tLli\', substanti\"isch
Slllllcr. sumeI'isch
SUKDWALL, J o hanlles
EN Dj,; cillltdllliscltc n Nalll':l1 riC/" Lyk icr J, cbs / .:inem "cr:;dclllli .~ kleill-
a si(/I i.~chcr N (IJI/CI/sstli mm,;, Klio, I I. Bcihcft, Lcip:>:ig 1913
S. \'_ sub voce, IlIIle r dem S tichwo r t
TAM S. l-i: AI.H"': ,\
TAPA Tr(lll .wclioll s oj /iI ,; .-Imcr icall Philolog;w/ ..Jssoc ia /i oll - )'lidcllctown
TL s. K ,\L I N I\:'\
toe har. tochadsch
TPhilS Tmll.mcl ioJls (.j lile Philologietll Soeiely - London
trans. [r<tllsiti \'
TSUA TmIWl ctiO/l .~ of Il:c Socidy of /l ibliml .-IrclUl.:ology - London
TllmlsEs, Vi.lhcl m TllmI SE :-I, V., E(!fdc.~ I rci': III1CS . De l Kgl. Dans l\(! Videnslmher ues Sclsl;abs
Forha l1dli uge r, Kopen h;lgen 1899. Nr I (= Satnlcde Afh andl in gcr Til
S. 355 fl., l';:opcnhagclI t 9::! ~)
liirk tlirldsch
1'111111. s. GOETZE - S TURTEV'\ ~T
u. Ulld
u.a. Im le r ;mclcrem; li nd a n dcre(s)
u.fl. und ;ilmlich{cs)
u.a.m. und anderes mchr
\l ,0. und oft
u.o. und otler
urspr. urspriins lich
55+ ALTl(LE I NASIAT ISCHE SP RACHEN

II SW. und 50 weiler

\l.v.a, und \'icl c(s) a nuerc

VAT 1lI1 VCfuficntlidilC Bogadioy-Tcxtc (Berlin )

V B oT " .:Tstn:ut,; ilogl/{/:kuy- T .:xt.:, cd . A lbrech t GO!::"'ZE, :\larb urg/ L:l.!lII 19 30
\', Chr. \'or Christi Gcburt
Verf. Verf;!5scr(i ll )
vg l. \'crgleichc
VN Vfilkcrll:JlllC
\"0 1. \'O IU III CU , Band
Vor\\'. \;or wor 1
'V.\ LIH, -Ho F)U:-;l',
Lilt,;;/!. dYIII. Wh . L (/I,;illis cll<' ,~ ,;fymologisc".:.~ lriJ ri.:rim ch, \'011 A. \VAI.D~: ; 3. nc ubca r\)eilc lc
Aufl age von j . B. HOF)!A~!;, Hciclclbcrg 1935 ff.
\\'0 Die WeU Ik~ Ori';l1ts, Giitti ngc lI
WVDOG IV issel/sciUljl/ ir.lle " ,;rij/f':lIt1icliulIg.:n dcr DClltschw Ol'icllf·Gc ... ,-llscflrljr
Leipzig/Bcrli !!
wz t..;:", W iola Z~' itsc" r ift jlir ,/i.:. J\ulllic Ih's Morgell /nmf.:s . \Viell
Z:\ (:-J F) Zdfschrijl jii r .·I s.<; ),r/% g/I: !I ud :.- a;f'fll llitC G.:bidf· (Ne ue Fo!ge) - Lc ip1.i;,;/
Berlin
7. .13. Beispiel
Z ll ll1
ZD ~I G Z.:ilsrh rift II,,' J)w lsdl':l1 Mm'g,:nlii"lldischm G.:s.: /fsrlllljl - Lcipzi::;/\Vic!>ha uc ll
z.T. ZlI!ll T ei!
Zischr. Zcit~c h ri it
.. /a, .. _/h (U5W.) (m it \,orallsg;;l .emlcr a raLisr:hcr Za ~II ): IIIJ\'croffcll llich lc Bogazl;or-Tcxtc
(Auka ra)

_. 13 1BLlOG RAPHI SC II E i\'OTIZ

\·Iall isch: wichl igs te l.il crai ur s. S . .]38 iL, ~ 5.

!'!<:lhi t isch: s. S. I31 iL , § 0.
Hc t hit isch- Luwisch: 5. S. z.18 i., Z7/) , 31.; L, §§ :!S , 39. .lli
H icrog ly phclllu wisch: 5. S. lS I , fL, §§ IUC, 'I, L!.
Luwi ~ dl: !>. S. '-13 iL, §~ .
L j'di ~ ch ; s. S .. 10 1 if. , ~ .1.
J.y kisch: s. S. JGfi, ~ ., .
Pa laisch : s. S. ,-p ii., § 7.

3. ZU I=:. TR :\!\S J\IH PT I ON DE I ~ I';: EILSC HRIFT

Die YOII d CI! l-i c l itil c rH uClllill.l c a l(kildischc '';:e il sch riit- ihrcrscils e ine Erfi udu ng der S UlUcrcr l ) -
is t t: iu c S illlc li sc hrifl (CllCIlSO wic die hcth iti sc hc Hicroglyp h cli seh rift; 5.1.1 5 ff. , s§ rooTS). NcLCI1
Silhcm:c ichc n \'011 1 T~'pus !I, PII , bil, {lNb, paN/! vc rwC!It!e t s ir: l10cb SUIlICrisd lC \\'or tzeichc ll (ldco-
grallll llc) uml ~l l d(a d i sc h c \\fLir tcr (A ldw ri og rarILTl w); Ict zlt.:rc sind wic di c h Clh itisehc n (pa\;.li sc hcll ,
lu \\" i ~c h err) \\'ijrtcr syllnhisch geschricbe n. Z. B. I;antl s tatt he lh. i.~ - !m-tl -fl .{ "H err" slIIllcriscli EN
Qucr a ld.adisch I1h'- L U JI geschr ipbe n wcrdcn. I n dcr Uurschri fl 1I1ller;;chcidcn wi!' Idcogr,1l11H1c
d urch ~ I a j u" kcl n und :\ldGldogra rn mc uurch Imr"i\'C :\Iaj\ls kclll \'on den heth il isch cu (pa lni;;cilclr,
lu\\'isc hcn) Wijrtcra, die wir dureh k ursi\"c iI)in llsi;clu wip.rif'rJ,;cb cll.
AuLlerut.! ll1 hClliit ;:l dic Keilsc hr ifl cine t>:eihc \'011 Lcschilfcn, die ill d er Tra ll s\;rip t ioll hoch
gc ~ t c i lt In:rdcll, weil sic rddd. mit gcsprol.!hcn wurdcll. E;; hallllcit siell UllI Dc tcnninatil'c, dils hcilH
S\l lll crisciLc \\'nrtzcichCll w ic UI~U "Stadt", GIS "H o\z" ll;;\\' ., dic Ill CiStcll S \'ora1l5gc;;elzl die
n c d c ll h IlJ ~;;:;;p h ;irc cines \Vortcs all zd~ c ll ; iCrLIcr \I tH 5t1l Hcrisclie Plu ralkcnnzeir:h cn wic l'o IES,
1:11.:\ (1:1:\) 1!:i\L ( Ilach~cslcllt) uml sch lid ll ich lIoch IIlIl a" kndis .... hc pholle tischc l';:o mplclllPu lC, d ie
<!ra p hisch ZUlli .-\usd ruclt gclrrachl II"CrriclI, obgleich !>ic Hit rlie h ct h iiisc!Jc I.esllll g: des Wortcs
\,ci ncrlei Bcdcul ll llg ha lrcll. Z. B. winl !>tat! het h. fi-ri'lIi "cle m Goltc" ( Lc;; nng .~illII i ) mcistcns
D I NG II>: I..IM_H i gcsch ricb cn . LIM zcig t all, daLl s ieh hi llter s llmeri sch OINGrR dns a ld;ad isc hc

I) \ r~d. Adam FA I.h:l:SST E I S, H ,lb. Or. A I!I. I , 11({. _, _·Jbsclm. r /z , Lfg. J: /)11 .• 51 I11 r.:risclu:
(1959 ) 6- 1 3.
 ZUR TRANSKHIPTlO N 555

[LIM (Ge niti\,) "Gat l" \'crbirgl. Ge llligc1Jd ge1>c nnwicilllcl wiire das Idcogramm allenlings
bereils clurch cia" hethitische pliouetiscile I';:omplelllent -IIi, uell Ausga ng des heth. \\tortes.
Die im folgcllden gehoicnc Umschriit del" I\eibcilrift ist c ine Transliteration de:; Schriftbildes,
!lietlt eille Transkriptioll ge!JIiiLI clem hethitischen (palaischen, lu\\'ischen) Ll\Its tanu. \Vir '\\·.!s"en
zwar z.B., daB im Hc1hitischcn (lIsw.) s- halti ;,:e Silbcnzcichell den Lalltwert s bezeichnen, si!l(i abcr
noel! liing51 nicht ill dcr Lagc, aBc Sehreibllngen in die \\'irldiche Lautgestall der geIl<lIlIl ten Sprachcll
umzuset'l.cn (Beitrag:) §~ 15, 16; lJdfmg G §~ i-lO), 50 uail im Augenblick nur cine eilligenna llen
IWllsequente Transliteration mi.iglieh ist. \vo Z1lsiit'l.liclie :\ussagcn Hber dell LJUtst anJ \'OIlILv1ell
sind, wird die Aussprache in ecldgen I\lammern beigehigt.
\ Veitere Zeicllenbeueutungen:
Wiihrcnd wir bei der Trausiiteratioll lier Keilschrift dnrch i und tl lWllsonantisc.lies i unu II he-
zcichncn (deutsche Umschriil), erschc iucn daWr in der ulllschritt cler hethiti"cilen Hiero;,;lyphell-
sehrifl i unt! :iJ. Bei I;eilschriftlicheu Eigc!Lualllen '\I'ie Ar::II1,.'II, TlId[ifl/iYII vCf\\'endcn wir glcieh-
bedculcndes J', til (englische und franzlisische Umschrif1).
Ec\,ige I';:lammern ularkieren T cx tliickcn mit erg~iIlztcl[l Text oder einer Anzahl von 0 = nltlt ~
ma(\lichc Zahl der vcrlorcn gc;,;angenell Zeichcn. x aullcrhalb von ed:igen 1';:lalll111Cm sichi fiir
unlescrl ichc, bcsch;idigle Zeichen. Runde KlamlILertL in der Obersetzung c llthallen \·c rclcutlichendc
Dbersetzllngszllsatze. Dnppeltc ccldge Klammern ( [[ J] ) JUarldcrcll iclderhaftc Tcxtzus:ltzc, die
zu t.ilgcn sind, spitze l\lanunern « » Ilotwcnui ge Erg<1 11z1!ll ;,;en von Zeichcn, die del' Schreiber
verschclLtlich ausgebssen hat.
Alis HaumgrUlJdcn legcll wir hier im allgellLcincn nicht die "broad transcrip1ion." mit allen
Schrcibvariantcn vor, s611dern !Jchelism:illig die "bound transcription". Schrcibullge ll wic i':~ [iii.li
"Herr" zeigen dabci an, daO syllabisch i.~-!J(! -II-II .\; mit Plclleschreibun;,; vorlicg1; \'gl. uoch B..:ilrag 3
§ I5.:! I).
Urn Un!darhcitcll 7.U vCrincidell, lilltcrscheidcn wir kOllscqucnL zwischen syl1nbischcn Sr.h rei-
bun;,;en (mit ~) wie III1-UIII-IIIII,llll-llJlt "llUIl mir/mich", IW-Ilt-flii:-juill "IIUIl dir/dich" (_j_l ' artili:c1
-!WIl) und der "gebundcncll Trallsl,ription", ill cler die ciliditischcn Pnrtikcln durch = abge1rellnt
werdcn: 1111=11111111, 1111=11111; 1111 =/fa = k/;f1Il.

1) Die lintcrscilicdung zwischen ~i-lIml-i-i- =i is!. vall Beitrag 3 § :!.j all lIicht kOllseqllent
durchgefiihrt wordell.
 REGISTER
ZUS<Lmmengestellt von Hciclrun ,Vurm

1. GESMITREGISTER

A. Al1torennamen

ABEL, L. 2 (,:iG,::-'1.
131 FIGULLA, H. H. 131
AKUitQAL, E. .129 CONTE!'AU, G. L-'O,I:::S FINCK, N, 257
ALlJIHGI!T l.!9 CORt-;"ELlUS, F. 127, 369
GAMIi:RELIDZE, Th. V. _, 36
ALI', S. 121, 1.18, 159, 270, COUVRlcUR, \V. 318
136,10::: f., 175. r79
27.1,29 0,297 COWI.EY, A. E. 1:::0,
GARELLI, P. I:::r, 16:::, .:fil
ARUTJU!'jAS, N. V. 3::::! i., 35 150 Ii
GELB, 1.]. 5, 1:::9, 151 L,
CI10SSLAt-;"P, R. A. 3::::::
I57-Ifil, 165, IGS-17:::, :::75,
EAI.IL\S, K. 33, 1.31, 102 f. 30:::, 319,3·lfi
DAl"IEI.SSOS, O. A. 363, .IOJ
DEAN, G. 3fiI GEORGIEV, V. 253, :::7·1, 293,
DEETERS, G . .103, .141
BECI!TEI. 137,218 , ::::::0 36·1, 38 9, HI
DELAl'ORTE, L. 1:::9 H., 133
BEI.CK, W. 35 GIOl{GADZE, G. G. 12.1, .1.,:::
iJEl,llRUCK 315
BE!'EOICT, W. C. 33, 36 GLEYE, A. 150
DELLER, I\:. 131
BE!'VE!'ISTE, f~. 23,1:::6,136 GOETZE, A. 9, 30, 3::: fl., 36,
DE~IAIWNE, P. 161
J38, 17·1, 1/7, I79, 19J, :::11), .1.1,121,125,130 [" 137, ql,
IJIAIWNOW, I.::-'1. 33
:::21,2:::8,231,2.19, :::57, 260, q6, IGI f., 166, I7.~, 176,
DosslN, G. 1:::5
262·26.~, 270, :::7.I,:::S(j, :::gSf., 179, 187,195,200,218,2 .\2,
DRESSLER, \V·. 3::::::
301,312 fl., 322 L, 330, 339, :::58, :::63, :::G8, :::81, :::8.\, :::86,
DROll LA :::00, :::87
3,13 f., 3·17 :::89, :::9·\, 305, 3·19, 368, 370,
DUNAJEVSKAJA, 1. III. -1-10 f.,
BERA!', Th. 157 L, Ifi2, 165 3 8 :::, ·P9, ·133, -136, ·139, ·I·P,
·H·I, .150, ·153, ·171, .,81,500ff.
BILG-I<" E. 3:::, 1:::·1, :::9/, 305 538, 5.1 I
5:::5, 530, 5 33, 5·13 GORDO!\", C. H. .1, 5, 8
BITTEl., ISO, rfil f., .1:::9 i.
DUI'O!'T·So~ntER, A. 15 9
DLEICIISTEI~EU, R. .1-1 I GREE:-< 1:::8
DORI;:, F. 7, 10 L, 16, 2::: GRU~IACII, E. .Ior
EIIELOLl', H. 130 C, 155, 196,
. BOSSERT, H. Th. 121, 1:::7, GtlTERnocK, H. C. r:::I,I25,
290, 305
132, 1.11-6, 1.11), 153·9, IGS· 131 f., QS, 156-158, r60,
EILERS, W. 3.10
iI, :::72, 398 , ·1:19 10::: 1.,165, IGS f., 17·1, 19:::,
ERZEN, :\. 33
BOZIWRT/KIZlLAY, H. 1]1 20·1,253, :::69, :::7·1, :::81, 319,
BRANDE!'STE1N, C. G. vo:--.- 8 , ·130, ·\34, ·136, -/38, ·\·18
FALl;:ENSTEU;, A. :::0, .~.II
131, 10·1 GUR!\"EY, O. R. 129
FEIST, S. 155
BR,\NOE:--'-ST£lN, \V. ].10, .101, GUS"'IA~I, R. 265, :::73, :::76,
FORRER, E. S, L!O £., 126,
.139, ·1·\ I 366 L, 381-9 passim, 391,
130 I., 133, 135, J.p, 1.\·3 L,
BROCK, N. VAN 1.11, ISS, 191, 393,396, ·10:::, ·Ill
Q7, lSI fl., 157, 159, 162,
270, :::9·1, :::98 f., 3-1-1, 381
:::59, 33G, 331), 355, ·137 f., HAAS, O. .~03
BR'ONow, R. 7
·~·IO-4·~s, .150. ·\5.'1 fL, .159 f., I·!,\IIN, A. 13.\
BRUG-~IANN 315, 3.11, 3.J.1,
·163, ·177, ·ISI, ·199, 5:::5, 533, HAL1~\'Y , ]. 150
3·19 I·IA~II', E. P . 387
BUCKLER, \V. H. 398, .101 5·13
rRlEDIUCII, ]. 3, 9, :::3, 32 f., l-L\NF~IAN!\", G. III, A. 398
BUGGE, S. 36:::, 39:::
35 i. II9-357 passim, 358, HEI.CK, \V. 369
BVRcKHAltnT,]. L. 1:::8
360,365,370,378, 39S, .\03, HENNING 183
-139-·1·1 r, -1-19, ·153 HERBIG, G. 131
~A"'I!lEI., H. lSI) FalSi>: 199, :::fi2, :::90, 3:::1 HERRMA!\"N, E. 315
CARllunA, o. :::53, .102, ·106, l'nAENI'EI., E. ::::::S HEllO DOT 1:::7
1" FRANCK, C. 150 if. I·IEuuEct;:, A. 1.17, 155, 380,
CIIANTRE, E. I2g Fl1oNZAHOl.l, P. ].10, 3·13 387, .101 f.
f GESAl'IlTRE GISTER 557
H tRMlm, 1'11. .~9 LA [~OQ U E I:: S PAUlE\{ -::60 L, :: 89
HUl'Llm, O. ::!7.~ LEE, D . J . N. ::53 PAlUWT, A. ::
j-Iol'n!M'N, K. 315, 3:: 1 L EmL\ :->~ ·I-IA u l' T, C . F. 33 fL, PEDERSE ~ , H. 119 '3 57 pas-
H01'~IANN .,6,5 1 sim, 358-396 passim, '~'H,
S. L~U~IA"'K- I-lonIA l;!; L~U~IA!'<N-Honl ,\~,, - SZ,\:-;-'r\'R H6
HOL~I'\, H. 130 :::::: , ::7·1 PElSElt, F. E. 150 L
!-! O;\UmL, F. .; 6, IS O L ~W I S , H. :::.19 P I'E I F ... .E]{, R . H. S
HOU WISK TEN CUE, Ph. H. j. L EWY , E. ::5 6 i. Pl'll'J~I G, :\. J. ::53
1.17.358-396 passim LE.w\·, H . 8 , 1::1 P l'I STElt, R. ::53
Hltoz:n" B. 6 t, II!) if., 1::9, LE.W\·, J. i.
1:::3 P1 NC1 ! ES, Th .-C. 1::9
131 , 134 . l.~ I . 1.1.3 , l SI L, L IS"lJEP.S I ~I, J. .1-11 ] )0 1':011:-> " 187, 11)7, ::::9, :::87,
15·1 L, 159. ~ :: 8 . ::09. 303, LITnIA!-;I';, E. .10 1 ::9 0 , 339
3 1 8, 3::3 , 330, 339. 3·\7, LOIIMA:->~ :::57 PORZIG, \V. 13 1, 3::5 , 3.jO· 3.H
.101, -13 8, ·Hz 3·,8
HULlK, 1'. 3:: i\ I AC RAE, A. A. 5 PRE~IE}( S 'I"t::n;,
:\. V ON" 398
j\L\lmw\' DEY, Th. 1::1, 1:::<) PUI!VEI., 136 J.
i\ IALU1 ,\T,:\. 1:::6 PunvES , P.?l1. 5
:'IL\lw, r\ : 35
J t::NSl~=- ,
P. 7, ISO if. i\ f,\ RSTRA!'< lJ.ER , C. J. S. 130 R I'I ClIEIIT , P. 139
A . I::H
J OIIN50l'. l\ I AssoN, O. 131 R IE. ~t5C II :-;EIfJE l t,
I\:. 1\. 116
J unET, A. I 3S :'1 1.\ Yl tIIQI'ICIt , ;\1. 3.10 RISCH ::: 35
J\I .EIH ClJ , 1-1. L. D E L 155 I~OIll'RT, L 363
l\,\11!.E, P . . \01, .P5 l\ IEII.I.1:1', A. 135 , I.p, ISS, ROSESI\RA:-I l 136, 131) , Lj.j-
I": ,\L1Nli:A, E. 358 , 360 L, 373 . ::7·;, 305, 313 , 3:: 1 i., 3:::5 , 1.17, 17S'178, 185 , ::.zo, :::51,
376 3· 1 :!-3 ·1 ·~ .z77, ::8 1, ::<)6, 303 L, 3 q,
KA~nIE:SH u IIER, A. Gt 119- l\1t::LlI':I':;VILl, G. A. 3:: , .J.! H., 3::!·I, 330 f., 355 "7
357 passim, 368, 38::, .p8 · .\8 ' 5 1 Ross, A. S. C. 3::::
SoH passim ilh,I"A:->T, J. I SO RUII'ER El, :'It. S. 3 16
1\1'11., J . 39B :'Ih""TZ, A. .1 01
I\ E L!. OG , R. j. 330 :'Ihm lGGl , P. 111) '357 pnssilll, S,\USSURE, F. DE 136, 338
1\1:.I'S I::I) Y, D. A . 159. 16:: 358-31)6 passim, ·10 ::, .105, SAYCE, A . H . 7, 33 , 3,1, I::!O,
l":I NAZ, F. l Si .p I ,.;II) I::: B 1. , qa r.,
I sI L , .101
KINe , L. \\I. 131 :'IiEsslcnscllMlD1" L. i , 1::5 f. , SCIl,\CIlEIUIEYElI, F. ::60, ::68
KU: KGE !., H. 1 31 15 0 SClI,\EFI'E R, C. F . A. I56
KI. UGE, T h. 3.1, .~6 j\!J ,"iic A~a~o\\', 1. I. 35 r. SCIIEll., V. 1:: 9
KNOH 1.0CH , J. 315 :\1 1£ n : lt, E. 1::0 SC lI Elmn , A . 339
KNUn T7.0S , J. A. 3, 1::7, 1:: 9 j\ [I CIIAELIAN I SO, 15:! SCIlEVOIIOSCli lO S, V. V. .1:::3
Kucm:u , F. 131 i\ I!L EWSli:I , T. 3 0 .1 , 339 SClIlI'I.E, J. 131
!":O:-O IO, r. W. 3::, 3.' f., .;8 IL , i\ i1 LO!'>,\S ~Go SCiDIIDT, K. H. 330
3G.\. 366, 37:: ililTTELn ERGE II, H . lU I , 35.1 SCII)!lTT, A. 16. ~
1\"It,\lII', H . 3.' :: 1\I OI. I.EI1 1)6 SCII!tIlTT , K ::50
i":!tAUSE, W . ~7·1 , ::76 1I 101.T I'E 3:: SCIl)IO I, I;; L t~7
l \HE T::;CJI ) IE H, P. 1::7, l.\.I, l\I olmT~L\:';:~, A. D. 1.1 <) SCII~IOI.I., U. 36i
HO, ~70 , 36::, 30.\ L, 30i. il h ; DI:a:: r77 SCIII101:nEII , O. ::
30<) i., HO, .,.p ilIoLLEH, D . H. 3·1 SCllUl.lm, E. VOl' lSi, +p
I\IWI',\ SS EII, H. 1::0, 13:: , SCIlULt:, Fr. E. 3.1
13 6, 139 L, li7, 179, 1<)1 , N AGEL, \V. 3~ SCHULZE, W . 337
::60, ::61) L, ::9 8, 3 I.! , 3:::! , N ,\HTE!'>, J. 3:!.l S CHUSTETt, H. S. ·130, ·153
333 , )!J5 , )63, 376 L, 3S r, NEU.\IA1-;:-;, G. 1 :\:::, 136, qi, S CI!WYZlm, E. ) L;
H I , -133, ·I·:·~, ·1-19 • .:65 173, ISS , ::60,:: 6·1 , ::8·I,:::I)·I£., SC I! ,\F ISI~ , l~. 36.1, 373
!\:UltYLOW ICZ, J. 136, :: 3·" 30::, 398 S I E G l. i SG 337
) 0 5, 3 15, 31 7. 3::5, B O r. , N II':OSI, IJ , ~1. V. 3·' S IE G 337
3·P !\"O UG AYROI. , J. ::: ,1 ::3 SO DD:, YOS t z6 , ::89, ·136
Sml ~!EIt, F. 111) "357 passim ,
L,\lJ,W , R. I)., O ZGi.\( , T . 11. X . 16:: .1 0 1, ·P5 , ·J 3 z , ·1]7, ·139, H·I,
L,\!'p s nr:: RGER , B. 1~3, 1::0 , 0 1' 1'1'1., D . (j · IGo, 5.1 1
16::, Hi 0 '1' 1'1£:-;', H. 111) '3 57 passim , SPEC HT ::80,3.' ::
LA HO!;IIE , I~ . :: iL, <) L, 11 <) - 370, .130, ·13·1, 336 [" ·1·;·1, 51'E lsEa, E.:\ . 8 L, 11, 18 i.,
357 p nss illl, 358'31)6 passim, H7, 53 0 r6::: f., 175, t77, Z7i, ·137,
.,::0, . 1 ~8·j.I.1 passim O TT E!:, .J _ 1:: 7 HJ
55 8 REGISTER

$'r,\1;o, Chr. S. 3'5 TEEW,\Cl:-;1 3.}.1 V!!-'I" ['£I1 , E. .10::

STIl!' .\:-: I:>I, R. 30 3 TExum, CII . f:: 8 VIHO I.1.I, AUO, Chr.
S"I'l:'I SI! I-: lut , F. 160 T IIII:: m ,;, P. 3.P
STOI.TE:-OUEItG, 1-1 . L. 36.1. T llum 'sos , H. C. 150 i. W,u;t>tW, H . 3.10,3.15
381 , 38 7 'fllmIS £!', V. 36::, 3u7, 386 H., \V,\ LTlI£lt, A. 131
5'1'1)101 , I-l . :I3 1 39 0 '3'.1 6 WATt';I:-; S, C. 192, 3~0 L, 3.10
S'I'lJHTI:' V,uiT , E. 135 fL , 1.;4, TII U IH' AU·DA~GIt>, F. ::: L, 8 , WEDI'H, O . 131
l.ltJ, ISS. 173. ' 79 . =09 , 2::!3, 9 \Vr::Jt)~:lm,E. (Fl. 0, 130 i.
::J .\. -;:·17, ::·19 . 30 1, 303 . 3Qf. To!!I', :\. 36::, 378 , 387 ff., \VEH ~EJ( , I ~ .368, ~u r.
::\1 9 Lr 3::1 fL, nO, 336, 3-14 1. 393 , 3!H , 39 6 \\'I ~CI".Elt, H. _ , I:! I , r ::: 9,
36 S. 3ii TII 1T5C Il , F . J. 1.1 6,300,365, -130
S ult!!i P .\SC H .\ I ZS 38 5 W ls l'£n, W. 1)6
5 u:-: o w,\ I./., J. q u, 35!) , 363 , TltUI1I;,],7. 1{(1\' , N. S. 339 W l ;;E~ l l\~ , D. J.
365. ]11 0, 38] TSJ':!ml'lIl, Ll , 11 1. vo:-; ]5 \ V I 5 5 ~I .\~~, W. 3·; 0
S ZANT VR \ VII I G!!T, \ V. I:JO, 1:J8, q8
s. Ll' U ." .\:-;~- H o I' F~ I ,\ :.;:; UK G:;,\i'l, A. 5 C, 8 , 130 W il :-;SC 11 , J. 3·'
S7.,I S 1· YI{
S ZDI EIUb: YI , O. ::6.1 , 3 1::, 3.~.1 " AS n lmC[~ s. B ROC~ ZDBIEHS' .18 1
VE:-;TItIS, B. 111. 367 Z Gl' ST A, L. 36 3

B. Sonstige Personennamen
:\lI u w'lHuna, ;\ll1w;). IIUlla I US 1. IJa· li "'" lJ a ll l1sii i 159. 170, l":: u tir·N"aliu nlc 59 i.
A II1 \\",I1 I1I11 :1 S . A IlIIU.'11II1I11fI s .... [I(l IIII/Wi
A 111011 s. '!AIIl(lI!/I Ha l iu s u ' {lI S \l~i ll ak 6::: Laba ma I. 1::7, lOS
<lAlIlan ll (:\1I101L ) :: 1, 2.~ H all llilu rabi ( E ulli :; \'. Baby- La baru il I I. s. {f aUII.W i I.
AmcHopliis II I. _, 25, s.n . lon) ::: , Sll, 1:::3, 1:::7, 16:: L ab an La/T;Lba rna H:!, ·IH
Ni lllllluria I:lallLlllll ra b i s. J-/(//IIllIlIm bi
Anitta 12J , YO.::! i. H am lllllrapi s. !-f allllll ltril bi i\lanc 15, 19 i .,::9
Anitta-T cx t r-::.: f., ::90, 351 IJaui ku ili -1-19 i\lcu un (lII·ar t. Hcrrschc r) 37
:\rg is li 1. (urart. H c rrschcr) l:Jan iili II. 166 ml:l it-b(t-S:\ R ,,[:\m~-s(n) ' 7z
3' I:!altusili ·13:: i\l tl (+r)- 1j s. MllrSili II., II T.
Arn uwalllia 16., i)attuiHli· ::7° :\[ur.:\ il i I. 1::3 , Ii!]
At'Il tl w<llllia J. 1:: 5, [uli, 175 1.:.1,,1\ u; i1i I. = LnlJarna i T. i\ l nr ~ i ' i I I. 13:! , 158 L, 178,
Arnuw:Jllda II I. 13::, 166 1::: 3 fL, 1t'i:: -IIJ,'j, 17·1, 179, 11:\0, 11)0, 217, 3.19, 5. <1.
Arta tama (churr. H crrschcr) :: 7 1, .1-\:: 5 1'..1 I)'I'( + r )-li
7 I:! alt usili II. 166 :'I[u rW i ( II I) . I SS s. a.
:\ ssur b:Jl lipa l (Assyrcrkullig) I:!att usili II I. f 3::, 15S, 166 ST ." IJ'/'( + r )-I;
] 1, 61 dlJ ch a t II :'Ii u \\,;lta ll i ISS
Atln · li:lI11ili ·l n;;u;;illa], 61 i. I:lis ll li-Sarr llma I5 S
!·lll llluan - !·!alta;; II. 01 N a pir- asu 59
13Et~G Tu 159,170 '·lllllliln l!· Ulllcn a 58 H., oG !'\ar,"L1I1-Sill 56 f.
B U. LUG:\L-ma ISS I·i utdul.u;· i nslisillai. SS i. , 6t Nb-1H 3 t t.-R' :!5, s. n . •l\,'illl ·
J)uu.iya 165 f. /IIl/rjll
z-r,7't'ca; t::7 Ncl.H1c h:lllnczza r s. N c:blfkml-
l:hl1.Zi~· a I I. 166
l:iLli'.7.iia ·13::: , 53·; IIc :{/r

Darius 5.1 H., 6.1 I. Imllluria (s. Niml!l uri a) ~7 Nel.lll!. ati ll cza r 63
InSlI;iillal; 59, 61 Ncsa 35:::
'li rsappil I I N ih1!l ll aria :::5, s. a . Ni m-
Eipu t;l l.ni u 165 mur jn
E /As lan "Sonnc n r;otl" (halL) dE,t;lr 37 N inultu ria (,rhronnall lC Amen·
::69 'lJ u pSa 3:! oph is !! !. ) 7,:: 1,"::5
Esarhaddon 61 Niob e 1':.7
1"::;'III-l i = l"::an lu t.ili 170 NUTll\ll .'i3 .'
rZi filr rZip!;]!l tawiya 170 I.:O.(G:\.)TUL-m a 159 'IN u patik I t
Kumar bi I I
II
1I 1:lald i 3 f ,33 J\:(J.TtJL·lUa 170
 GES.'\.MTREGISTER 559

P it bnnn 1:3 Su ppiluliuma (Hc tlliterl;ijni g) T udl,lalir a 11£. (cigcntl. II.)

Piyas5il i 158 1.170 I ••
Su pp ilul iulilil I. Tudl,laliya I V. (cigcntl. Ill.)
Rc (;1gyp lischcr SonncllgOlt) 166 i . I ):! , 158 , 166, :!S:! , :(j[
'5 Su ppillilium a I I. IP. 166 i. T usra lta (:\lita llllil,un ig) 1 i. ,
Ra mscs I I. s. SC505 lr is SUlrll k-Nahu n tc 59 if. 6, 1.1, :: ,
Ruhurntir 6: SUlruru 61 TII; ral las (= Tuisrn ttrl, Tu-
Rusa (urart. I-lcrr5chcr) 3:, Sycn llcsis lSI, 153 seratta ) -137
50
Tadu!,lCp01 '2.,
Unlns - tiCAL 58
Snnluri Ill. (urart. H err- Talmi-Sarruma 167
Untas·Hl!!tlban 58
sch er) 3 1, 33 , 35 TarkulllTnIl \.la 1.:9
Unta~ -':'Jap( i) rga 58
Sarri- Kusul,l 158 Tayanan na .~3'2.
Ulltas· NapriSa 58 fl., G(j
'ISau5g a : 1, :.1 TelipiIlU 1'2.3, 16.1 fl., .13 2
Urhi -T esllu 151:!
SC:ioslris = RaltlSC5 II . 1:7 TcJipinu-ErlaJ3 '2.13.2.15. 351 , Ul tU I:la ttn;-in .11)6
Si lh;d-:· 1t1511sina li: 60 538
Sillw!, · lmi u';ina); II . 61 Tcpli- !-[ lllllban- Insll§inal-: fi t
dSillli gi 7, t t, :! I, ::.1 L, .p::i , 'ITc.seb a 31, .\6, S .'1. Td§lIb Wa+r-pa-la · wa-s 151, 153
s. a. Siwilli <ITe,;su b II L, ~I. :!.\ , .:6 Zarpira 355
Siwcpalnrhuppak 58 TicJCa l (J\onig) 1::7 Zida ula II. 166
'ISiwini 31 , .1(1, s. a. Simigi TiSarilT iSa lal : Zid all7.a 16.;
ST :\DT( + r )· ]j ?l lil( +r) Tud l,la liya 159, 170
Ii- = l\l ursili 11.. III. 159. T ud l,la liya l. T:7
s. n. J1I11r.Wi 11 . • Ill . T udl,lali ya I I. (cigcn U. 1.) 166

C. Linder, Volker, Sprachen

aLchasiscb·adygischc G ru ppc Alcppo-l !lsciJ rift 168. J , 0 f. Am a lu (Ham aih) I53
4·11 :\ I i ~ ar 16 1 Amlm(l.'la. s. Ali:IlUa
Ach amcnidi sch 65 , sa . konig- altanalolisch .195 Anatolicll I Gl f., 1(j7, lR .\.,
licl/-flellil 111 ':11 idisclJ Allassyrisch, altassyrisc h I: ] , ~·\9 , :5·1 , :::j9. ~G3 - 67, :6<],
Adana 1:: 7 126, I.JtI, 16: , :58, :66'1), 'J 71, :::,8, 336-38, 3·P, .129,
Adik cvaz 3:: 281 , 2g0, '2.g.\, 305, 351 , ·130, s. a. lm r': I'I!III1/(Jliol , Sad-
;\giiis :G7 L, .1.1I ·n6, ·1.1::, .161, 5:1-1, s. a. HIIII - 1 /llflloli~lI, I V';Stlllllltuli~ ll .
Ag;'dsch :68 s. II. VUl'lJri.: chisch- Ilds l;ofolliclI, nltllssy rz'sc hc 7.1~ llI rnII1IWfolic lI
,·r liiisc h altbu lgaris.ch 339 ;\natolier :5ti
:1giiisc hc Sprachcn -\41 Alt-Elamisch 66 :\untoii sc h, anatolisch :!(j6-:!68,
l\ gyptcn 6 t, 1:7 (A \t ) GriCchis ch 260 ~70 , s. a . .·JUrllwifJi isch, IlIdo-
;\ gyplisch 1:.1, 1-1·1 , 155. :61, Ailhcthilisch. allhct hitisch /;.:rmn 1/ isclt-A IUltof iscll
:67 :3, 119-357 pass im, .130, :\II I> U\.I'1 -1-1 8
Ajapir 6:: ·133, -1-13. ·IS8 An!U1\.la - :60
AI. I.ad (Drn ast ic) :: (alt)hethitisch 29.j AIII, u\.liI!; : 60
i\ k l;adian s . .-Ikl:adisch AHindisch , ali imlisch 155, All lm wa 161
,A ld(adisch. altkaw sch : -7, ::00, -:: 17 f., :!(j(j, 30 3, 309. :\ II 7.ai 3::
:!: r., 56, 59. 66, 1:3, 173, f ,5 , 316- 18, ]:! I f.. 3~6, 330 f. , :\ II7.:tV llrICPC 33
18:, 190, :03 1. , :11, :66, 33·1, 3 38 1. ,3·15,3-171.,495. Aram:l i!;ch fi.~
::89, 30 5,35 1, -137. ·\·H •. \8 1, s. a. urarisch a ltind isch Aralilaic s . .-Jm l/lii;sdl
s. a . IJ oga:ki.ij,-.·Jkkfll{isdl a lt illdisch-vcdisch 187, 313, Ar:1ro'lt 3 1
Aklwillsch dcr Rauogcbic tc J:! 3 3-1-1 arch.-jlllighethitisch :! I r
AI(III,.III , Amlw(u)a -1-1 8 Altirisch , altirisch 18<], :: .1<], Ari el' 6 , 3.1:!
Alaca Hii yiil-: = OyU1( 1:!8 , 3·15 Arinuerd 3:
·1·:!9, .13 6 Altl;ltcini5ch ~~I, 303 Arllllla (ON) .136 •.161
Alalab 5, 1:3, 16~ f. Allpersisch (Old Pcrsia n) 5.\, Arililla' ::60
AlbaTl csisch s. , IfIJIIllisch 6j, 67 , 13i, 367 Ari/lllilll ::{jo
Alballisch, Al baucs isch 250, Altpreu l.lisch 303 Arill/l:ts· mis :!60
::59. 36 1 Ailslawisch , alt slawisch :::70 Ar l;:ldisch 3 1(,
Aleppo 1::8, 167. s. a. {If/11m Amarna-Bricfc 10::: Ar rncnicLl 1, 3 1
560 REGISTER

:\rllllmicr 1,31, 33 :!JltIIl·Ilt1, T cll-d-Alllllrml l:Ja ligallat " H .

:\rm cllisch 150, 155 , :qg L , E I.ull isch (Elamite) i, ::::, 54, I-I alysbogcn ( ti.irl,.l\I ~ll l fln ah: )
z5i-g. =6=. :::67. 313 C. 3=5, 57, <::.77, HI S. <l. /lijlliglich- .:::66 • .1::9
3.11 L, 3.'.; . 3u<;: "c/llj·II/':lIillisch.:s E., M it/d- Hamalh/ Ham a am Orontes
"\r1.all'<I. 1::0 Et.lmisch, Pru lo-Eltl III iscfJ 1::8, 151, s. a. Amulu
Arzawa - Bricic 1=9. ISO 5 /Jii· /-1::/ll lll isch Hal.dclsJw lonicll, altassyrischc
Arzawa-Uindcr ::61 Elamitc s. Elu llliscll 1::1, 1:: 3
Assyrcr 1,31,33 c!alllitischc Worle 66 I:Ianigabal .!-I-I
.'\ ssyrist.: h .J.I=, S. :I. ,-lIf· Elylltisch 367 l:I arri 6
(l s$yrisch Erldlct-Lllschrifl 171 Harrisell s. HI/r,.isch
:\wcst iscli 137, 316, s. a. ctcol;:ypriseh 367 IJ a;;ju 1::6
Glilllli-:lli't:slisch Etrusldsch ::53 , ::68, ::].;, l:Ia t ti 1::0 f.. q.:::
300,338,36:: , 36.\,3 67•. !.p, i:iatti/ I:iattusa 1.\3
llauylon 5,li9
HU,5 33 ]Ja tti, La ndes-name 1:: 3 i.
Babylonian s. lJlluyloIl ISC /'
Etrusldsch, l;leinasia tischc;:; B attier 1:;:6, 163 L, 353 ,
Bauylonil! 1I 5. Daby/oll
:67 -;':::9
BilUrion icr 33 I-Iallier s, :l_ ( Proto-) Hut/iel"
EuphraL .:::, 3=
Babrlollisch 5·1.65.67
J-Ia tl isch (Prolohau iseh), hat-
Balkan ;:59, 3·'=
tis.ch 1::::, I':::.~ i., 13.: .
ballwnischc [rcmuc Spr<lcilcil Falisldsdl 18S, ::i.\ , s. a,
Latillo-F, t.p L . q8, l(j .~, 17.1. 11:16,
=60
fill.!lO -UgrisdICI" Sprachstamlll 191, 193 , ::03, ::::5 , ':::·19,
Ballisr.h, b ..dtis t: h ::6·1. 30).
::5:: -.1, ::60, ::66 ii., ::70 i.,
3::3 . 3·P, 3-18 1-13
irlihgricch i!ich ::67 ::7.;, ~77, ::85, ::90, ::97, 302 ,
Balto-Slawisch :::7.1.3.151.
3 0 .1. 31 1, 34·1, 35:: C. ·I:!S-
Biaier 33
5-1-1 passim,s, a. Sprue",
B ildhc lhi t isch s. [-Jitrag'y- Galatisch s. :1II{ogalw.ll isclI.:s g.:bi.-I, flItC.~ !wlt,
jJh,' /Iil/,l} isch G. I:I attu~ I::!.I, ·!37
BiSlllull 65 Gasga ( i\:aiikcr, Kas!i.iie r), I.! 3, I) altllsa 3. 1.j·3 , 16 5, l67,
Hogar.b.iy 3. 6-S, t o, 1:::·1, ,I ·I ~ .:::61, ::Ci6
1::9. 131, 156, 158 L, 166, G~Hh.'i-:\wcslisch ::ou I)attusa- 3 . 1::·1, 1':::9, .:::60,
365 • .130, .136 Gcorgisch H J
B og:lzl;o},-:\ I; l;adisc1 1 134 ·1 37
Gcrlllallisch, gcm lalliseh 155 . I:I ~l tt u s a- lind .. Land de r Slad l
Doga1.kuy-i:iattusa 1::0 180, 18!), 19= , ':::19, ::3·1, ::·1.8 , Ij atlu:ia-" a ls L1I1dcsll a mc
BiiyGkkalc 16r ::50, 256, ::8.\, 303 , 3 13, I ::5
Bulgarisch s. Altblilga l'isch JI0-18, 3::::, 330, 33::, 3·P, I)alt1l5(a- ), StadtnalllC 1'::: .~
<;aglll>Jn 361 3.\3-5, 3·17 f., s. a. Urger - I:lattu ~a - 13 o gaz l,oy 1.::: 8 , I ):::,
(.a\'U.jilepC 33 11111 II isell 16 1, .1':::9, s.a. Boga:l;u}'
Cerablus = Karga llli ~ 1::8 gCrInan ischc Spracilcll ::8S Uatluiia·:\lalln ::68
Chabur :: GOlisch, gO lisch 155, 3Z3. I:J:ntuiias :::60
Chalder 3r, 33, 34 33 ' Hcr lllos lal 391:1
Choga-Z ..lll1bil 58 L, 6:: Gricchell 1::7, ::60, no HClhOiCUS, Hcthaci l-;!I
Chun-itisch , l-iurri sch 1::.!, Gricchenla!lll 1.\.1, ':::59, 26o, Be!hit el" (Hitiite) I i., 6, -;!.::: f.,
13.1, 1.11 f., 17':::, 175 -8, ':::.\9, :q~ 1:::3, 1::6, 1::8, Ij 3, r6:: f.,
':::53, :58, :66-8, ':::ir f., ':::77, Gricchisch 153, 15 5, I Bo L, 173 i., 1;7, :::60, .:.:::8, -133 f.,
305 , 38.::: , -13'::: t, ,136 f. , -14=, 18,1, 11:IS , 200, ::17 L , ::.,8, .J.i:: . 5)8 , 5·13 ; Wicd crt': lIt-
250, 253. ::56. ::60. ::6:: i. , d cckulIg 1:::7
Daut i-b lur 33 ::67, 3°3 i.. 307, 31) fL , 3 16- l-lc lhi t isch, (H itt ite) 3, 5, :::::,
Dch-i-Kow 60 I B, 3=1 CL, 3::6, 330, 339-,;':::, 111)-390 passim, ·1 ::9, .13 1,
DelUolisch ::89 3.1-1 -8, 359, 3 61 , 36·1, 3(jU, -\-I :: , ·\·IS, .150, .181,
Deutsch, dcutsch ':::or, :11) 368, 31:1.!, ·1-30, .136, s. a. _·lIlhcthill\ch, .·Jrch .-.I ulIg-
Di:J.lcl;tc von J:luhcsna r::.::: s.a. _·Jltgri<'Clliscil, Fl"iill gric - llr:tll ifl'sch,Bifdlu!lJil i sc ll, Hie-
Dialcl,tc von lStalluwa I':::':::, eliisell, Homcrisch-Griechisch, rO/ilyplullltr:tltil., illdo- g':l'wa-
30'::: 11l:C1isclle Spmcltc miter (lem 1Ii.~/isch uri';IIli.:ric lI'alle
Dia leli.tpriig ulIg ,.
umriscfl G., ' ·orgri.:chiscll :/Im H., Illflu-J-1iltit~ , .fllllg-
tlitillliiseh.: D, gricC\lisch-krprisc h 309 hdh ilisch, !lIi/ldhdhi/i.~c",
Dilbal 5 Grusinisch s . kl.uka si sclic 5/)/"0- N.·ulldllitisc /l, SjJt"ilho'ihilisch,
Dorer 371 ch ell , gnlsillisdlCI" Z;i·~· i;; U r·J1 !"111 il ise ll, U r -1 IIdo-I·/ dh il.
Hethitisch (Erforschull g) 1':::9,
Elam 55 1:la lpa (= Aleppo) 1::6, .\6:: '3'
EI-.-\Iu:lrna -, fi, r::·I, S. <1. s. a . .-II.:p/)o Hct hi tiseh ( I' hilo log ic) J30,13.1
 GESA i\ lTnEGlSTER j 6r

j-jc Lh itiOich (l'hilologisd lO illdogcnn:lltisc1 IC Eil lzd sp ra- lcal lkasise.hc S p rue ll c!! , g t'liSil li - '
H;l.nclblichcr) 1] 3 c hell 1.10 sc he r Zweig 1.1)
He tirili:;ch (Sp ra ChSl u fc n ) 1J 1 im.logcr m;uli"chcs Ga i;[ti ~c l1 l\a l1 !;a::;us 35, ::!5!) , ~ 75 , ·I·P
1.11 ~ ·'9 ]37
Hel hi tisch (Std hmg d 0i H). (ili g-. · )lc<1n ish il c .!36 h~a ll l;.as ll ssprachc ll s, IWIII,'a-
138 irldo gcnnal li!'. lisdl urie n l ic r t c $iscil'; S/n·(/c/J,;u
il c lhitis c h (T c xt~ Hilt! Text- Werl,,"! ZIII !l I-I t, t hitisch CIi l,d lil! s. SI)me!I'; Ifa 1\.
Lc arLc itll!l gc n ) !3::! 1.1-1 ( K e il scltr ift. ) He t hit isch s .
J-I f'tlrit isch - L uwise h , H ct hi - I nJo- H iuite I 35 11 ..,11 iti.~t: 1r
t isch (-L lI w i:;ch ) 139 . :!O l , I nd o- l rllllisd l, il ldo -irnrlisc il l":eilSl:hl'if llu wisch I R7. ~:! ~ ,
::!I i . ::!19. ::!.j8-S·!1 ::!5U, ~58, IRI, 18.1, IS,) f., ~ .1 8 L, ~So, :! ·19, ::6(" :::119, ::! 7-: C. ~ 75 L,
:! fio £. , :: lJj -U7 I ~(1 9 , ::7 ~ fL. :!:iJ, ::!5 ii , :! 60, ::!6~ , :!i.!, 3 13 i ~71) f., :::80, 300 fl., 305 fL,
ziG , ::! 7S , ::!S o , :!9 9, ,1!5 , 3 1rI i., 3 ': .1 , .P5 f. , 33 ~, 3H fL 3~:!, 3::5, 33 :: , 336 f., 3·15,
J IS, 3:! 5, ,:;]::! , 135 f., 3·10 iL, I lllle ra 'l atoliell J 3·18, 35 J , -1-18
3H -!J, ·P9, ·195 f. Iralli;;ch J (il , 3r1:!, S. it . 111110- ( I\c ilsclrrift -) LlIwisch l ~ :: ,
hc lhit iscl t-i nwisd lc Spr;tc h- Irn ll i.~cft ~O I, :::·!9 , :::68, 355
g rup pc !:! 70, ::!i::! , 331) , 3· j ' , frisch 330 s, a. Alrir i.~c fl I": eli~ i n- Pass .H
53·1 l si!ld a 356 I\ clt isch, (Cell ic) [~ y, I S9,
J-Je llliI O- Luwif! r 43R Is t an!! \\':! 3url 303, 3~o. 3~ 5 , ].11, :1 -13, 3·10 ,
H f! tlr ilo - Luwi ~ r.: h s.lldhifisch- I~tan ll \\'a ~ 8I , s . :r. Diffld,l,' :H S
L lIOi'iiICh 1' 1/11 I. I": e lli;;ch s . a. III1!o· h- d/j.~c"
i-Iicrn;.:irphe ll , !lo t h . s. SPl'Ifc/i,; I ta l i ~c h 1:!9,3 .1] I\cr\;u\; 5, -::67
tfl'l' IIdli. 1-1. J tal()- i\eJtiscil 3 .1 3 I\":ft,o; wt, lto l1lcrische I ~7
H ierogl y pi lcn llc l Jli iiscll i \' riz (s (i<i\ieh \' Oll Nii";:d e) I\ ilild cu 30,), s. !\-i=::m.·a/I/ff
S. } I j'; l'og/.I'Pllcllfu:I'isch I\i lilcisch 366
"hicrngi yp h cIIII~ thi ti$;c11C " i I.lllir T::!i, :::III 1\i! llllLc risch 15f)
S p!'achc I 5 7 I w li p !\I!.!l In na k s. !JlIlys/mgol
I-iic r ngiy phc tliuw i:;ch , [-l ic r o- I": izz \l watna (= !\ili lden)
g lyp h cllh e thil isch , B il d ilc - 1.15 , 158 , 178 , ::!li I , -:: 66, 355
J Ullghct h itis cJ l II9-35i pas -
th itisc h , IOllvite hicrog lyphi- k!;l$si;=chc Sprachcli ~u3
sim
fin o I H)' 357 passim , 30ti Jdc ill:1.Sin-lisc.h 300. H .I
] \I ll g hel hi tisc h, s p ii tes (Spii l -
hi erosi y p h P.l 111 1wisch -phun i I;;: i- J\lci llasiell I, 3 1, 153 . I t'i :!,
Ilcs isch ) I J ::, r.: H
s dtc Hiii ng u is l Si) s. u. Lll wi,.,. i ll 1\. " I;letna -
!-l i t.Htc s. /l, 'IIJ/H~f'h , IId lti/a <;iali schc U!'sprach c" .' .11
i-lo fll Cri!i.ch -Gricch isch ~50, J\;1 1'i.il$ (? ON) .\ Gt i,un igl iell -Ole h ;in Lcn id ISellCS
:!j5 , ::].1 1,a nes 1-: 1, .\3 5 E lalll i.,;ch 55 , 67
I)urii cr I , C, 1\ancs- Kii liepe n a lrc Ka yseri l":i;ll igsut~ rg - Od css a , wcs tlieh
H nb C!'.lla 30G l UI f. d . Lill ie 3.10
1:llluesll :l s. JJiold t,: VOIl 1:1. i\allcsisd l (i\;m isisch ) I ::! I, l\optos 3Gu
I:lunljld§lla I SR s . a. "kllllis/llk" l":l)r~'da!l :r 360
Hnrrisd l s. C IJII/'/'ilisch, .1I i· " i ca lli ~h itc "
:!(is, s. i1. (i lUlrl- "re ta q .\, =59
/mlll isch -Il urriscll ;.:um. -)!w Hisl, it,; I\ rCl i"r. h I B , J G7
Hur riscll- U rarl ;lisrl1 .j.II I\anis isc h s. A'n n,:s ;scll J..:jj1tcpc [ ::1
Hllrriter 103, 'if I\ apr.ulokicn · 1 ·1 ~ I\ urrliseh 3~ 0
Hllrriter· Lanri l=5 l":arah cl - POtss 1:7 l\urli:Utll;t 153
1' ;lralC pc I_:' r., 15 9 f. l ,yp ri ~c h 31 0. :1 7 1 S. a.
J\argallli; 153 s .a. Cembfus Gri,;ch i scli- I\- )'I'r j.~ cll
Itl ip!' ~.'i I\;irie ll 369
lllyrisch ~G3, 3.jG i. I":arisdl :nS, 3(,:! , J6(" .\.p, L.1 i.I W II = he th., pa l. LiI.1i./ii in:1
jmii;:.c h s . .-!lIim/isd, 533 -1:\('
rl\cl O~e n ! lan Cn I, 3l J\an n ir lJlu r 33 l.aJ1upi ya ::: liy
I ntiogcrll l;lI1 isc11 i\assilisch J.p , ·\·11 " lar i~c h" ] (i.1
p a s; im, ·15::!, ·159, ·, 75, 50~, l\il ~l,;lc r s. GII .t;!! (/ Latc E lamitc s. S/.Iil-E/lIm i sclJ
:i.H, .'}.I3, 5. a . Pn/· l l/dvcer- i\;];ikcr s. r; i/ fl!lI Late iil , i:rtci llisch IS S, 18B i.,
lIl(fuisrh, "/JJ·/Jfnilll!lIgr.rlllllll " , l\:;rl ~(; h (SlCicrllla rk) In ~07 f.. -:I7- ::::! ::!, :!3·I, ~53.
U /'illdp!!""I11(/l/i .~c h, l'o r iHd/J· l": a u l.;a~ i s dl, !;alll.;asisch 305 L, ::! 5G, :!li3, :!70, ::74 , ~9l), 303 ,
/i/:rmrr,ri:,r,!:, r-or- U r- illllo;:.:r- 336, 33 S , 363, .J.I I :lO7 , :l 13 , 317 f, 3::: 1 f. ,
1111/ 1/ iscl:, ,,:estim/o{:.:rllw /I ;sdl kaul;nsisch c Sprachcll 7, ~~, 3 :! 5, :13 0 , 3 ] :: , 3·11 , 3·13,
i ll dog-en I r a I I is(;h -:tn a 10 1j;:.chc --Iii, 15.1, .\.\1 , .15'), s. a . .~ ii lf­ 3· j5-7 , ·1.;.1, s.a. A lII"I.:i"
Spr;rdum ::!70 iwltl:II .~ . Sf'l'. La tc irL,1dassischcs 31 5

1 ·l a!ldb\l(~h der Oric lltalisUk, Ab t. I, Btl . II , Ahsd rn . II.:, Ug.

 REGISTER

Lalino-Faliskisch 339 , 3H . "liddle-Elamite s. Mil/d·Eln- Parn i1S!ia ::!oo

3_16 wisch IIClp'lctGG6~ (Bcrgnamc) :::60
Lattaioe, 3 i\lira 153 TIctpu·...,aau ::: 60
Lclcgcr +1.1 i\litanni I f., 5, 7 Palara 367
Lemnos 34i~ i\lita nni·Hurri ter 163, -137 Patnos 33
Lily1u :::68 f. l\li lanni·Rcich, hurrischcs Pci;1sger 36.,
Lii}z/silln s. Lnh:rm 16:::, :266 L, 3.1::! Pclasgisch 153 , ::93
Litauiscll ::::::S "I i ttanisch- 1-1 urrisch IS·! Pcrscpo lis 61, G.~ L
Liy nn 58 i\littcl -Elamisch (Middle Persisch, pcrsisch 383, s.a.
loudte hicrogiyphiquc s. Ili,· Elamitcj 58.66 f. _.J/I/Icrsisch. Ncupasisclt
rogi .II ph':lIiuliJisch rnittcl-ciulLiitische '[exle fifi Pcrs isch·Ascrllcidschan 3:::
Liiisch s. Lflwi sc!, l\lilr isch 366 Phcllos 300
Luldm 370 mittclhe thi lisch 3'9 PhOll.ildsch, phonikisch 160
Luld;n -Liindcr 369 i\luskcr s. MlI sk£ 5.a. Hicrogf},Ph.:u/ulIJi sch ·Ph ,
LU5na 188 i\htski (Musker) H":! Phr~l sc r ·\ ·1.:
LU\'iscl! 5. LlI:iJisC!/ i\l yl;.enisch 3 16 Vhrygisc h, phr ygisch ::-19.
Luwia r::o ::58, 3:::5, 338, 3·jI, 3·15 f.,
Luwija 37 0 Nairi -Liimlcr 3r 36.\, 3Ci7, s. a. Tltrnko·Phry -
Luwier t::3, :::59 t_, s. a. Nnrah: .161 Bisch
Ht'lItUo-Llltoju Nctik -136, .1-16 •.,6 1 Pisidi5Ch 366, 533
Lllwicr in Klcinasicn I.j.~ Nc:ia I::!I, r:::6, 163, :271 Ponlus, ·U 6, .I .\::!
Luwisch, lliwisch (h1isch) Ncsisch 1:1 I, 1:27. 1:29, l.!·I. pr[l-illdogcrmanisclLc Sprac!Le
(Iuvisch) 1t9-3S7 passLm, s.u. SpiUllcsisclJ t -l-\.
3s8~39 6 passim. -Pf}, ·133 , Ncuhcthitisch ::3 Prc uUisch s. AItprclipisch
·ns, ·137, 4·12, .150, S. £1_ Nell]1crsisch .I53 Proto-E lamis.ch 56
Hcfhitiscll-LIIWiscll, Hi,-ro· Nippur 5 Prolo-Elamitc s. Proto·Eta·
giyPllCuiuwjscit, l\ciiscll,jft~ No rdscmitisch 153 1IIi5Cll
lIm-'isch, Ostlu WiSc/I, SPlit/lI- Nordsyricli 13::: , 163 f., 167, (Proto-)Hntticr 16~
wisch, .. IVesl LLlwiall" :27::! Pro to hatti sc h s. /1{/fU.~ch
Iliwischc Sprnchc unt er dcm nordsyrisch 163 "praloindogc rman" 370
Gricch ischen Gricchcnl;mds Nuzi 5 f., 8, II, 13, 2:::, :::67-9 Proto-Indo Hittite 5. Ur -]IU{o-
3·1:: Ii ,:U,ilj"ch
luwischc Sprnchcn ::08 Old-Elamitc s. Alt-Elmuisc fl Pro toluwisch 1:2:::, :::68
luwische5 Substrnt I.H Old Persian s. Altpcrsisch
Lliwismcn 13:: OrtsnamclI allf -ass;) ::7.t Qa\lIa 5, 16:::
Luwiya 14.3 QrtslIamc 13 a ttus als I:Iattlls a ~ Qn\nisch 1 0
Lydicn 39B
Lydisch II9, 138, IB, t.1 7,
'9'
Orts namCLl aui ossa, ·nda in Ras Samra (UgarH.) 3 f. , 8,
I79, ::!.j8 , ::61 L, ::Ci7, ::70, I\leinilsiCIl 14.; It, 1:::3, 15::: , I5Ci, 158, 16::,
::73, ::78, 33Ci, 338, 36::: Ortsnamen auf -Gcra; und -IJOa; 30S
Lykaonien 369 in Gricchcnla nd I++ Ras Schamca s. RlIs .sn mra
Lykisch IIg. J:::::, 1:38 i., q8, Oskisch t 88 ,330 Rhodiapolis 37z
15.\ f., 17:::, 179, ::: .18, :::60, Oslw-limbrisch 3::5, 34 I, Rhodos 36 7, 371
:::6.1. :::67, 27::: f., :::76 f., t78, 3·13. 3·1(j ff. r01nanisch 3.\1
30:::. 30.1, 337 C, 358-395 Ossetisch :::.19 Ro yal Achae Lllcnid l:: lamite
passim OSII\lvisch s, Osi/l/wisch s. lIiJl1iglic:h ·(l chncm':llid. Eln-
Lyldsch A 373 Osthndsch I::!:: misclt
Lyldsch B 373
pae lignisch 3.\8 Sardcs 398
Pah lavi der Btichcr t83 Satlllsna 188
Magncsia am Sipylos 398 POLL'I t:::o, LI:2 f., .1-1= Schw;1rzcs l\l ccr 3.P
Mainndertnl 398 Palace 1::: ),433 i. Scy thian s. S k J'(iscll
Malamir 6:: Paliistina I, 5 Sccvolll:cr 369
Mari ::!,8
1\Iari am mittleren Euphrat
16:::
Palaisch, pa1n.isch, J 19- 357
11;1ssim , 3(j5. ·j::!9, .131, ·D3,
.\.,:::,448, .150
SClllitcn
5c milisch
sell/itisc"
,. ..
lIord-

l\{cdian s . Mediuh P;1\isna 188 scrnitisch'llgnritisch 305

Medisch (i\-Iedian) 5.~ Palmyra :: (selllit.) Ugaritisch :::66
l\Iesopotamien t i., 5 Pamphylie n :::01 Side tisch 3]8, 366
mesopotamisch . I .\.~ Paphtagonicll ::61 Sipylos 1::7
 GESAMTREGISTER

Sky tisch (Scythian) 5-' Susi all , s. SlI siscll :!g6, :!98, 300, 305, 307, 309,
Slawisch, slawisch 19::, ::::8, Susisch H 3 13, 3:: 0 , 3:!3, 3:: 7. 3::9, 33::,
::56, ::6·1. =93. ::99, 303. 3·P, Swanisch +1 I 338 , 3·,6, 3-19

l
3·\6 , 3.18, 36 1. s. a. A It- Syrien r f., 5, 31 , s . a. Nord- Urilldogcrm anisch, uriudoger-
s/awiscil, Hllfto·Slnwisc/t sl'ri':l1 lIlauisch 137,1.10,1 80, :::06,
Sp,H·Elamisch 6 t Sy risch 361,5. a. NOJ'dsyriscil ::15, ::.,8, ::56, :::59, :!6:: ,
Spathe thitisch, spi"ithctllitisch ::78 i., :!!)I, 30j, 31.1, 317,
1:: 7, 132, 1.10, 193, ::08 L, 319, 3:21, 3::8, 335 fL, 338-
"TallaH" 5. Spl'ncll.: "T."
::1I i., 238, ::.~7 , ::97 i., 300, 357
Tarsus 165
301 fL, 33::, s. n. S/ruit· (Ur -) Jlld ogermanisch 3-19
T a urus .136
sta a/clI , splith.:.tll. Ur-I ndo-I-let hitisch (Jlro to-
T ell·el-A marna J ~9, s. a.
Spatluwisch J::Z I ndo-Hittite) l36, 153
A UIllTlln , E/-..1 II/(lr]/(t
Spiitnesisch , s. jlw ghdhifisch. U rld~ :::
Termil isch 36.t
sptif.:s Ult]U tIa-a-ni-il,-ku-11 (IJ;'t-
Sprachc cler hcthitischcn I-Iier- Thraldsch ::93 , 3·ll
n ildol) -1-19
Thraim-Phrygisch 3.' I
oglyphcn IS::
Ti fl is 35
5prachc cler l":cfliu 153 Vun 31 . 3::, 33, 35
Tigris :::, ::07-9
Sprachc "Tabali" 1 5] Van-Sec 31,3:2
Tocharisch 1::9, 1)8 , I7i,
SprachcII , nicht-indogcrma- Valluisch 33
188, :::07, ::li, :!:!.j, :::3 5. :::53,
nischc (sudos t -) anatolischc Vcdisch, s. Alfimlisch · Vtdi.~ch
:!6~, :!7.\, ::76, 316 L, 3:::5,
53+ Venctisch :!50, 330, 3·,6
337, 341, 3.\.\,3.,0 fL
Sprachcn,stidostnnatol isch -sy- Vorbcv611,erung cler Gricchcn
Top?auii 3.'
risch-mesopotamischc .,Sub· :!59, 533
Trausimukasic l1 31
strat"· -1-16 Vorgricchisch ~93
Troas 370
5prachen s. n. Jgiiischc, bal- Vorgriechisch·;'i. giiisch :!68
Tiirl,isch, Hirldsch :!04 , :!i7.
l;:aniscllC, iin no-ugrischc,
gcrmanischc, hcthitisch-lll-
.,.,6 \'orindogcrman isch :!68
\'o r-urindogermanisch 339
[Tup]lias 59
wischc, indogcrmanisch-a-
T lIrllspa/Tuspa 31, 37 , 38,49
natoJiscllC, indogcrt nanischc , Westanatoliell nnd die \Vcsl-
Tu-wa-nu-wa.- (griCcll.8ulXVrL
lmukasische, Idassischc, ltiis tc I~:!, :!6t
00lX'JrL assyr. Tuballa) IS'r,
"Idcinasiatischc Vr-", lu - Westindogermanisch, west-
wischc, s iidl,aull:lsisciJc ' 53 illdogcrm. I~9, 13i, 303.
Tyt'Scnisch 36.,
Sprachgcbiet, altes hi'\tlischcs 3::6
.\ot ,,\Vest -Luwian" 366
Stadt l /Astaouwa ::69 Oyiik, s . ..llnea Hil,'iil~
5tadtstaatcn , spflthcthitischc Ugarit s. Ra s SlZ lIlrn Xanthos 358, 360
1 ~7 Ugarilisch. ugaritisch ·1, 1~ ."
Subaracr 5 S. a . s~ lI!j/isch 'lI snl'ifisch Yazlhliaya bci Boga1.koy
5 ubarlu 5 Umbrisch 330, s . n. Osko- 1~8, 15::: , 100, 433
Subs tra t, luwischcs, s. ilfwi- Ulll brisch YU1.gat-Tafcl 129
sch.:s S. UrOllisch , urilHsch 30.,
Siidanatoli en [ 3~ , .167, ~68 urarisch a ltindisch e Diaic],t- Zabarasna r88
siidb.u],asiscilc Sprachcn pr;igllng :::(j(j Zalp a I~(j
HI Urartiiisch, s. HlIl'I'isch- Ur- lcleia 370
Su mcrcr 173 f/I'lliisch Zcnlraianatoiicn, rnit tJcrcs
Sumcrisch, slimerisch 3, .j, Urscrlllanisch 137, ::89 :!6t
IS::. ~69, ~77, 305. ·1LJ, ·;59 Ur-Hcthitisch- Luwisch, ur- ZCll lralanalolicll , nordlichcs
Sura 360, 37::: heth itisch-luwisch 181, t.\:!, ·P!). HI
Sura 33 18 7f.,::o7-9,:::!S, :!5o·(j, ::66, Zip(p)asna 188
Susa 55 L, 58, G I - (j.~ ~77, ::79, ~gI, :::93 f., ::95 , Zippla.nda ::60 •.13 6, .161
 II. EINZELREGISTER ZUlli ARTIKEL
J. F. FRIEDRI CH
A bl ath- L\, 39 i f. l\cssi -Sagc 3 Pf c [d I
j\bs lraJ;;ta 1 2 L, 38, .10 L, .~7 J":Olllitativ I.! ri. Plcncschrcibullg' I r
Adjc l;: tiv:.J 12, 13,38, 39 • .]0 f., l":o llJi iiuu a l 19 PluralclClllClll I :.! , 13 r.
·17 li:o ll grucnz .11 Pr;iclil;al 19, .15 i.
Advcrbia 13.19 i": onjull k tiollclI 19 ]J[~id i kals nOlllCll .15
Agc ntiv q, 15 f., ::0, 37, I":ollj u ll kli v 18 Pr;iposil ionell II)
39 fL, ·I(j , -17 l \on~O l lalllcILschri(t, Ilgari li- Praesen s 17, ::!1 , .1.\
A ggiu ti ncratioll L\, 21 sell e .\, 8, l ( ) f. PraeteritUlII 17, :::n, .1,) i.
Alt C5 T C5tillllCll t fi , 3 1 Kap nla 19, ·~7 ]Jro no!llill<l : DCIllOtL<;tra l h'p ro_
Anaptyxc 38 !":riegswa g c H 1t00n in;J 16, .j:!; Ind d iuit·
Appcl!ali\"<J. 5, 8, 39 !\u lllarlJi -l'\ [ytho5 3 prono mi lL i'l 16, .Pi ]Jcrsoual-
Argis ti·:\nnalcn 35, 5 1 f. p rOIlUllIill >l , enlditischc IS,
Arti l,ci 12 , 13, ·I i Lch l\w(;rtc[', ald;: ;td ischc jm .\ I; i'cr5{Jllaipro tlotllill <l,
Chllrr i lis clll!H __ sc lbsUi nd igc 1"5 , .jl; Pos·
Bilingui5 3, I), 3·1 , 36 sessil·p rol h.llllill a 13, 15 L,
Lc hnwiirtcr. dlllrrit isc lic j ill
BUg-ilZk6y-Tc:.:lc 3, (i, 8, 10, .j.! f.; Relati\'proIl Olldll<l Ifi,
Ak kadiscl!clI __
II, =3, 30 -I::!
Lchllwurtcr, ch nrri i ischc ill1
Dath' I::!, LI, 15 f.. 39 fr. H cthi tischcTt "::3
Reflcx h ' a 17
Determinative 6, 8, 3.~ Lo l;:al is q, ' 5.39 if.
l ~ el ati\'!;a t 7. 16, ::!oL, .17f.
Dipittonge, fa Honde 37 r. R it ll a ltcxtc. '::! , 3, :::3
Dirckt iv q . 16, 39 ff . .f7 :'Ilell ll a-l ll ~c hrif tr. n .\ 8 ff.
:'Ilclal l hall dw c rli: 3 1 Salzbau 19 £i., =3, 45 f.
EIl!)1I ::! i\ litalluihrici :! t, 5 H. , 10 i. , ~a ll.ball, t; lc ich cm.lcr q , II)
Fi nali:; H 19, :")3 iL S implex .1;\
;\l y thcll _, S S prachJcllhl l1iiler , cllurritische
Flc ~ i on;;el clllc nt c 13, ·13 :::H.,G fL,9f.
Fu t urum 17. 19, 21 Ncga lioll ' 7, 18, 'I i Sprachdc lll, In a lcr, Ilrartiiischc
Nega tion, aussagcuuc 17, 18 , 31 fi.
Gi lg"amcsch-Epos 8 ,IS Sprachl'er\I'Ollldlsch a ft, cllllrr .-
Gc ncliv I::!, q , ::!I, 39 ff :\cga lion, p rohihitivc 17, 18 , ur ar t. :::::!, .\6 f f.
'15 Stamm!;a:;u:;; 1.1, 15 L. 20 ,
Haploiogic 38, H NO li lil l:! iU : t O l'iS 13 3 9 , ·1 :' f. , ·17
Hic rnglyphcltscl lriit, llelhili- Ko rnilla ifl c xioll 13 fL, 39 iL, Stati\' 1.1. 15
se ll e ::! ·17 S uhj e!(t 9, q, 19 L, .\5 f.
NOlll inai isienlll 1; I) , ::!O S uHixanina hme ::: 1
11Ilpcrativ 18, .~ 'I Nom in;!lsati'. 1.1, ~O, 39 , ·i5 Su ffh:w icucrhohmg ::: 1
illfinitiv I B, .15 !\OIlLinals(;iIlLlllC I::!, .10
T o p7.au;i·Stclc 3.~
Illt cusiva/ltcrati\'<l 17 Nomi n;ll:;t ;im llll' , einfache I::,
3R, ·10 Vcrb id fl cx ion 17 L, .IJ if. .:7
l';: a!; U55Uffi xc t.t f. , 39 t, ·Ii l'\ominais tii llll llC, er wcitcr tc
Vcrbalsi ii rn illc, erwcilcr tc [7,
I';: a!> t1ss},s tclll 13 L, 39 r::: L, 3H L, .\0 f.
·IJ
J\:ausa tiya 17. ·1 3
V('rha\;;UiIlIlILC, intrallSi li\'c
}';:cilschriil, :II tald,adisch·
O hjc!.t I) , 1.1, IS, "::0, ·13 L, t7L, .~ f.
nord syrischc ::
.15 f. Vcrh a lsta lll fll C, tra Il Sili\'c 1.1,
h':c ilsc hrift, nrch nisch e "::
Opta tiv 18 Ii L , .\::! ii .
l\:cilschrift, b :\ h y lo lli~ c h c
Verbum I i H. , .!::: ff.
.1, [0, II
Vo!;abul arc 3, ·1, 9
I\ c il,;c hrift, chnr ril ischc ::! , 10 Par t il.:eln I J , 21, 23
Vuka !schw ufltI 37
l\cilscllriit, hCl hilisch c ::!, 10 Paftizipicn 18, =0
Vo hmtatil" IS, If)
l\ciIschriit,lIcn n5.s yrischc 31, Pass.iv 18, 3G, .H L
3·t. 36 passiYisdl c \ 'crbalallfl as5111l;,;' \Vamlcrwor! cr :!3
l\c ilsch rii t, u rn ri ;iischc 36 f. I) , .1 6
f\ c lisin-Stclc 3.1, 36 PatronYIlli1;a )7 Zah lwor l 11), .,:::
 III. EINZELREGISTER ZUM ARTIE.EL E . REI NER

A. Sachrcgistcr

abst rilc t 87 uciocu t ivc Ti, 83 iUlc rrogal ivc cl auses s. c/(iI/-

auurC\'iated writ iu g 69 dcmOllstralivc 3 3, ~7 , 9:: .~ , :s

accusa li ve 1'19 de rived nominals 8 3 inte rro;;<ttivc scntcll ce 95

acti ve par tidplcs 83 f. g.l. cl cr j\'{.'J 1IOllllS 87 in tervocalic 11 3
adjectives S:;, s, a. possess ive d c tcr lnilw.U\·CS ug
nolj.:ctiv.: dircc lio llal clcmcnts 9::,90 if. k illshi p terms 8S
ad verbs 9:: uoculllcu ls !;. ':CIJIIOIII;C lilJe l/ -
a llocutive ii , 83 Jlu hrs la lera l affricate 73
alph nbeti1.atio ll 70 Ic Ucrs 63
a t1al y~ i~ s . l}h()/lIIiogi crll 111111 - economic d OCtLlll CIiLS 63, 65 loanwords fi7
lj'.~is t: lll ar~cd \'cr b-basc 79 loan- trallscripti olls 67
illIimale 7i fi na l 8 1 loe:ltivc g6 ff.
apposition 99 f. iOrlus 5_ bOIl/III form s, Jra locative cons tructioll 96
ar ticle s. d4iJ/ il~' 1II'/iel,:, ill- /IJrlll_~ locu t ivc n
",;jill i!,; url iel.: Fo r tiiicaHoll table ts 55, 63 H .• 10gogr;'1Jm. fig
aspect 1:1 67 lolgug rilill s. Pscw[o -logogm ll/5
nS lrologic;11 OSHell;; 63 fre e fo r ms 83 10l:jogr a!lls, lIIarl(cr for 69

Illo d al suffixes 80
uasc 78 ge m inatc CO II ~U ll ant :,; s. COI l-
1ll0l111lllcli t a l illSCriptiollS 68
bilill!; llill 66 L, I I6 SOJlIIJl! g flllil1<1linll
m oods S::!
13iSIlLUll iuscriplioll 5(; I;c lllillatcd com:"n:lnts s. COli-
llIo rpllt.!l1lC's 7 1,73, s. iI . CJIIO-
buund iur ms 83 MII/ (II,I g':lIIillllli()1I
lfllioll /II ort)hem e
b riel.s 68 gCllIillatioll J 13 L, s. a. coJ/-
morphologica l cl ilSSCS 75
hro l,ell writing 70 f. SOl/filiI li CIIIII1f/fioll
;':C1J(.\er 77, RS, 10 / tlail s 65
gcnder s\lffi x 77 C, 91l 1I H1I1C::> s. ! h T SOlllll 'WIIIC.~
case en din g 96, 103 g ~ lIili\' e 90, 10 3 IIcga th 'c 33 , tiG, 9 3
case syste m 88 graphelHes i3 negative clauses 9.1
cl a !;,s!!;; s. IIIorJJlt%J!,iCII/ clll sses gra phi!: dcv in:: 75 no min al 93. 97
clause. s . inc/udell cl(/IfS.~S , jllhT - gra phic fcat u res 71 nominal ba!ic 78
rogll!il'~' rl'III S';~ ,
IIc/{IIIiIJC 1I0 111ilJ :!.1 cl auses 95
daus<'!;, !lolI/illol clll1lSi'S, jnc- h 01llophony 70, 7.1 IIol 11i1la i cO!ll;un.l SH , 99
clltil'': clIlU S,'S, prohibili:;.: Il ominal inilectioll ii, 93
dill/ SCS , fda/iv.: c/lIl1S':.\" illlpcrati \·c S::! lIo m in als 77. S,
dil ies 80 iL, 95, 96 im:ltIllcd clauses 9.1 f. 1I0011ill:1.ls s. deri ve(l 1101II;1I(lls
COlli poun d Yc rb -b asc 79 iucl ndcd p h rases 99 L lIo m inal i\-c 89
conco n l 95, 99 fL, 103 illdecl inablc 7S, S6. 88, 9:: 1I0u ·an imate 77
cuu jund iolls 1)= illd ciillite 83, 86 !lOIl· intervocalic II :
COllflcctivc 80 imldinite article Rfi 110 11115 83 , 93
consonant dus tier;; 7.1. illtlcpclI(leIlt pro llo ulls 9 r IIOllns s. dcrlllcd /lUI/liS, pri-
cOlIsOll allt gemiuatio n 75, 111 f. imlcpendc llt seniencc 93 III{/ry I/OIIJ I .',
consonan ts 73 ill fl c .;.l iu ll s . 110m 11111/ Illj/U, - ll\llllUCr 77
Cl)llsnnants, 1I01l-gc mjllatcd liml , ;Jubrl l ill/icctiull 1I11TliCral 83. 86
I I :: insc:riplio ll s. HiSl/luJI illScr.,
conson ants , sin gle I I I mOllllmCllf{l1 ill ser" nI),fl/ object pronOUIl gz
coutracts 6.1 itlscr., votivc ill sel', orthographic system I I::!
clluciform 68 interjec tion 83 , g ~ OTIlC US 63
cur:;ivc s.cript 68 ill terro ga iives 86, 9: , 95 ome llS, as trological s. {I s/ro-
definitc a r ticle 95 inte rrogative dauscs 96 l o;;iw/ om.·'I.~
566 REGISTER

parliciples 83 . 93 pscudo·logogrtllllS 69 s ubject pronoun g::!

participles s. active /)., !){IS- p osscssive pronoun 90 suffix s. gellder suffi.t:, modal
sille p. s. reI"SO/wls., ucolld per-
passive participles 83 t, 95 quotation morpheme 83 SO li s.,
person 77, 85, 5. a. s':;:o/ll1 qllotational words 80 syll abary 68
jJ,:I'SO Il, lidl'd /)C/'SOIi quotatio!l\O 99, 103 syllabic signs G9
personal fl alll!!!; 8S
personal pronouns 88 L, 97 L rectuJU 101 tablets S. Tr':fl.mry lablds,
personal suffi x 76, 78 reduplicated vCrb-base 79 FortijiCflliol: 1.
red uplication 98 third person form 8:::
phoneme ]1 H. resens 101 tiles 65
p honolog ic.1! analysis 71 rei:ltivc 8r, 95 tr.m scriptioll S. I Ollll-ifllll-
p h rases s. il/cilufed /J/mlScs relat ive clauses 9.1, 9G scriptioll
pluperfect 8 I relative prono uns 8G Treasury tablets 55 t, 63,
plural 77 r esumptive pronoull 90 GS, 67
pluralia tan tum 385 royal inscriptions G.I C. trilingual 65, 67
polyphony 69
possc5siYC 96, 101 seal impressions 65 unilingunL 67
POSSCSS1\'C adjective 1 0 :: second perSOn form 8:! f.
possessi ve constructions 77, second person plural form 8= verbal con cord 9t)
99. 10 1 if. sccond persoll singular iorm verba l inilection 16, 93
postpositions 88 8, verb-base 78, Bz, 90
rrcea tive 80, 8::!, 93 suffix of the th ird persoll plu- verb-base s . compollnd .'au-
prcentive clauses 95 ral 7.1 {mu, cll!arg.:d "au-Imse, re.
p rcca li vc ending 95 s uffix o[ t he secolld persall i-t- Il llplicll iell verb-base, .~ illl­
p redicate 93 scn tence s . hlfl.:pelUi':lIl S': J/ - PIc. t'crb-Imsc
prohibitive Rz , 9:: f. (,:lIce , iH!.:rroglltill c s/:III': HCC. vocativc 83
prohibitive clauses g., sibilants 7"~ f., II::: voiced 1 t.~
prohibi tive particle 9-' simple vcru-ua::c 78 voiceless 1 t .1
primary nOllltS 87 singular 97 vot ive inscrip tions 66
pronominal object 91 spir:lllt I O::! vowels 73
pronouns s. illrf'~/}cJldl: llf /Jr., stops 7::!, I II vowel, epenthetic 7.1
object pr. , IJ;: r.~o ll(ll /Jr., j)OS - s lops, yoiced I!::!
.~cs5iuc pr. , rda/jlle pr., s lops, \·oicelcss rI:!
rc.'iUlllpliv,; p r ., subject pro Sturteva nt's law 115

B. Wort- tu1d Formantienregister

/11/ (cli tic) So I/III 79 I!I (personal s uffix) 76
111I~·1 (gender suffix) 77
'/II (pcrsonnl slIffix) 76 /1/ (gender suffix) 77
Ih ~11 (c1 itic) 81 1111 (suiHx) 78 III (personal suifix) 76
IlIsl (pcrson:ll s ufiix) 76 Ill/ S) lin/ (clilic) So L
IMI (pe rsonal s uffix) 76 1/1/1/ (clitic) 80 ltirilllflllllll{ 80
Ihul (personal suffix) 76 /lI i! (ditic) 80
hum 'Iilt!k Go 111111 79 Itlil (clitie) 80 L
-hilt 8 1 1lIllilllfllP/ 80
/0/ (gender s uffi x) 77
llil (geuder suffi x) 77, 78 I"ftl 80
/h/ 8) //>1 (gender suffix) 77 - )'11 8,
Iii (n umeral) 83 -Plfl S,
-Iw/ 81
/1"1 (gender suffix) 77
{iiI (clilic) 80 /rlllill 79
 IV. EINZELREGISTER Zm"j AIUIEEL A. I<AlI1MENHUBER

(H etildisch, Palaisch, Lltwisch mul Hicroglypl161l11twisch)

Sach-, vVort- und Formantienregister

-a- Dcldillation 288 Ableitullgss),stcm, hcthitischcs Aldmsaiiv cler Richtung :::00,

-a- St;imme 193, 198, ~79 ~18 30~
-(/- StiiliLIIlC, dcvcrbalc sub- Ablcitungcll von No mina Aldmsaliv des \\'cgcs :::00
stantivis chc ~9.1 fremder Herlmll[t '9' A!dwsativ, inHerer ~oo
-n- SWmmc, feminine ::88,3.15 Abstrakta 137,1.1.;, 185 Aklmsativobjckt 357
-a- Stanunc, urspriillgliche Abstra\;:ta, althetll. Heutr., Aldmsativobjekt, doppeltcs
28::: auf -!ll :::!08 -':'00
Abaucicfungcn des crcrbtcn Abstrakta aui -cl Il. :::99 Akkusalivobjel,t, cnklitisches
Sprachzustalldes 26 5 Abstral;:la , dcvorbale ncutr. pronominales .:200
Abldirzllng 170 aui -!II 300 Akrophonie 153, 165
Ablativ, ablativus 205, ::08, Abstrali:ta, idg. neutraie, auf Aktionsartcn -':'16, ~18 if.,
2II, ::1.1,25.1, 30G -l :::99 :::!56, 315
ablativllS auctoris ::05, ::15 ;\bstrakta wie [ullill Ilo 300 Ali:tioIlSarlcubeziige, idg. -':'53
ablativus comparalionis 205, Abslrai;15uffix :::64, :::71 A Ii: tiol1Sarteliull terscheidung
257 :\bstraklsuHix, <lites denomi- 3q
Ablativ del' TrcHuung :::05 nales :::97 .: \h:tiv 1.1·1, :::15, :::18, -':':::9,
Ablaliv der Ursachc ::05 .!\bweichun gell, ercrbte :::6.\ L -':'·fO, Q3, 31.1 L, 317
Ablativ fchkncl bei Possessi\'- Ac!;criJaukuitUI" 3.13 :\!;:th· -bi-Eonjugation :::3:::! if.
pronomina ::05 :\djektiv 183, 186 , 193, :::70, Ahtiv Illlperativ 32::: fi.
alJJaUvus instrumenti ::::05 :::73 AI,tiv lmperativ, idg. 33.!
: \blativ mit -lIl1:;a 199 :\djekth' auf - {l1!t- 197 Aktiv -!IIi- Konjngation :::!':::3 L
Ablati\' 5g. 1-'1. 19.1 H. Adjeldiv del" Zu£chorigkeit AI,Ii" Priiterituln des Palai-
Abl [l Ii v I I nstrulUCII tal .15 ·1, 16g, 17:::, :::!61, .-':'73 L, scliell, Luwisclicll, UiJ(.l Hic-
auf -ali ::71, 306 :::76, 3 0 7, 3·;0, 357 roglyphctllm\·ischen 3:::0 if.
Ablaliv/Ills lrlllllcntaiis 15.~, Adjei,tivablcitungen :::73 _·\l,zcntuntcrschicd 177
::°5 :\djeldivsuffix :::7.1 -Ill :::~J7
ALlnliY und lnstrulllcutaiis, adjeli:ti\'ische Ausdrnd,~- -a{(l.)a- :::97
heth. 303 moglichl,eilell :::00 -a{li- :::97
Ablaut 179, 19~, 10·1. fL, Ig8 , Adverb 183, :::01, :::07, :::70 AlpJwbcl, semitischcs 17:::!
22;), :::!:::7 L, 235, 2.12, 267, Adverb, distributives :::!70 Altertiinuichkeit, indogenua-
-.:.77 iL, -.:.80, -.:..'lS, -.:.87, 302, Adverb illl Ablativ, abgelcitc- nischc :200, ~IO, :::55, 309
3q f., 333, 337, 3·1·6 l es ~05 Altes Testamcnt 1"0, 1:::6
Ablaut I/U: II, heth. 2.p Acdicuia (Fliigclsonoc) IS::: "Alteuropaische Spracbge-
Ablaut· bei substantivischen "agglutinicrendcr" ("uoter- meinschaft" 3.!:::!, 3.16 if.
-i- und -11- Stiillllllen 19.1 orc1llcnder") Typus 337, Analogicbildung rS5, 191,
Ablaut, imJogl'l"manischcr 3·15 :214, -.:.:::6, :::!38, 335
136 L, 22·1 L, 317, 3 19 -I!i-/-i- Stammc H)5 Analogieform :::00
Ablaut, qualltibti\'c l" :::!3.! al,l,aciische Eutsprechullgell An;J.logiczauber -.:.ofi
Ablautpositioll ::::::.~ ,86 Anschauungsrnaterial des he-
Ablautreste :::!5.1 Aldmdisierung 350 thitischen Alltags 164.
Ablautstllie 30::: Ald-.adogramm 1:::5, 175,180, -(1/)/11- Ablcitung ~93
Ablaut-Umbildung :::3.~ ,83 -allt- comm. in heth. Zeitan-
Ablaulvorstuien dcs Urindu- "Ald,acIo-Hittite" Schriit- gaben :::9.1
germanischen 338 system 163 -(/111-, crcrbtes al,tives ParH-
Ablaut-Wuchcrn :::65 Aldmsativ 15.1, :::00 i:. zip auf :::6.t
568 HEG1STEH.

Aurist ,, 16 L, 3.:6 Bilderschrift, heth. u. krc ii- DCllJou;;trativprolloIllCU, idg.

Aorist , iug. ~55, 316 sehe ::::00 3°!)
AorisHorrnanticn 316 Bilderse h rifl (helh. Name) DClllal, auslaul c nder :308
Aurisistan ltll 315, 3-10 16 7 Deponentia :35U
Aporie s. Scllrljl-..J/J()/,i,; Bilde rschdft, lirc tischc 15 I, Dcponeulia {l'I le uia t;lIltUlllj
Appcllatiy;t ::!.19 ::60 :nu
Arbdtshyputhcsc 3·P, 3-16 Bilderschriii, s UlIle risehc 157 D c \cl"!nillatin': 1.19,151,17_1,
an;h:iulogischc illdiziclI :!59 Bilillguis 15u, 105, ::::66 180
arch~iulugischc Quellcll 3.;0 bouslropheuon IG7, 171 Dc\·crlJalia 191, 190, ::::18 f.
archaisdlc wurzel f1ckticrcndc Buche nwurt ].lO Den~rbalja a uf -jjll- : : 17
ZUge 3.15 BuchstabeTlschrift 17:: Deverbalia aui -t- :: I:l.~
archai scher Sprachzu~t;lllJ. illl Uuchstauelllcichcll 159 uiaJel(tisc he Spaltullgell ].10
\-Icth. 3::::2 D ialcl>tisoglosse 185, 188,
archaisc hcs Relih 3-15 Chrono logie L:::::;, lOG, I 7~, 19:::: , ::::::·1, :::50, 3·1:3 f.
Archaisienltlg 13::, :::-17 ISlI, :31)1), J-!~, 3·16 DialcklisQglo:;sc , iug. ].1::
Archaislllus :::15, :!oo, 303 eOlll!!lUUe s. C; ,;IlItS COIllIlIUI1': Dialcldgcogr<lphic, idg. 3. ~ o,
-(lSI/- , Zugchorigkcitssllfiix :295 3·~3
Aspci;t 315 Oniiv, dnlivlIs 15-1, 18:3, '9J, Diaieli:tographi u (ur)indoger-
-a U II /i-, heth.-luw. Zugchurig- :10 1 L, ::0.\ m;tu jsche ] .1 9
keit,;suffix :::63. :::95 dativ1\s :mc.lm·is ::o. ~, :: 15 walel, logra pllisehe Stellul\g
Assimilatioll, rcgrcss i\"c :!::5 Dati\- bci d- iii!" "uicitt des H e th. -Lul\'. illuc ritalb
Assimilic l"lm g .::: I::: h a iJell" :30.1 rIcs I urJogel"m:wi schell
-/l /a/,- A\Jstralda, UCIIOlllilla lc Dativ (entiemtercs Objd: t) 3·IMf.
18G, ':::9G ~O·I lJialelnuiugie des Urindogcr-
-HII- (Sufiix Lie r Verualaustra l,· datinls ethiclls ::0.1, :lll mauischc u 3.1::::
t;l) :::8.\ JJati\' (-..:: Celliliyj, lyuiselter ])ialeln \"crhiilllJisse, idg. 3-13
Auispaltuu g rlcs LuwischclI in uOlllillaler ::70 DiaUlcsc :3!5, ~51, 315
lL Cll C Dialel;tc :::!7::: Dati\· uu er Lol,aliv "' - ~i: ·-i, DiphtOllge, 1'I10llOplltOl lisil.!-
Auscir ucli:sfoflllC!I, vcrsch ie- ielg. :w:: run!:; uer iu!:;. ::::8 r
dcnartigc :::10 Dati v s taU Gcuith' :: 0:3 lJissimilatiOll 137, :386, 3!t!
A tlsd rllcli:swciscli :!:! I f. D;ltiv stall. Ge nith' fiir " ge- Doppdlmll sollallz 177 f.
Ausrlruckswcisell, ililiogen lla- Irlirell" :30:: Do ppe\l;:ollsollallz im Alllalll
nische :;; I 9 Da ti v- AI,I, llsa ti '., ellkli i i~cll (' r 17], :;:: 5
Ause ill<lndcrcntwiek lung (les ::::09 Duppclll:llllell de r he th.
HcthilischcII, Palai~cll c ll Dativelldllug -i, hc th. (-Iuw.) l\:o ni ge 15 8
unci Luwi~ehcn in Anat olie n ::6:3 DoppelscJm..'ihu llg r 77
~65 fl., ~69 Dativ-Lol,aliv 186, '93, ::00, ])orn 151
A \ls[~ illa!\cie rell t wic \; IUIlg, -::::08 , 30li, 35::::, 35(j DreigeJllls- VJI tersche iduIl g,
llaehtr;i::;lichc 33G Oat.-I.oli:. auf -Ii, lUI\". ::71 iug . ::::.;9
A usein<llllie rclI twiddllu g der dativllo.· locati,·us cumparatio - Drei-Tcillp us-S ys te!l!, alIL':>
Sprac hcll in Anatolicn uis ::::57 3 17
uac htn·lgliche :::.~9 - Daller d er \ 'orb e rcitung- ciller -Ii/I, <lllsbutcndcs :362
Ausgrabllllge!l ~Gl Haudlllllt; ::::::::1 Dual 19":2, :307, :: 5·~, ::::79
Austallsch dc [ End lJll gcu de[ defel,tiv :309 iug. DllalelluulI g 30·1, 319
~ . unci 3. Persoll Sg. 3:2:::: D cf el( t.i\·i t;it, al te rtiillllidlC Durativaauf- H a- :317
:\W;Lal}sch zwischen -flllt- lIlHl ::09 Dllrativ-Disiributiv 178 f.
-tWIII- :!rH Defillitio ll Urimlogenl lauisch, ::::r7 L, '::20, :3::::8 L, ::!3~), '1:31
Imlogerrll<iuisc h 330 ff. Duraii\·-Distriuuti\' auf -sk
J3alJuvrihi 183 Ocldiuatioll, allalytischc Ill :3 ::! 13, ::5:;
Bedeulullgslllodifizieruug :::: 17 Oc](]iuatioll, id;.;. ::5·1, ~ 7 6 "cinrativcs " -I/I/Iw-{awlljil-
Bcgrifi fUr "Did.!" 3.17 DcJ.:\ilJatioll, schw<lciw :::88 :!IH
J3cieiJt(!!; ::::00, ]05 Dcldiuatioll, '·011 cntwici,elte, ll UT1J 51 (h eth. J-;:i.illig:;titel)
Bdebtcs u. Uubclcbtcs (vn- illl Singular IH7
tcrschcidlln g) ::55, 305 Oelilina ti!)! l')- Umg:estaJ tlllig Dyn<l.:;tic S uppiluliullIas, hnr-
Bcschworung, agypliscllc, :ltJtJ riscJ1C 175
gCgCH Asialellkr:.Illli:heit 153 DeillOJ1Slratil'prOllOmcn ::::06,
Bcsitzverh;iltnis (mir gehort) :::01), :31~, ::I.l, 307, 308, 310, c!1I-SchW<l.lt!,CII, Ullilldugcfllla-
3 1 :::: Ilisches :330
Bildcrsehriit 15::::, 10.1, 170, De!llollsirativprollolllclI, h.- ,:/II-\Vcc hscl, gmpliisc.\1 be-
173 III\\". 1I . ].;.-11111'. 170 din gIer :330
 EINZE LREG ISTER ZUM Aln I KEL :\. KA) Ii\IEN HUBER

cfa-Wcchscl, lla htraglid lC[ · 1~H(/rl-c.\I1-, he til. nomina ac- Flc:'(i o u s ull l gc~ta l illn g
i1ll 110-
::::!::·I, : : ! ·15 lio ni s auf ::::!go millalcll und prollominalcll
Ei gClllliltlUII !,;CI1, hetll. '10 ' ,ds/l I'- Abstra k ta , dC liomiuil le Plural COIIlUiUflC geneds
Eigcllb iid u ngcl1 . hl w. 301 296 337
E igcnbi ld l1 l1gclI 1111 P lu ra l EI YlIloiogic 137 i. , 173, 175, FlexiOlls n :rlust bci KOllli ll;}
:1 0 ; I g8 , :::1 1, :::~5, 235, 260, :::99, ~5·1
EigCllCUtwickh11lg 30G , 337 3-:-1, s, a. r'olksclYlllu fog i.: , ilcx idsclw EntJ:; ld s lllL ;.! li .H y-
E igC ll hciicll , gClllc illl uwiscltc lVII,.:;dd Y/l1 olagi~ !!US/IIS';
::77 t:tYlllOlog is chc Srclmlatio ll F luchiorlucl I S:! L, J5:::! , 356
EigcllllOlmc lt 18:: :!5 r Fliigelsul!lIl! 16_\, 166
Einil u U, frc md,;prachigcr ::56, ctYUlologisierell flc Bch,u ld lunl; I:Of lll;\Us t a u5Ch 30-1
~65, ::(iri L, ~;3. ::75 , ::I) /) VOII i'Cr50IlCIl -, O rL ,;- mal FOflll\'criust :: rH
Eilll cituu gcn ;'.\1 heth. h is- zlIm Teil ~\Uch Giillenw m CIl !"0I"Sc!111!l gs richtun g ).15
turi~ch e tt T ex lcn 17U ~58 F r a gc prollolliclI 20ii i., :! I:: ,
EinwOllicieru!l g 163 c t Ylllologi"icn!!Ldc :'Ilc thude 307 , 3 -, 6
EiuwaTllierllll g del" H ct hii u - q6 fra gc- lind R ciati\"jl!"OHOme n
Ll1wic r iioer den I":ilu!ms us c lYlllo logi;;icrcndc Sch reibUllg kui - 309
lI ach l\lc in;)siCII ::59 18,; Fragmon t;.: ill 1l1lbcJWlln ic r
ci llzc! spr ilcilliche Wcitcrcn t - Spmchc 266
falt uli g :!5:! "F:a:t iti\'"'' <lui '/1!I!I-, dcno- Frl!lI ldwortcr 188 , ::-19 , ::8 1
ciuzdsprncJllicilc s p ;l!c ElIi ~ lIIinal e 2 Ii FU 11 1niulI 2 53 . :!'J.\
w id du ng 313 falm ltativpr Gcbrauch ,\::6 l : l1nl,t i ul!s l o~ i ghil ::~3
-d, halt. Zugehurig li:c ibsuffi x FClllillillUIIl, ;lItes illduge rma- Fulur :::!15 L, ::: r!) , ::55, 35 1
297 f. n iscil cs 2H r. FULUr Ill dil,ali\-, iel;.:, ,.6
Ciliph a lisch c :\usdr ud:sweh{' FClllin illlllll aui -i/-jii ::88
216 FClllilii n u Ul , s l';i te E II 15tchung
E lld ung :: 77 tic;; 135 Gcu urts l1all1Cll,ll u rrischc ISS
ETIlltlllg -[II: s ta H obi 2.IU FelllillinlJlll, i\ . a. ~':I /U .l jClI1i- G cgclls lallU;;bcl.dd!l llI llgcl!
Emi uHgc n des Sg . und Pi.. Ilil1 II III 18(1
particlle G lcichheit oder F Clllininuildlln 1,l ~(' 9 Gcgcll tuusluIe 23.1
Zusamme nfa ll dc r 25.1 fi g m<l etYlllulug ica ::00 Ge lilci IlSilml.;eitcll. ur-hc th i-
E lld u ngcll m il l,us:itzlic hem -s- sch rifllif;hc fi :derll ll g dcs H e- ti5ch-ll lwische ::07
:: 37. :!_Il t hii isc.hcH 180 Gcltl iu ario n 17!)
End lUl :.!cn Illit zu siil zlic hcnl F lc xion 1.1 0, :210, :! I ::, ::09, CCllCa logic 339 i.
-{ -(-i -Ia, .;-toi) 238 3 40. s. ;!_ Numillltfficrioll, gCllll ti!;ch ::5:::!
E n lditika 173 , 193 , :!52, }·19 fJrollflmill olfl,·.l"iOIl , PS ..·Uill' - Genili\' U.I, 191 f., ~or fl.,
Eilk lit il,afulgc ~ II f krioJl ::U!) , 277, J o G, 3·IG, 35::
E ntfa ltung 25 7, 338, ]-13 Flex ion cle f i'\,.H Hi ll:! III1lI P 10- Geni\i\' aui -I ::7.1
E nl r..llltul t,;st hcoric 27.~ !l olllill ~ im gell lls r:Olllllllllle CPI,i l ;'- a UI - _~ 27-1
E lItlelllluli g a us u. lIe ih. 297 ::76 {;en iti,- " d cille,; Vaters seiu
Ell ticlll lUllg \-011 1I0 In ili0l lCiL F ll.!x ioll cler Zahlwurll.!r I-_~ illl Kurf" ::o:::!
;\lnrphclllc lL -::66 Hr: thitisch cli l cil~ nominal Geuitiv, atijckti\,j"cltcr :::!73 ,
EUt\\-icldun g 25:: lind te its pro ll u llIinal 19:: 3 fl : :!
Elltldcl,lllll g, illllcrlwthilischc Flex ion des midg. Pcrickts GClliliv, frcis cl lWc bclldc r ::U3,
:::]8,3 00 3} 1 :!22, 20 1, 271, ]00 , 3.17
EILt wicl, lullg, illllcrla Ic il lisci lC F lex iulI, halh lironoilliltaic Genil i\-, kollel' lh"cr ]05
300 :! I:! GClli t iv , a lter , idg_ :! 7,1
·c/o-Aolaut, id~ _ :::: 9 F lex ioll, id ~, 296, 3_1 0 gl"u iti\'tls lIIatcri:lc ::0 3
Erbe ans d t: m Imloger- Flexbll I'(ln GuttCrullllLCIl li nd GCllit iv mi l suffigicncm (Vo-
manische ll 209 , :: 18 , ::77, H crrscllcrti li:lll, Ic ilwc isc l;al + )-11 ::70
::78 H., ::97 L, 30 1, :\u.;, 3:::7, Erli ta lTllu g- tier ::69, :!7.'i gCll LtLV US objct:tivHS ::03
33 6 F lexioll \'011 ';1;', I' /Jli-, und ge nil i l'lts parlilil'1I5 :::0.;1, :::!ofi
E rlm-or( !.lo, 196 , ::8.1, :: 1i6, /w i- :: 13 L GCll il iv P lural ::1::, :: q L,
:!90 Flcx iOi lscllti u ngclI , E ntlch - 356
E rbworl , il idogcrlllaniscl ics IItmt:;clI I-Oil ::70 Gell. I'lu r . a u f -,:/1:1111 2I1
196, 198, 3 56 Flcx io llSCm l u!l gcll , Ilr-hcth. - CClI ith- Plural nu! -e-I/:-IIII ,
·-aa- 297 Ill\\,. :10U f. prOllullliu a ler 3t3
Ersatzlwllstn lktiOilell fUr die Flcx io!ls;;cil cl lta, llac lt tr;iglieh gc n i tivus posseSS LVUS Ill:! i.,
indogcrln!lnisclLc }":ompara- rcg ulicrtcs jungllc tltilischcs :: 0 1 L, -::0,\ , :: It, : :! 7I, :27-1 ,
lio ll, h cthit. ~O_ I 176 351

t
57 0 RE GISTER

Gcn itiv, p r iidiknti\'cr '202 i. , Glcichld:mg 15 5 li c lilito logic II !) , 137

::::;1 Gl ci tlilut 27.\, :::80 -bi-, hurrisches Zu gel! orig_
Gcu itiv, pronoll Li ll a lcr =70, Glosscnl;cil ~B7 liCitssu ffix 265
:: :;·1. =9 8 Glosscn l;cil wortc r J3=, !.j .\ L '--[Ii-l\on jugation ::15 , ::: 17 L,
Gen iliv S ill gular 169, 171 L, :::8 1, .:::96 f. ::::3 i., =·1::: £.. ~· 1 6, :::5:: , )17,
:!oti, ::: 1::, ::!fiI, '276 . 337. 3.19 Gutlcrbildc r 1 U] 3::::, 3::7, 33::, 3·\6
Gen. Sg. a uf -d :! I I Guttcruilmcll !.I3, :::5·, -bi- l\onjuf:<Itio n, E n clull gcn
GcrliUv Singular ,l1!['';! (ni ch t - Goit er-, )Jcrs ullcll- und Orts- del" :::'::3 f.
itl;;.) 31z t1<lmcu. allatolische :::66 -!Ji-I\ Ol!juga lioll, hctbitische
Gell. 5g., idg-. 303 GUrr- HA US 170 31.1.337
Gcniti\· S ingular, nOlllillalcr GO'rT WETIERGO'r r 1 5~ -lli-l":onj ugalion , hc lh. (E n t-
::!7Z Gottheit I\II Jl<lpa s. h-IIPIIP(I s tehung) 3::9 fL
GCllit iv Sg., Ersatz fUr dell Gotthcit Sautas s . S{III/as -bi- I\ o uj_ Prasells, heth. 33 l
:::73 GOlthcitcngr up pclI :::G3 -bi- I":onjug<ltio!l mit c1cm idS.
Gcuiliv Sg,f PI. =55. 305 Gotthcitellllnu Guttcrgruppcl1, Pcrfeli:t, heth . 330
Gcniliv Sg., pronollliJ1:J icr ::73 palnisth c l.!= -!ti-Pr;\sen s, hetl! . 330
gClliti\'115 subjccU\'us ::03 Grallunati lt 3.10 -[ti-Vcri.lell, abgclcitete 239 if.
Gcnitiv, U LJcr lrng uu g ill d ie Gra llllll;tt il., (a ll)hc ihitische H ieroglypl!cn . agypt ischc
S uhjc!; lstclIUllg :::03 :l.~ 7 1::: 7 i.
GCII(liv , \'orausgcs lclltcr :!o3 GraULHw.lil" hcihitisr..!tc t 80 ff. I-l icroglyphe!l, h c thitische
Gcnitiva tlrib u t 35 7 GralllHlatik, indogcrma!liscllc 1 :: 1, 1~7, ':::9 , 1.1·1, 11\6,
Gcn iti vcrsatz ::73 168 !.I 8 fL, [57, 161, [G ., f. ,
GClliti\·crsat7., a d jcl>ti\'ischcr gral1 111latische (1!lOrpholo- 166 f.. 178, 1801.
:n i.356 gisehe) B crtih r un g 3-13 hie rog lyphcnl uwischc In -
Gc niti""crbindung 351 Graphil. 1.:1 L, 173 i., 176. sch riftc li ::61
Gcu lili7.suiiix 153, ::7 1 193.199, ZII , ZIG. :::33, :::39, hicrog ly p hculu wiscilc Lau t-
CCII US, Gcsch lcch t 15·1, ::og. ~·II, ::·13 i., ~5·1. :l6 7, 273, vertreLUngcn 3.,1
=79 280, 301, 30~ , JI9, 338 Hilfsvc rb ::::::0
(Gen us) ge nre ;Juime ct genre Graphilt , ;l ltcrc, llc fur -{Ii Hi mlllcisgo tt, 'l'ageshil lUUc l
iuau imc 31.1 331 u u d Ta g, idg_ ::B.\
GCIIUS co m m u ne 15.\, 170, Gr:ll'hik, '!"iicl;e der 13 1 -tli(!) - :::96 L
19::, 198, ::53. =70, =79, ::86, graphischc Diiicrc!l? icru ng- 175 I-1oc hs tufe 191 , :2::B , :::3.1
:::98,308, )13 grap h ische Spielcrci t8 t Hoh.taiclsch reibcr 16;
genus t.:OllllllllUC, Dbergang in GROSS-PRIESTER 170 HOlllonyme 159
~8., Gr und!.Jcdcll tllllg 347 Homoph o n ic 15 1
GenuS illl Ur- l-Ielhitisch-Lu- Gru mlformcll, uriudogcrl ll :t- hUiT isch e Gcbu r ts n:tlll crl s.
\\'isch!!!! 19:! nische JJ1 , 3.15 GtUu r /.'illrlmC:1I
Gellus, [clg-. 3l.1 hurriscl ler i\lIltnrcinfiu(\ s.
Gellus m asclIlin ullI 19=. ~5J, y, he thitisch -Iuwischcs 338 Kllltllrd,,/ III{J
30·1· l!·Scl!wuud, s piitcr :!97 hybrid 1S9, 191, :':: 15
GC II II S fc mini llu llI 137. 19:::, -[I-SUi IllIllC z8G I-1 ypo!;lasC (= i1cxivische
~o7, 253, :!79, 30·1, 3-1-1 f. I·Ial ldclsl;olonicll, a ltassyriscilc EntgleislLllg) :'::03, ::09 , :::.::)
Ge ntls llc ut rulIL ' 5.1, 11)= , 121, 1'::3, 10 1 Hrpos l asic ru n g :::71
J93 , 198, ~79, 206, :::95 , ~!J8 , H cil ssymboi IS :: H ypothese ~(jo, s. <l • •·Jrudls-
30." 308, 3·15 Hcrimuft, fremdc 198 hJ'/Jufhl's':
GelluS s. a. F .:millilJlllJI, NC If - r-leri m n it.o;suiiix: .::68, 318 Hyputh ese \·0 111 Ind o-Hittite
{ r /lm Herrsc hcrtitcl ~5~ ]:'::0
Gelills, Ilrspriinglichcs 287 llcthi t isch-tocharisehcr Ku n-
GcuuSllll1crscheiclllug :::78, ta l;t 3.:.1 -i-DcJdiuatioll :: 6·1 , ~75, 337
337 Hetll i tiScil ( I~ehi ill terpcr- -j (Priisl! ll SI;cllnzcichcn) 3 19,
GCllllSun tcrsc h cid u ng illl Plu - tationj J.\ ~ f. 3~3,33 1 i.
ral 306 hcth . .Eigcllcn i wid:lullg :::51 -i-St:imme 186, '9.\, :: 80,
GenWi-Uuterscl!eidulI g, iclg-. H c th itischc Gc:;c tze 1.13,17.1 =8.1, :: 88
=5·1 "hClh iliscilcs Luwisch " :l61 -i-StiiuIlUC, d cvcrbale sub-
Geschlcch t s. a. G",l!tS he t II i t isth -I n wisch-germ an isch s tanl jvischc 195
Gcschlccht, grallllllatisci!cs 3·17 -i-StJmrlle, Wuchero, def
:::69 11CUlilisch -luwisch-la tCLuisc i! ~i9
Gcrllnclinllll, latcillischcs :::=~ (-oslio·mnb riscl!) ).17 -i- u n d -a·Dcldinat ion ::1 I
Gcsct7.C, llcthi lischc s. J-ict- H cthitis icrung hatt. Berll fs- -i- UlILl -a· F l ex i on , Schw<llIl;en
hi lischc Gcsctze !.Jczeich nu ngcn ~98 zwischen ::BI
 EINZELREGISTER ZU?I ARTIKEL A. KAi\E\IENHUBER 57 I

i/u -\Vccl!se! , g raphisch bcdin g- Indiffe rc nz gcgcn iibcr Tc m pus !\.:lSUS, hurl'. :: 7I
tcr ::.15 u. D ialhcsc ::IU K astl'S, ooUguer, Li cr bctontcll
I deogramm s. I Vorl=c:icilCI! Imlil,ali v ':: 15.315 Pcrsona lprouowill a :: 10
idcOb'Taphisch 168, 19G, ::01, Iniinitiv 137, 17!.l, 183, 185, l\:ls u sattra ktiOll '::09
35:: ::: IU, ':: 19. :::~.!.I, :: ::B , ::3 3, :::·'·1 . r"::asusbelcg 19:::!
idcographischc KCIlIllcicllcn ::.~ u, ::6::: , :::9u, 315 l':as usbcwuOtscin '::10, 30:::,
lSI In fiuitivs},s ic lll helh. 337 3 0 .1
-jim ::94 Ju iinilivs),s tc lll , Ite lh. -!u w. I"::asuscndungcn l~:::!, :::!76
- jktl - (Kominnlsuffix ) ::63 :::u:: K asusl;cbril uc h 191), '::06
- illi ::97 llliix 310,31:: K:ls usgebrnuc h, beth. '::57
-j/t, . (unfl eli:t icrtcs S uffix ) :: 13 Infix - n::- :::76 Kntcgoricn Z5 9
-iii· '::97 I lljunlaiv 31.1 f. l\;}lcgoricn des IueloS., auf-
Impcra tiv ':: 15. :.! '::z , '::·P. ::55 , Injunldh', idg. 3 16 falli gc Vercinfachullg cler
3 1 5, 3 1 7,3'::5, 353 Inlw ngrucllz ::77. ,::87. 3·19 , r cich h;li ligell gralllllla-
ltu pcr aliv Singular ::.::8 353 t ischen ::: j3
Illlpcrati\·, Sg. 1. _ ~_ Inlwllgrllcllzell zwische n Sub- Kausativulil IS B L, '::17 L,
1mpcrati\', Singular, 3. 15·;, jekt Lind PriidiiinlSILOrllcn :::!j'::
'::5 1 '::75 I':ausati\'a auf -nll- '::] 1, 3'::3
Impcrativ, P lura l, :: . .::::8, ::3 7, in \lerhcthitisch :::.1 3 K:lusalivsuffi x 3::: I
3::::3 ilillcrhc th itischc :\us priig u IIg Kcilsch ri ft 138, 151, 153 ,
Impcra ti v, IlIum l 3. ::::::::1:1 JI.I 157 i.. 16 1, 10-1, 170, 17::: ,
Impcrat iv, idg. 316 inncrhc thitischc, ll:lc h lnl!;· 181 . ::u8 . 3:::::
Impcrativ"ledium 15.' lichc Ei!;cncntwicl. lu !lS 333 Keilsch rift. a ldmdische 1::: 9.
Impcr ativ )lediulll, Siu!::ulnr, inllerhcthi tische Neubildtlng 16S. 180, 350
g. 3 18 , 3::7 3::3 , 330 I":: cilsch rift, hcthi tbche 173,
irnpcra tiv !'I.leoiulIl, P lural, 3. inncr·hcth itisch-l uwi sch 32 1 17g, 19 t1
3::::7 inncrn -h clh.·lu w . Eatwid:- 1': ci IsclL rif tgra 11 II i \" Spr;:\clI·
lmpcrati \'- l':cnllzcichclI '1/ lung 3:::: ullwiridiclll,cit d er 18.::
3::7 ill1 le r-h c thi tisch·l tl w iscl le l>eilschrift- Iuwisch -11:11 313
Impcrfcl.: l d es Pl'iisCIl!; I:UllIllCS, 1, liiru llgsllloglich !w i lell 1': cilschrif tschrci be r 170
3. 6 I nsch riiL \'o m N i ~:ln lO ~ 166 Kcilsdu'iflzcich cn . lIlch rd e u·
illlpcrfc!a h ' :2 13, ::::0 f. I nstrulIH.'nta l '::03 . :::!05 , : : 08, ligc ::::::: 5
hllperfel·:t iver Aspel,! 315 :::S.I, ]06 l "::CIUlzcicllll lLU g \'011 :-.J'olllinD.
in choativ priiscniien ::17 1llstrumcIltai SI;. PI. 19.1 if. COHUll. durcl. vol;alischCIl
IndciinitpronoIIlcn t71 , 178. 1llstrUIllclliai d cs i\litl els :::!os Sta llll nallslaill ::,99
zo:::, ::oG L, ::!!Z, 3 0~ ins tr ume ntal in Lier Bedclitun g Eelltulll· Chal'a!; tcr 1::9,137
Indil; ati\' :::S5,3r7 "mit, Illi ts;[ml" s. "mil, /IIil- I':cn l u m-Lau tvcrtret ullg 339
Inuogerm;tllisch 303 , 331,3.18 s{lm!" l\: ClltUlll- HUt! Sa t<l 111 sp rachen
iJ ldogcrm,ulisch (Entstc h ull g) i!Ltr a[) ~ i i i v und impcrfcl;: li\' 3·11
338 ':: 13 KOLligstitcl , Itc lh it. IS:: , 1 6.~,
I ndogcrmanjscil ( Rcl(olls trul,- Irrca lis s. a. lalllJr llll, VUTUs l
lion) 3H 1rrca lispa r t ikcl ::: 19. ::56 I,:orpcrtcilht:7.cichn llllg .::87.
jdg:. A ll lmiipfuugspuu lne :::: 70 Isog l055c :::::!j, ::!·IS, ::: 8.1, :::89 , 3·17
im!ogcfJu;m isch c Ansatz· 3-13 , 3·,6 ii. Ko ll cl, tivsuffix - Illlf- :::!Go, ::76
pUll l,te , schlllale 137. ::65 Isog lo55C!l, " i lalo" -iwi tische l":: ollcktivulIl I SG
idg. ~\ ll sga ll gs basi:;, c"cniuelle 3·\:::! I\omparatiomsrstcill ::5 7
::G5 I ~ tanu\\,:l - Din l ckt 3::.1 l':omp:lraHv :::!S7
ill ciogen n alliscile :\ lI sgn ngs· It crativ ::17 l"::Olllpl clllClL lc, aldwdischc 183
punUc :::::s Komplctclllcnlc, phonctischc
indogcrltla n ische Untcrschci- ] agdbcgr ifi, illdogc rmOlL lischcr 18 3
u UlIgcn '::::!l . 89 Komposil a odcr ] UX laposi ti-
ill do~erlIla ni sc hc
Un lcrschei· jUlI gg rallllJl al ischc Sch ulc m um , hclh . 305
d u ug zwischen Pr;lscns· , 339,3.:4· KOlllpusita . idg. 30S
Aorist· und Pc rfclds ystclll jUi lgitc lhiLische :\usg!eicl ls lell- l"::olllposilatypcn wic dt. ,.Jug-
::5 1 dellzen :::!q. a/,/d lind Wei/Mon:
indogcrm. Vcrh:illn isse :::: 5 Kompositi olL, \'erualc 183
Indogcrmanistil, 119,1 37,339 l;Jgfq-Wcch sd 195 ,,1':om posiUo llsfug eu " mit -f~
iudogc rm:lIlislisch orlen tlcrtc l"::aSIIS ::79 tm d -/I' 305
Werl,c W ill Hcthitischcn !{;tSl\S des P r ;iclil,a lslLolllcns I"::ongrlLcn z ::00, :: II, 30:::,
13·\ 11)9 35G
57' REGfSTER

l':Olljll kUolI 18], :07 i. L rutlchrc Lj O },Icdi a q .I , 15 1, 18 1, Z07

KOll j uu k li\' :: 51,315 lautl ichc Isoglosse/l 3-13 l'olcd ia a:;pii'a l a 177
KOllj uulai\'. idS. ___ , 3Ifi la u tlichc Vcriilldcru ng ::67 Mcdia, indogcrlll<lnische 177
K OIISolIHlIlcngru ppc ::1 I L n llrcgcl s. Lmtl;:csd:: :\1t!diiJiclitiUllgCIl 3:!-l. it
KUl IS01 I<l nic lischrc ibu lig 174 L;mtst allU 17::, 17.1. o S C, :,! Ied ialfonu, idg. 3::9
l":OI ISOIl:JlIlCltsch rcilmng , helll . 1 30, lS I , ::07 fIIcdialc Form cu "Oll Duraliv-
177, :: 09 La u tI b coricn ZU lU H ct hi t ischcII lJiSlribuli\'a ..lUi -sli- ::.IS
l":Ollsul l<.l nlc llsc!Lriit, ari.llll~i - 130 f. med ia le Fu rm c ll loU iJllUe r C H
isc hc 183 L:J.llt\'Cfsclli..-burlg, friihc idOl . W u rwll'l'rueu ::.:6 f.
KOIISU I\;UlICI Lschriil, u gari- 3·11 iIIcd ia tfur mcll ::IS, ::.16 L
tischt: Iii Laulvcrtn:l llllg ::IS , ::IlS, 3:: :: !llcuia lgcb rauc h ::: .19 , :::56
KOII SOll<l llh:! ll s taIL d, nlteriulll- Lau\I'crt retu ll g 1'011 iug. -- Ill iIIcli ia lt YPlLs, ;i]tercr "klassi-
lidwr ::6:: "Is -lUI itll H c th. · Lu\\'. 30 J sc hcr" 3.' I
I\ O II SUI I;Lllli:; 11 LlI ~ , VC[(') ill - La utvcr trc tlln g von itig, " tl' ~l crJio· l';l ss i\· 3 17
iad JU!L g i lll ::Gi illl I-I cl h .· I.UII'. J0 1 ~lcui llm Z15, :::18 , -::::: 5, ::: ·lu,
J":OILSOIlIL Il Z, cillfachcr Ii7 La lltvcrtrc tu ug: VOIl id g. r :!·j:!·:: ·IO, :!5 5 f. , 308, 3T.! f.
KUll s tmktion cr;(inw. %Cl.l}' im H cth .- l.uw. )0 1 31Ll i. , 3:10
6),0'1 '~Cl. L !J. tp o~ ::03 Lmll\':Jlldcl :::63 !llcdi um (E ll dungen, Em-
I\ons t ru ]( lioll, pcriphras ti"chc Lnllwcrt I:;:: , JO.J, I t'ig, l iD s te hllug) :q ::: if.
::19 L, :: jlo Laulwcrtc" tlnd ,: :::51 .\I ciliulll, he il!. _H I, 333
!\.onlro\'Crsc 3.,1:) Lantwcrt S I!}O :'I lc uiuHl Imperat i\' 3~8 , 33Z
Kl"c lI 7.schldic 15:: Lalltwcrl I .~ 19(1 :'I 1t!dilllll, illdg. 3H
Kult urci u fl u U, hal l. ::70 Lallt1.cichctl 151 :'I le diulI l, tdassischcs 3 '-1 ,
l":uiturcin fl u U, h urrisohcr 103 Lchcnsbcrcicltc, cil li;:lcbc 3.17 3 1j
l":u1t urllu hci t, Il littci-liabylo- Ld}l'IIS1.cici ICII 1('-1 Medium, Idass i;;ches, a uf "-(Ii,
nischc 179 Lclmiibcrsct1.11tll-! 186 "' 5111, 4-/tfi (" -(Ii) 3:!j, 3.J.i
K u:tur:; lufc 3.,0,3.13 Lch u wor t q o, '-I :! , 1.j 8 , ::66, MediulII, Idass. , jdg. EIlf!u n ;,;clI
h: ulturwol"L fij r die "Tolllafd " :!8 1, :!8:; , ::88 f., ~9.J , :.!ry8, ] ::S
30 5 3 0 .J illedi u m, IlCuclltwickell b 3:: 9
l":upapa (Gollh cil) 153 Lchnwori, ar i 5chc~ ~. J ::: Medium Piur;l.1 3. auf -,.:,
LC!IlI\\'ort, ];1f'itlasi:J tisc\ics illdo·irall isdler ]:!fi
I-haltigc i\lorphclllc ::70 , 300, :!8, :\l cdiulII Pr:i~clls 3::8
3·;5 Lelmwort, scmitischc;; ::n i\lctli ulIl Priiseus (eill1.ds prach-
-l-h nltigc NUlIliuais liffi xt! ;:'97 Lcstl!lg" :!.19 lidlCr :\ lIsbau) 3:::()
-/· Stilu LlII l.l :::t:Hi Lill c; lr A ::G I Medium I'ribens, Singu larj
· /-StilIlLTlle CQ IIIIIIUJJe 198 Li llca r 13 ISO f., :: 67 Pllll'al3_ 317
-/-St:'l ll1l11C IIculnJlll 1'J8 Lillca r- B-T ex tc 3.1:: il lcdiulll heth . PI's ., Prt.,
/·Suffixl:, llcl11. U. Ill\\". :!i.~ LifiltidclI, iJlllau te lld e :: 07 iJl lPCL 33 1
-1/'II -J-[C lcrol, li til w ll, iut,;'. 300 Liquid!' II, SOt l antj~ c Jl e , indo- :\lctliulll Priitl'ritulIl 3:!8, 33::
Lauiovclar 3.11 gcrm :tIlisc.\lI! 138 :\lctliulll tau tum ::: .13
Labi o\,ci;lI', illllu!;:". ::::::.1 L Literat u r, Jtcthiti:;chc I Oj "i\leinc Sonlle" (he lh. KOIl.igs-
Lallw(;rwr :::38 lot.ale BC1.iigc ::53 litel ) IS:::, 10·1
Lallu sclwI,I(lII lgsuri(Ul lde!1 Lol,:atil' I I!::: , 193, zoo, ::0., i\ lclhulic , ;\It!thud il; :!·IS L,
166 Lol-ial il', clHiungslo5cr Ig6, :::6:: 336 , 339 t, 3·, :::, 34·' L
Lal1g\'o l, al Ij:!, I 75 Lo l.a lil· a u f -II, (CI'Sla rr ler) -mi- I\Oll jugal ioll ::15 , :: I j L,
LarYli ga l :::('7 , 33:: ::(io ::::::0, Z:: 3 i., :::38 , :!., :::, :!., 6,
"La ry ug;l.lc" , .lite. iug. ~6j Lo\;:;nil- li nd Da t i\' j ill Plura l .! j :::, 3 1 7, 3::::
"Laryngalrdlcx" 338 ::0., ·mi- I":ollj u ;;a t it)n , .-\ kliv- P r{l-
L lrYli ga ltheoric .1JO, .137, -Is-Lm lgrup pc ::89 SCIls ul'r 318
33 1, 3.1 1 ilqlili-Hit ua l '-1 5 +mi-I":ollj ugat ioll, E udu ugen
Lalllerforscimll g' d es H el h .- Luwicl'- l-I YPllt hcsc '-1 .1, ::(10 fler ::~3 f.
LUll'. 3:: :: Luwisd l ( l::igcllclltwick lu llgcn ) -mi-I":olljut,;alion , hetl!. Priilc-
Lautgesc lz, Lautrcgcl I 8S , ::5j r ilulII del' 3:::0
:q8, ::71, ::86, 303, 31:!, 3::::! Iy ldsrh-Iuwisch 1 16 -mi- tmd ·{li· l\u!ljugatioll,
la ut geSl.l lZiich crfolgler (Ilac h t riigliche !) heth. Un-
Sc!J wU!,d \'0 11 :Jllslautclldclil -111- , andere itl ~ . Sprachell mit tersc ll eidulIg zwiscl!c !1 :: ·I z
DClll a l 3::r 3' 9 'lIIi-Vcrben 3!.!
laut gcsctzliche Ul lIges tallullg -/IIol1-SUimlllc, dcverbaJc ::1;16 -/IIi·Vcrbca, a kLivc ::·13
::76 i\lascul inllll1 s. G': III/ .~ JIll/Sell' 'lII i- und -[li·VcrbclI, aula u tc!l -
Laul gru ppc -II.\'- ::89 /i llUlI! d e 185
 EINZELHEGISTER ZUi\\ AH.TIE.EL A . KAl\IiHE N HUBER 573
l\\i schgebict , hcthitisc h-lu- !lomina nctiouis 187 -o-StiillllllC, Ceniti\- Singlliar
wisch-llUrrisch c:i T78 II0lllilla aetionis auf -illl ll e. 303
l\iischs prache 33fi z 87 -1l·St:illllllC, masl,uiiuc 3D.:::!,
"mit, rnitsamt" (lnstrumcu- n omina actiollis auf -td < -fd 3 ·15
tal) z06 (heth.) .:::!99 Obliqulls z,fi, ::8']
i\lodaics :!53 nQmina acloris 19 1 "' -Oil, ill;;.. Ab lati\· 303
lIiodus 215, Zl7, :!:::!2, :::!51, Ilomi lla actori, anf -flllla- *-(O)II! des Imperfe].;: ts , AOI·i~ts
255, 315 comnl. 21)8 usw. ::::G2
i\iodus\'Ctllll.cicJ1Cll 31 (j nomina a ctoris auf -((Ir((I)- zI)7 Opfcdis rc ll fiir hethitischc
l'.lond. ISS l\omilla, allerUimli cJlc rlcver- j.,:ijuige 127, l OG
?llorphclll, hurr. 27r bal c 29.1 Opposi lion, indogcrm. .: :! 10
illurphoiogic Llo f., 2Z5 ]\omillalueldi na lioll Sg., ur- O ptath- 315
i\lorphologie uc ~ bcth. Ver- hcth.-luw. (:--J.e., A.c., Vo\;:., O piuiivfilllktioncll, indogcr-
bUllls 2.,.1 N.A .II., GCIl., Oat., Da1. , In<llli;;chc __ _
ItlOrpllOlogis uilC NCllhildllng Luk, Luic, AbJ. , Iustr.) Onliuaie I~)l
3·U 301 if. Ordillalzah len I']:::!
Inykcl10iogische :\rgu lt1e llta - l\omilla ldeklinatiUII I'l., ill ;;. Origillille , athcthiti sthc 17.1,
tio n z 6u 303 f. 35.2
i\iythos 27 1 Nomi llalr1e], lill;ltioll I'i., Ill"- "urthographisehc'· Gep flo gell-
he ih.-luw. 303 L heitell 175
-11-Schw uuu 2tlO NOlllill alLieidilla tio ll Sg ., ic1g. o rtltographiscIw l'{e[Oi"!1l 178
-1I-SbilllTlle 197, 280, 288 f. (N.c., A.e., Vok. )[.A .n., Ortslwl.Ilg u9. 256
-1I-StiillllllC COIllBlll lle 28B CC ll., Dat., Dal., Lok., Lo k.) Grt s llamc 352
-11-, VcrnachHi5sigulIg von 301 ri. Grt:;namc eOtll tlllllle 200
z8,], 3z·l, 356 Nominalflex iOlI .207, .:::!!.i. 255, Ortsll<tlllcll aui -lIlilld-1I1t zGo
-/1- VOf .1":uu sonan t :::!75, .278 L, 3·10 Or15n;tmCll auf - (II) lIIla: p·icch.
Nameu def Schre iber Nomilia lfles ioll, h c thitischill- -\I f) oc; 2!)2
NatllCll Ssclm: ibull g , gauz- oder \ri SdH~ 33(' Orlsn<!mcll aui -(/ §_~(I UJl{i
halbirk(lg rapiJi sche 158 Non linallwrnpositioll, ilHloger- -11/1//11 269
Namc ns typu;;, Illlilldo genna- Illanisehc 11:13. z5B Ortslla!IlC n allf -.~Sll uml -llIla
ll ischCr 17:': NOl llinaltllOrphcm ::!1)1 :::60
Nasalc, auiautencie zfi7 NO tlli !lalparadiglllell, Il c fl liti- O rtSll;!lllCIl, hell! . 3.1 .1
Ncg ation 173, Z20 selle IIJ:::!- ff. Ortsllamcn, ullflelni crlc ana-
lICUC FUllktion 292 i\ominalsalz 200 wlisch e 13 8
N eubildulIg 2I.(, 27fi, 30.1, NUlllill ,dsllffix .:::!G8 O rt:malul.'Il-TYPCll, Nc ubil-
]l!),326 1. Nomiualsuffix, h c th. -lul\" . .291 dll ll gCI] ill .A lllcll ll11llg an die
Ncuerllug 2.:8.261 , 33fi, 3.1-1 f. N ol llilia ls)"s le!lL - U tngestallllil g h c rc its \·o rhatldcllCll zfio
Nellcrtlllg, h c rhiti scl lc 197, 25tJ Ortspartikel .:::!::o, .:::!5fi
208, 216, 26:: Nornillatjy 15.], 171 * -ul-, *-m·, S uifi x .: :! 8.;
Ne ll C nl!lgf~1l des i-! c th.-Luw., Nomillativ eUlll lllUlIC 30G
gC ll1c iusalllc 2.19 H., :::!59 l\omi tlati\·, dellTlstufi gc r 288 Paradi glllen, althc.lh. 2.:3
Neucrllllg , llr.-hc th.-lllW. 308 i\ OIuilla t i \", c tidUIlgs losc r 288 Parauiglll;J VOlt -111i- "mein",
Neutra (i,UI1SUll,1lIt isch aus- N omillali\·Sill gular 1.1-1 althclh. .:::![J
lautcuuc Kom iu,l) 299 NOt ltin ativ Singlllar COllllllUUC "i'aradi gma",ldinsUidl e;; 183
Nc utra-Sehwlllll! 30G nis !\ontinativ Plural com- Partil,e\ 137, 3.:::!3, 3·19
n e uiruill s. a. Genlls /l Cll fl"llllt mllne b eirn Nomen 275 Parti],cl der dire ldcll Ecde
IS ·! Kominativ (Synta~:) 199 f. 172, :.! I I
Nentr lltll, id~. 28.1·, 302, ~O.I l\"ollliuati\· Ald,usativ Plural Partikc1, cnlditisdlc 183, ':: 11)
Nelltrum, e rstar!"t cs, im Plural nClltrulll auf -i st.att auf -II 11)7 Partike1-k'lIt .: :! I 3
Nomiuat i v Akkllsativ 200 Notll in a ti v-:\j;];usati\' Singu- P;lrtilwl-:II, -(I: Zl3
NClltnlln, prOllo millai(!s, No- lar n eu trum .:::!ri.1 Partikelkcttcll 173, ::5z
minuti\'-Akkllsativ Sin g u- Notll'Clldi gl,c it __ _ Pariizip 1.1.1, 1H3, IB7, 190,
lar 173 "Nicht hallen , nicht ucsitzen" 1']2, Ir)7, ~I'], ::::.:::!I, .:::!.:::!tl, ::70,
J'{otltCn l.I.l, 18 3 , 1']2 H., .20 7, :ioG, :lIS
:·q8, Z53 , 200, .:::!78 i., 30 0 , -1I1-St ;illlllle I!}i. ::::85 Partizip auf -flltl- ~ 16, 2(1I, "ZS3
301'> , 3 11 , 3·15 -III-Suffixe ::::Go, ::::O"Z ParLizip des vcrbum suhstan-
IlOIl1Cll instrmncnti 300 -Jt1I-i":atlSali\"a, de\"crbale ::;: 17 tivllm 3.17
NOlllcn(l'lural) .: :! 10 Numc rus .275, 279 Parti7. ip itn Sg. :N .A.n. ill
Nomen (Singui;!r) 2IO Numerus, illg. .:::!5.1, z78 Verbindlln g mil 8111"(/.:) -
Nomcn, llr-llCth.-lliW. .25.\ "hailc!!, h alJell" .: :! 21
574 REGISTER

P artizip, I\Icdia lc5 153. -zfi4 PerSOllcrma rncn , cinhcimisch- IIculrull1 und Plural Nomi-
Partizip, IIlcdialc5, a uf '/IJ(III)n- Olna tolischc l iB nativ commune = Ald;:usa.
(-lIIlI1i-) ~1(j , ~95 Pcrsollc llllamcll , h e th . 3.1-~ tiv co mmune 306
P artizip mit ,;.~- "scin " :' :'5 , P crsollcnll a men, (l•. -)lu w. == 7 ! Plural K OIll.iT w. liv COlllmUl\1!
Personcnnamcu, luwische d op- :: I.~

Passiv ~ 1 5, zZ:!, .:! 3=, z.\3, pclglicdrigc :!5S Plural r\o nuna ti v communc
:::5 5. 3l.1 Pcrsoncnn am cn , Nach - (het h.· luw.) 306
P assiv, h a llc1clndc P erSOIl bcim a h m un gcn Imrrischer ==7:! Plural N"om inativ cOInmune,
ZO., P crsollcHnalllcn, nic h l-idg. pronom inalcr 307
PassivllllIschr cib ung ZZ I ] OS Plu ra l NOII l.blativ lUasculiuUIll
Pcrfc li:t Z19. :2:: 1, 3 14, 316 f. , PcrSOnCnll;]lllen, uuiudoger - der ·n·Stiillllne 307
331. 3·, 0 lIIanische und nich t-hurri- Plur al Pra tc rilu m, -!d·Kon·
Perfele !, iell::. ZIS, z :!:! , ::::: 5, sehe :z 68 jugation, 3. ::!z 5
2:::8, 23-1. :;: .\2, :255, 3::8 , 33 0 P crson cnJlalllcn, wciblichc PluralbildllHg cler luw. SJlra -
Pcrfc\o: t,l a tcin ischcs __ _ z69 chcn 1 iO
Ped el, t, pcriphras lischcs :!:!o Personcnli nnlC. zwcig licdrigcr Plura lbildung , hurr. ==77
Per re!;:t, P lural, 3. 317. 3:::5 17==, z66 Pluralbilu ung mit -11=- Z78 ,
Pcrfckt, Plural, 3. (idg. En- P crsOI lclllLamen trp, lu wisch cr z8 ==
dun g) :::6:: ,68 P lllralform eJL 306
P cricld, Singular, 1., auf .o ft Personcllnamenlyp, UniJldo- Plurall,clln1.cichell 186, == 76,
(iug.) 338 gcr m.misclicr :!.19 -::=B :!
Perfe!;: t, Sin gular, _. (idg.) Pcrsoncn-, Gu ttcr- lind Orls- Pluralkcnnzcichcn 1:11.1\ 30.~
312 . 33 8 n:uncu dcr alt;lssrr. T extc, P lu ralkellllzt!ichen -n:- :!8'2 ,
Perfel':!, sogcll<llln te.s m n- cin heimischc ==6 7 3° ==
schrei bClLdcs z 19 Phi lolog ic, hethilische 130 Pluralzcrriittllll g 30,1
Pcrft!ld I ndi imti\' , Singular, 3. 133 f. Plllsqua mpcr fcl,t :: 2 1
:2 5 1 Ph Ol tCIIIC, indogcr ulanischc Pocsie, halt. ::69
Perfcldabl a ut 33:2 1. ' 79 P oesie , p alaisehc ~69
Pcricktablnut, alter :: 3.~ P ho llcU I.: 173 L, 18I polyphones Zcichcll 170
Pcrfc \,tabla ul, (a lt)hc th . ::13.' pho ll c lischc Zcichclt 156 Posscssivl,o!L!; truklio!lcn , 01 \';: ·
P crfcld ablau l, idg. 33 1 phonCliscllcr E ill schub von kadisicrcllde :!I I
Pcrfck tbcdcu lung, idg. 316 -f- ill dcr La utgruppc -f/ S- > PosscSSiV\Wlls tr u\;;tion, pleo-
Pcrfektclldu ngcn 3==0 ·It:· (-IIts-] :!S9 n;]stisclie 305
Pcrie i, lendl lTlgcll, idg. 33.~ Phonologic. IS 1 Posscssivpro no m en ZO I , :!O6,
Pcrfei(lreclllp lil, ation 33 == PI. + A c tc. = !.u'n' 1IIIIi 14Z :! IO ff., z87, 307, 30B
Perfekti v ~ 1 8 , ~~O P len cscil rcibun g 175, 179, PosscssivproflolllclI, cnlditi-
pcriei,tivcr :\spckt )15 193 , :!IO, :!3J , Z-l3, -::=83 , :!go, sehes == 10 if.
Pc rfck lst:u n m :!Ii, 31S , 3., 6 35 6 PossessivpronomclI, c nl.lili-
Pe rsoll :! 16 Plural q .l , I!}:!, 197. Z15, sche;;, illl f us lr. 303
Personaic ndullg 3 16 :!5·1 L, ==5 9, ~ 7 0 , :!79, 308 Posscssivprono!llen illl Sg./PJ.
P crsona!prollolllc n == 06 , Plu ral A idi"Usali v commllne N .A .Il. , c lLldilisches '2!Jo
:!og L, z 13 L, 30i, 30B ~l.J P05sessivvcril altnis ==70
P ersOila ipro no lllcll, b e tonl cs P lura l AJd ;:usa liv cOlnmu nc Pos tpositionc n J S Z f., 19z ,
:W9.:! 16 (het h.·luw.) 300 Z10
P crson ai p ronoll Lcll , cu ltlili- Plu ra l AJtliusati \· commu ne Po ten tiaUs
sches Z l) auf - .~ (lyldsch) 30.~ P Olcntialispar likc! '211) , ::56
Pcrsona iprollom cn, cnld iti- Plural Al;;l;;usa ti \' communc Pr iidikat irn Singular zoo
schc;', o ill lC Gcnitiv z03 auf -11 f t prono m illalcr und p riidiltativcStcllung z J.!,::!1 6
Pcrsonalpronomcll cler 1. u. _. nomina ler ZI.I, :!iU , 3 1:! Pr;ldiltalsverbulIl 3-1 5.3S7
Pcrso n St:. z50 Plural Akk usativ m ase., idg. Prilsclis Z 15-18, ZI!:h ___ ,
Pc rsollcnbc7.cicll liullg 186 :! 76 z55, 3 17, 3:!·\- f., 35 I , 353
P cr son clI bc7.cicll n ungcn illl In- Plural commun e Zi6 , '277 Prascns Al, ti v Sg. 3. (-i) 3 1B
st rume n tal Z05 P lural COlIlIllUIlC (UlIlgcs ta l- Prascns i\icd iu m , Sg. 3. 178 ,
Pcrsoncnnamcll ZiO, ~90 tun g) ~5 S ~ .17. )18
P crsoncnn a rnell , an a tolischc Plural Nominalh'-:\ kk usativ Priiscll5 i\ ledium, hcthiliscilcs
m annlichc z6B Ilell lrum a uf -i, h eth . nomi- 31 7
PCl"soncnuamcn aui -"Y.{ u-, nal er ]19 P r;iscns i\lcdium (ul"·he tl1.-
m ;in nliche == 69 Plura l No mina li v Akkusati v luw. ) 3:: 6
PcrsonCnn ,lI11Cn a ui -nl/slI-sar, nCli trum, dclins lu fi g 199 Pr;lsens, indogerm;Jll ischcs
wciblichc :!09 Plurnl NOllliunti\'-AI;I;:usni iv ZI5 , :!5S. 316
 EI~ZELREG I STER ZUi\:I ARTIKEL A . KA1\Ii\ l ENHUBER 575

Priisens, idg. thcmatisclics, Prii vc rb 153, I S:: L, 19: -J'·Zeichen mit Laut werl I (a/ i)
mit I. Sg. auf · ij 330 Prilllarcnoung 3 IS 3' 9
Priiscns Plura l ::8 "Primiircndu ngcll", id g. ;!k- -r -I· Il -Stammc ::86
Pr;lscns, P lura l, 3· I .J-.I t ivc 33., - f - lind -I,-St;iIl1I11C, gcsc hlech-
Priisclis Singul ar ::8 "Prim iir"- IlIld .. Selmnd ar- tige ::SS
Prfisctls, Singular, - . : 37, c ndungen" iiir clic 1. Plural, -f/-lI·Stiimmc n. :87
:38,::: 4 1 idg. 3I9 Randspraehe r35 , 15 5, 3 I3,
Friisclls, Singular, 3. r7r, 177, Primitiv 3 1.1 3.13 i.
:37 i., :q 1 f. p rouuktiv :: 68 Rcb us-Schreibun g 159
Prs. Sg. 3. (ltj· J\onjuga t ion) Prohibitiv 173, ::!::: Reeh lssprache 3·:3. 3."
::3·;. Prohibiti\' partilicl __ _ Redu plikatioll 217
Prasens , S g. u nd PI. 3. (uridg. Pronomen , 83 , 19:, :06 iL, rcfl exh'iseh, 173
Grundforrncn) 3. ~ 5 ::J7, ::53 L, ::73 , ::75, ::78 i., Reficxivpartikcl ::19 f.
Pr;1sensablaut ::3·1, 333 306, 3.15, s. :I. D .:mollstrn- Rcflcx ivpronomell : 13, 308
Priisc nsfon nans, id g. : 17 li lljJfO IlOmCII, FI'fl{;cprollo ' Rcilcx ivpronom cn, idg. :13
Priiscnsfo rmanlicn 310 mell, IlIdcf~'l/itl)fOI/O Ill C /l, Rchonstrui>tioll 300
Priiscnsiormationcn 3:I, 3·;6 Pasollalp r ollolllclI, P ossr:s- Rektion, verbalc :: 16
Priiscnsfofmali oueu , allc 317 sillprolwl/lcI/ , R.:lati "pfOllO- Rcla li vpronomcn 171, :06 f. ,
Friisclls io rmat ionen, indoger· "' CII- :::1:::, 307,3.\3, 3·,6
manischc, aui · · lIa-'·I!· : [8 Pronomen, cnlditischc5 137 religii.is-lIIagischer Bcgriff 3.t i
Priiscnsiormantic n, urindo· PronDIlll!Il, hl!lh.-Iuw. :50 Richtungsdirektiv auf -dll,
germ. :17 Pro uDUlen, indogermanisches hurr. :71
Priisenskcnnzcichc n 3: 6 '37 Ri tual 1.\:, qo, 355
Prascnss lanun 315, 3.,6 Prollomc n (Par:ldigmen ) :08 Ritual en, magisehc :60
Prflscnssta mm, alhclnatischcr Prolloll1inalad verb 19::, :r:, Ritua llex tc, lu\\'ischc .I.15
und thcmatischcr 3·16 3:·~ Rosctte 15:, 165
Pr;lsellsstiimmc allf ·- .~k- , mit Pro nominalf1e:xion ::07, :1.1,
Infix *- IICII'/'7If1' usw., id g. :55 , : 75, 30B f., 3.16 ·s :: 33
:5 I PrononlilwlfJc:xioli (hc thit., ·.~ ·:\ or is t
3:I, 3.,6
Priiscnssuffix, indogcrmani- Hauptabwcichllugcn gegcn- ·s-Aoris t, idg. 333, 3+1
schcs :17 tiber der Nominalflcxion) · s·JJa ltigc E ndungclI ,
P r ascnss)'stcm, id g. ::5 : 08 Wuchern der :.17
Praclcrilo-Pracscn tin 317 Pconomina lflcx iou, he thitisch- -.f·h altige Nominalsuffi xc =95
Priitcritum :15 , :19, :.\1, Illwischc 336 ·§· rllI :.;0
=55,3 17, 330,3.,,;. Pronominal fl exion, ltr-heth. · · Hln li :::·17
Priiteritum in der' :. und 3. Ill\\,. 307, 3I O -sa l' (n.icllt-indogcrm:lIIisches
Singular der · /IIi· und -{Ii· Pronominaisys tem , he th. :::7.I Suifix) IS9
Ko n jugalio n (he t h.) 3:1 Pscmloflex ion 193 "Sclnmd;1rendung". idg. ::0:,
Pr;1tcritum Mediulll, hcth. 3:7 pscudoillwisch 3:3 3,6
PrHtcritum P lur.1 1 ::8 "Scku ndarendun gcll" , idg. al;:-
Pratcritum, Pillral, _. :37 Quasibiliu guis 355 U\'c 33.'
Priiteritum, Plural , 3. :6~ " SclmndJrend lln gen " des 1111-
Priitcritum, Plural 3. auf ocr f (ocler I), nur :67 pedekts, Aori st.,; , idg. 3:::
=3·;. 'f, auslautendes, Vcrlust von " Sckundiirl!udunge ll", Fort-
Pr1itcritum Singular ::!::8 , 37 setzun gen, idg. 320
Prii tcrilutll,Sg.r. 17: f ' , Fehlell \'on ::l Itlau tcndcm Sclm n dflf(~ lIdu ngc l\. idg. mc·
Pr;1tcritum Sg. I. -[In (Iuw.) :67 diale 335
33' -r·h a lt igc Nomin a lsuffixc ::!97 ·$·Slii mmc ::88
Pr;:iteritutn Sin gulnr,::!. :37 f., .f· haltigc Silbcm:eichcll :07 -s-Stiimmc :.:86, ::! 87
::.p, :·13 · f·l\[cdio-Passiv 1::9 , I37, S::lrrullla (G6ttcrna mc) 17:
Pcateritulll Siugula r, 3. 15 . ~, 339 ,3·1-1 Sacl lbezcic1mun ge n :f'i6
=37 i. . :.p f., ::·13 "" ~ l c dium Sachg ruppcn 1.10
Prftterit um Singular 3. (lti· 3·H f. S:ingc r, hilttischcr 1::6
Ko nj uga tion ) :3.' -f - i\ lcdillfll ll1it ·-1 + r 3.f6 " Sfinscr VOII l\ a ncs" I:: r
Pr:iteri lum, Sg. 3. auf -t: PI. 3. -I'-Stiimmc : 86 :3an l:l5 (Go ttheit) 153
auf - lit (ur-he th.· luw.) 3:: -f-Stiimmc communc .198, · .~n /'{l- c. , heth. :97
Prt. Sg. 3 auf (-t)ln (Iuw.) 3:: 1 : 87 Satl.;tll lmiipiung 17:!
Prii teritulll, Sg. 3. mit -i,f :::33 'f-S tiimme, lIlehrs ilbi gc 288 Satzllamen, h urrisehc 172
Priiterilulil-Kenuleichen, me- · f! · JI·Hc lcrold itilm l 3i, I9S, Gi~!1.a. za.3- ' O}.ou xed ~ ipo~
clialcs 3:7 :6: 356
 RE GISTE R

Sch reiber , hc th_ Z9u "!ichuldig" -,,Ili lschuldig" 3.li SOllllere lltwick lungclI im Pa~
Schreiber, hicroglyphcnhcthi t . SCh lLl zgo lthcilC1t fU r bcst imm· la isc he ll ill cler Numi ll al-
, 70 lC' J":urpcrtc ilc ::73 d eldillat1011 305 if.
Sch rcihergclcll rs Ol lnkd t i S I "sdlwcrc 13aSC II " VOIl Vcr-bod- SonLiersi tlla ti on d es Hcihiti-
Schrt:ibgclcltrsnml·:eit 159 ,,"ur win ~z9 :;chcn Ilio fl. , ::G5
Schrcibgcwohnheitcn, hcth it. 5ch wC5 lersp rachclI des Hellli - SOU IIC 155
170, 179 li:>chcl1 17::, ::I~ L, Zt5, SOll llc(ngott heiten ) I;';::
Sch rcihgewo h nlwitcl l, Ilu rri- ::10 SOll llCllgOl 1 '::(,3 , 35.1
~d l c 177 SC hW\l lld tic,;.
auslaul Cll t!CII Sonllcngott , ic1g. 35::
Scllrci b prillt.ipiclJ, n\,l'allisch c V<1kals idg. *-dhi :P3
YOIl ~pa tn cnlith i.s..:h ).;0
[ 76, 179 5chwllm ls tt1 fe ::::9, 2).: Spc1.ialul l tcr,;.uch u ng "lur h.-
Seh rciiJpri lt 7.i piclI , beth. ):::: " seieml" "wah r" ).17 luw. Vcrualilcx ion JH)
Schrc- ibcrschllk, Itordsrrischc "Sc l;;tl1ld:ircmlutlg " ):::: f. Spiel, gf'lehr tes l U.!
iC.:::! "Solmm];irclld ull g" deS :\I e- Spracha(\\'(!rb '::70
Schrcibll !1g , a ld,; tdi ~c h c ::UI ti iUli 1 )::1 Sprachbnu, he lh. 180, 18~
Schrci hll llg, a l;:l;:adbicrclldc "Selm nd:ircntluli g" ~ - m 3~~ Spr;rchh:tll, s.cmit i;;chcr ].15
1::5, 170 "selbsl " :: 13 Sprac h hczcich n ll ngcII 120
S c ltr~, ihu llg, "g(! lIli ~chtc" .1 58 "s ich SC lZC Il " :: 1 3 "Sprac hbihldc" 339
Sr,h n' iutll 1g, kW ll posi ta·artigc S icgd 156, 1(1.1 f., l og Sp racl l '~ er:;chluss.cnt! :l.I')
, 70 Siegel des " Tarko mic lilos" S praClll!, illd uge J"i l l al l i ~c h e ::00
SciJrf"ih ll ng , ,,>'piclcr1scl lc" 1-19 S r rnellP, Ilkh t -irHlogcrlll ani-
T::q, 170 S ieg(·I, d igraphc 156, 165 sd lCsiidostauatolise hc ::7::,
Schrd lHt It£ s. n. R.·bll,~-Sc llh·i- Sigillatic .-\ori;; t 3~u .:!7·1, ::77, ::91)
hU1l1: Silbcnredupli kalio ll 18.1 SpracllC, Wl!~ t il l dogcn ll "IIi!; chc
Schrciu,· ariantc il ::ng S ilbClischriit In f. .l·:i
Sch rift 1.11), 150 , lU.l, 168 f. Silbellscilrift,l,yprisd lC ISO Sprachen, ,"Jilriersartig s t ruk-
Seh ri!l, ii!!rp tische 153, 10.1 Sil bCIl7.cichCIl 1.j9, 157, 159 lUri(! rl e :::;(1, ::(ili
Schriit , :tltassrr i,;.chc 1(.:: f. Si lher I'::.: S p racilcl1, c in hc ilni;;ch·all a lo -
Sc hrift , !,!!" icchischc 179 Sitll.miar II)::, :: 15, :::5.1 L, lischc ::g.\
Sehri!t, hicrog lyph f"!I hc thiti- :::59, '::70, ::7g , ]08 S prachl!ll, hcthitischc -::.19
sehe I SS, l!lO, 109 , 17 1 L, Sing ul ar I. , in der Ikdc u lu ng Spracllcl 1, illtioge nn:ll lisri l-
Z75 "icll will lUll " Z I;'; a ll a toli scilc Z.I'1
Schr iil, l'rpris.:he 1 ;';1 S il lgulnr ,). ::::og Spracilcll, ItieiJt-i lld ugen itani -
Sch r iit , !i tlll1crisch c 107 S illgu lar, 3. , aur " -j '::51 sr..hc ::57
Schrift s. a. B II ChMllb.:u sc lll'ijt, S ingu lar, J. , au i *-li ~5 1 S pracilc ll , nich t -il ld ngcr ruani-
K .:ilsch r l/f , Silb,;mchrljf Sing ular ll. lJlura l 3., a tlf -f ll, 5che <111 atoli schc :l(I!' , ~9 5
Schriitnnalysc 157 -II/II (= "Sel; u m l;"l rcmiUl lij" Sprachcll, n ieht-indogc!"tunn i-
Schriil ·:\ Il iiingc in An:ltolicn -:- .1/) )Z) sehe '·cr5chullcnc z68
S illg nlar Gcui liv 307 Sprac hell, \'erschollclle
'"'
Sc hr iit -Apnric 175 Siu!!lI lar Gell. auf - ll.~ ]05 (NachI\"iI"l, ungc n) zfi7
Schriftnufb au d es HicrQgly- S iT1 g1ll ar Lo lmtiv I tl5, :: 1:: Sprad lciaflllLl ,:mat olisc hc r :: 69
p hetthclh il. 167 S ill plli ar l'olUillil l h · llllli A1;- Sprachein flu[\ , anal01 is.c hcr,
Schriilbild I i:: I",;;al iv COI HlUII II C ~ I O a uf das I-Ic t h_ ::70
Sc hriitCII I;; tc hulig 107 Sill gular l\',-,ulit la li ,· ncu lnllll Sprad ll.:illf lu O, a naloliscl lcr,
Scilrifler fil l<iullf!, modcl"llc auf -,l ti msc hrift - f ::nH a lli d as Lllw. ~7 1 f.
16.\ S ill glL lar u n d Plu ra l (tin ter· Sprac hcill illlll, hur risch cr 17:: ,
Schrif tc rfi n d u ng, Ur- t6.1 scl!eir1ull g) 305 ~7 1
Schr iftfrag en I S::, 10 ' ,,5it1.en" '::13 Sprachci llfl1l3, hai.I isd lcr z6g
Sch riit kcnn tuis illl He lhitcr- -Jk-;\ b lei ItUlgcll ~ I S S prachcill fluO. I, au kasischcr
reich 16i -.U.·Verl..nllH 17G, ~::I :::.')7 , ::6i
S r.l lrift -Nnchcrfin dll ngclI 16.1. Soudercnlwir.ldu llg 170, ~7() , Sprachci u ilul..l , Il ir h i-idg. ~5::! ,
Sd lriftpara llclcn, cl:lI1 lis chc ::83 , :: 99 338
'79 SOlldcrelltwicklulI g, h . - l\lw. Spradl falllil icn - 1":011;; trll k t io-
Schrifi !'}"3 Ic me , "al;:J,adisch - 313 nell 1.1 .1
hclh iH:-;chc" 17.: SOllderclltw id: illll gel l illl Sprnch gcbraue h, alter indo-
Sch riftsystcrn s. ".·II;/;{/l/o - Hel h. in d cr Nomina ldcldi- gen na u iscilcr Z0 3 f.
Hiffil ,:" n;;! iun 305 i f. Sp r ach gc m c insc h aft , ill doge r -
Sch rift\'crbrcilll ll g IU7 SQl1(ic ren twir.id ll 11gcll im LtI - manis.ch,scllli tischc l Si;
Schrifl wcscll d er Hc thit er l Ui wischclI i.. d er NOllli ual - Sprachgrllppc, b a lto-;;I:t\\·isciIC
Scl lr ifl 1.cil:hcn 17;'; dddill a tioll 305 H. :::6·: ,3-1-1
 EINZELREGI5TER ZUM ARTIl..:EL .A , KAl\Il\lE NHUBElt 577

5pracbgruppc, hethiti!:ch-Iu- schcll iunerhalb d es Urindo- Syntax , h eth. 3.19

wlschc :::.1·8 if., 278, 30.1, germanischen 335 Ii. Syntax., indogerlnallische :::!o6
335 Stellung des Luwischen, m'- Syntax, ](cil scllrift-luwischc
Spr.achg-ruppc, hcth,-luwischc spr ullglicile :::6J fl. 3·19, 355
(J3cwcis) :::·19 Stcllullg des Palaischell, ur- Syntax, palaischc 3.19
Sprnch],ontakt, heth. unellu\\', spriiuglichc ~61 Syn tax des Ur-he thitisch-LIl-
:::97 SteHun g der Sprachen inner- wische n 3.19
5 prnclunittcl 3_10 halb de:; Hcth itisch-Luwi- Syntax, urilldogcrmanischc
Sprachrnittcl, neue 314 schen, urspriillgJichc 26 r if. 3-19
Spracilrcgclung 178 SllitZ\'okal 30 3, 30S SY5tclll drcicr "Tempusstiim-
Spr~lchschic h t :::68 Sturteva nt'schc Hegel 177 f. me", llrindogermauischcs
Sprachschopfung, bcwuOtc Subjckt 3 15, 31 ; 3.: 6
3-13 Subjel;:t neutrischcr Plural :200 System, hct hiti:;ches 176, 3-:'9
Sprachs truktur,luw. :17:::! SubjcJds!,aslls 190 SystcmatisicrLul g, uachtr;ig-
Spl'ac/ts tufen 131, 185, :no Subjeli:ts\\'ech sel ~I6 lichc Ig8
::13 Suu:; tantiv I-1.3, 183 , 186, Srstembildungell ::5, ::! fi5 t,
Sprnc hs tufc, vor-urielg. :::15 193,270 :::!7·,
Spmch tcndc nz ::q 8 , :159, ::7.1, S ubs tanti\- commune 306 SystcnLireudigkcit 18./
3-13 Sllbs t<lllth-, dcvcrbales 18.1 SystclIlzwaug ~ u3
Sprachtypus, ngglutinicrcllder Suhs tantiva , he terol. li lisch
-:';7 L i1ektiercndc :89 -t-Elemcnt im Daliv-Lol.aUv
Sprach lypus, unlerordncndCf Substant iv im Ablativ 303 :!IO
-:. ii L Substantiv im Ablativ mit -/ (mediales PriL tcri tum- I';:enn-
5prac.hverandcrung ::7:: dem Instrumental d es cnldi- zeichcn) 327
Sprachverfall 137 tischen Posse~ s i "pronomens -/- i\l orph em :::6~
Sprachvc rglcichuu g 3:1 8 ::::05 -f nach I\om onunt 303
Sprac!lvcrwandtscllilft 180 Substautiv, -0- s tuii gcs 188 -/- Stiimmc 196
Sprachwisscnschaft 3.1::: Subs tantiv, urspriin gliches -f- S tiimmc mit Subst. c. und
Sprach zus tnnd, ;1ltcrcr 273, 19::: n. :::83
3·19 Su bs tnnt h'c und Go l tcrnamcu , -f-S ta nullc, andere 28+
Sprnchzustand, vor- urid g. , irn cntlehntc :::U9 -t sta tt -Ii, jiiu gcre Form auf
Hcth. 33 1 "Sub:; trat" , idg. 2UO :::!·15
sprachliche Durcilgang:;stufe Suos trat, vorgricchisches :u7 of-S uffi x ::::9::::
3-10 SlIus tratwirkllng ::::56, -:.67, "-r. + ,. un ci *- /1 1 + ,. im
sprachliche Indizien :::59 :::68 Pr5.~en ~ ill ti er 3. Ss. und PI.
sprachliche Katcgoric 3-10 Sufiix ISO, 18 _ ~ 32 5
- ~J"i - e.lllw. :::97 Suf(i x, bedeu tung.s- tlnd a l;:- labarna (hethit. f\ulligstite l)
-H - :15: tionsartmodifiziercndes : 17 165
-.f5-Suffix. :39 Suffix -d, halL : :! 7t Tabarna-Siegel 165 f.
S tfLllUIIC, chcmalige l;:on50nnn- Suiiixe, erero le indol;crmani- "T:ukondemos" -SieSc1 s.
t ischc :::8r sehc 291 Sicgel
StiimJTIc, Imtl50nant1schc :83, Suiiixe mit -r/- Il·hetcrolditi- -Ielol' 2SS
3 0G scher Flcx iOll :::96 i . T elipi nu-ill ylhos t.I~. 353 L
StiillllJlC, vol;:alischc 306 Suffi x -.~a r :.!69 Tempel 170
Stnll ll1lbildungen, vcrbale 31.1 Suiiixc mit Nasalell 295 Ternpus ::17, :: 1, '25:, :::56
s tanunflek tierender TyplIs Suffix (ur:;priin gl . Bcdl!utung) Tcmpusgcbrauch 2 19 i.
~77 L, 337, 3·~5 ::: 18 Ternpusstanun 315 f.
Slammform, altere :87 Suffix, innerhethitisch uich t "Ternpus"·Sys tem, id g. 3.~.1
Stammklassen 19~, :206 , 2 79 prodllktives 239 Tcudell z ::: .1), :! 99 , 305 , 3 ~::::
Stanunl;:lassell, 1I00niTluic SuHixuuleitull gcn 19 1 Tcndcllz, ll1 1i lldogcnnanische
': ;9, 3·15 Suffixl,eUcn -:.i7 ::75
Sta mml,;!asscn , nominalc. aui SlI pcrJativ -:'57 Ten nis I 5t , 1St, ::::67
-u- (J\Jasculina u nd Neutra) SlIpillUIIl ::: lU, :::-:'0 T enuis aspir:Jta 339
3-15 Snpinum a uf -{mil -:'1 9 Tenuis, iudogcrm;111ischc. 1;7
St<ln unl,lasse, volral ische t 9 1 Suppletiv -:.-:.8, -:'55 Tcsuu 15:1
St<lnunverteilung, neugebilde- Symbol I.]9, 165 Textbearbeitull gClI , hethit.
te, im H.-Luw. :::86 Symbolzeich cn 158 13 2
stntuscOllstru ctus 351 Syn lwpc :::87 Textc, a\tassyr. .:::66
StCllllll g des Hctld tischcn 265 Synta x 1.10, 16g t, :::ro, :::57, Textc, althclhitische Original-
Skilli ng des Hethitisch-Luwi- ::::75, '277, 3·16 ,83
Handb uch lier Oricntatis t ik, Abt. I, Bd . IT , .-\u5c1 m. 1/-:' , US. 37
 REGI STE R

Textc, hclhilische 13: U rngc.;; taltlln g VOIl idg. E rbe Verb, he thitisches (Ausdrucks-
Texte, mil telpersischc 183 '98 moglichl;:eiten) ::: 18 !i.
Tcxlprobcn 3 .~ 9 Umgcstalt un g des nominale rl Verb, h eth. -luw. ::jI f.
Tcxtiibcrsc hrift 350 lind pronomiulIlcn Plural Verb illl i'li cdiulll :r 3, ::q6
"ThclIl avoli,:li" 187 COIIlmune mit -11:- 3.19 Verb, in lr:lIlsi tives :: i G
Tic f:s lufc' IiI), 11)7, ::.1 , ::::8, Umges ta ltung d cs Plura ls Verb , lIicht·ab lautendes 137,
:83, 303 commune durch d ns u n klare ::6:::
Ticist ufe de r Wurzel :::16 " Infix" -II :' 305 Verb , prim:ires 217, :::.~
Tite! 1.1 3 UlIlgestaitlln gcll , Illw. 308 Verb, schwach cs 330
Tite! "ill einc So nne" 350 Umgcst:J.ltungcII, pa L. 308 verbum simplicium ::18
"Tmesis" 18.1. Umlaut :::::: 5 Verb, starkes 330
tocharisch-hcth.-luw. 34i Uml au t, ger m;'m . ::: i.' verbulll subs ta nti v llm :!oo
T Ollstuic :::34 , 30: - IIIIHIfI-, · /II11(m) n· , he th, H er· Verb, t hema tischcs ::9
Tradition, hcthitische schrift- Im nitssuifi x :::9 5 Verb, lr:msit ivcs ::16
Lich e 16:: Ulllschrift d cr Ilicroglyphen - Verb , lIlIregclm5.l3ig ilck ticrcn-
transitiv lHld p crfekliv ::I 3 h e tllitischcn Sch riftzcichen des :::17
T[';JllSI.riplioll 168, I i I t , r6, Vcrb, vokalisch-auslall tend es
17·1 Umsch riiten. 1Il0dcm c , wic ::: ·I Ci
Transli lcr:JlioH 171, 17 ,~ , 196 -1.:.-.:-, -.... -,,/)- [75 Verbalabs tral;tum 185, 19B
Triko nsoaam: im Inla ut 173 Umwclt, altiis liche 3·li VerLalabstral, tulll au f - lIIal/ -
Typologie, t ypolog isch :::7.2, -/Ill im Priiterit ulH 331 :: 95
::: 78 , H7. 340 U ubeleb ics ]05 Verb nlnhstra l.ta, lateinische
'Cyp u;,; ::57. 338 i. Unilldogcrmanisciles 1.11 , iCllii nine, aui -telf/ (l" l.:!a ,
T~Jl u S der hie!; 7.11 bchaudcln- ::53 , :!5 0 , :::59, ::09 milt.:!" usw.) :99
d CI! Spr:lchcn :::.19 Urlle imat, indogermatdsc hc VcrLal nhs tral;: ta, ia tei nischc
T ypus dcr hcthHisc h·luwi- , 88 fe minin e, a lii -Na ::99
;;.chcn Sprachcn :::.17 , :::78 Ur· Heth.-Luw. 31B Verbalell du n gcn 1.]1 , :::15 ,
Ur- Hct hit isch -Luwisch (Rcs u, 3 1.1
-1I-Ab le il uugcll 7.11 Verbalwur- mc) :::59 if. Vcrbaleudu n gcn, idg. 333 if.
zein Igo Uri ndogc rmalliscil 30.\, 3 IS, Vcrba lflex ioll, heth itiscl l-
-II als il rlpcra liv],c lln zcicJlen 3·, 0 , 3·\ 8 luwi sch c 3 I3 ii., 33J, 330
3:::3 . ]:1 :: U r ·lndogc rma lJi sr:h (Rekoll - Vcrba1f\ cJ.:ion , idg. 343
-rl' stnU idg. -m- 3:::6 str llk tio n) 3·10 f. 3·13 Vcrbnl ilcxioll, ur -hcth.· lu\\'.
-II-Adjelaiv :::95 .2 15
-tl- ArdaHt ] lg Variautc , innerheth itischc ::16 Verb alforJIlen, chnral;tcristi-
-u-S liill1lllc 19.1, :::80 Verb, Verbum L j .l, 183, :O i, sehc 338
-ll-Stiilllllle, ndjcl,livi sch e ::53 ::5·1 iL, .275, :::79, 33 i, 3·15 I. Verba lttlOrphem -.I:k- :! ! 7
-ll -Stfi m lllc., de\'cr b a le adj ck- Verb , abgcicite tes :: I i, ::!.J:: Vcrualnomcll r8j
riyiseile .2g. ~ Verb, ahl aulendes 137, l i 8 , VerbalnolllCll , dcfel;tivcs ::6::
-ll-S ta llllll , mas lmliner ::::5 :: If;, :!:!5, :::62 Vcrbainoil len, indoge rm . I B7
- !/{/ II-S ~'llt;tgllla ::::0 f. VcrL, altes indogcrm ;tnisches Vcrhalperson :l 15
-!lfIlllrt'-, k. -lu w. J-icrl;urtfts - :::1 5 Vcrbal s tnmm, id g. :!:!3
suffi x :!!)s Veru, a ltirischcs 3.15 Vcrbais ta lilln, thcllI>ltischer
-rum!·, h et h. (Iu w. ) ::9.1 Ve rb (Ucde u lungslliodifizie' odcr a them >l tischer, a ls :::.
Ubcrbc\\,er tulIg ci ner ein zigcn r u ng) ::: 13 Sg. I m pe r. 3:::3
lalitlicltCIl Isog losse 3. ~ 1 verbum composi imfl IS.;, :::18, Verbalstn nmL + Thcmavol;aL
UbercilJ s ti rn[nnngcn, !Opczicllc :5 8 oi lier Del;l inatiOllsldassc
::: 6., verh ullt composilllltl m it liber· :::9·'
Uberlidcru ugszufn ll 3 '13 tragencr Bcd e u t u ng ::18 Vcrbalsu os lll ll tiv 137, 183,
Ubcrsc lzlI lIgeli 16.; VcrlJ, denomi nil les I1Jo t , :: 17 185, :::10, ::::::, ::::8, :::6.2
Dbcrtragung des S in gu lar auf :::19 Vcrb a ls ystclll :H l, H,I
den Plura l =i.\ Verb, des I\rnll l,se in5 :!Ol Verba\s),s tclIl, h e thiL 137
U bcr tragull g von no millalcm Verb, deverbn les ::17, :!I 9 Verlmlsys tem h ethitisch-luw.
u n d p rollo min a lclII I\asus Verb , -c-slufiges 188 3'7
deS S ing ul ar :.IUi dell Plural Verh (Formcllbestand li nd Verbalsystem, indogermani-
337 Wortbildu ng) ::15 fi. sehes 13i, 3.15
*- V<'H/., iug. :::9.~ Verb hir " steillerl " 3.li Verbalsystem, urindogerma-
-II/ :::97 Vcrb, h eth. ::5i l1i sc h ~5 31 5
-lIlli· :::9i Verb, hc thil. (Satzs (clhm g) Vcrbalsystem, \'creinfachles
Ulilgestaitung ~09, ::: 78 :::05 :: 15
 EINZELREGISTER ZUi\I ARTII(EL A. KAMi\lE N HUBER 579

Vcrbaltypus ::5 6 Volmlschrcibun g, ureifachc 176 I.!9 if., 15:::, I S6r., 1Ci9 f. )
Verbalwurlc l ~ = 9 Vok:!iscilwanl,en, uniudogcr- t7·~ fL , 180, 18~ 1.
Vcrbalwurzcl mil dcvcrbalclII lUau. ::z5 W urzel d es Enklilil.a-
-11- AdjckHv idg. = 31 Vol.alvofSch lag ::So, ::86 Gcbrauchs, iud ogerm. ::5::
VCibaud de r s patcrcn id g. Vol.al, Vo rschlag cines prothe- Wurzclc t r mologie 190
Eil17.clSpi<lchcn 3.t5 tischcn z67 W urzclgl eichuugc:n 1.10
Vcrfallscrscheinllllg 13::!, ::!.1 7 Volmlwechscl J36, I 98, ::!::!S, \Vurzclnumen 196, ::83
Vcrglcichcndc Sp rachwis5C!1- ~83 Wurlclvcrb ::::::3
schaft 34B Vokat iv 19 3, 199 \ Vurzc\vcrbcH, athcma tischc
Vcrkchr, diplolna tis-cher 175 Volk 3-10 :::~.I fL
Vcrlustcrschch lungcn =4B, "Voll•• Land" 3.,8 Wurzc!\'crLJen der ld-Ko nj ug~­
=59, =66 . =7=, 336 Volkse tYlUologie :l07 lion , \"ol;alischc =35 i.
VcriustcrschciulIngcn, gemein- Volksbczeiclmull g t :: 3 \Vurze!vcrbelt, der -l1Ii- Konju-
same, illl Hc th.-Luw. ::53 f. Voluntativ 3=: ga lion, ablautcll UC z:::8
Veriustcrscilcinullgcn, llach- Vorbcvoll;:crun S :::59 f. \Vllrzelvcrbcn del' -m j- I';:onju-
tr;igliche =65 Vorfmmen, "id lJ." 331 galion, nicbt-abla u tcnde
Vcrschlu Uiaut, guttura ler 3.\1 vorgcschichUichc Quellcll 3.10 ::: ::8 f.
Vc rschlu Olau L,labiovclarci \'orgricchische Schriltcll \Vurzclvcrben, kousona ntisch
3·Jl Linear A :::67 "1l~ l autendc ::.13
Vcrschlum a ul, pala talcr 3.\ [ \'orllelli. h ur zer -f-Diphiong Wur:>:elvcrbcn Hut a/~'-A blau t
VcrschrcibullS =q 33' ::3::: f.
Vcrtauschbarkcit VO ll Perso- Vonmtcrsuchun g ~9S
nal- und Posscss ivprollomi- Zahlwol"t 183, 190 H., :::t:::
na ::! IO --w- des Pcricltts 3== Zahlwort UHler "Hin{" :::49
Vcrwaltungssprac hc, hct h. Wahrsagun g I8!) Zcichcll 3I S, 3,16
::69 - :l'(IIW- , h.- hm·. I-Jcrkunfts- Zeiclicn , h.-Iuw. 251
VcrwandlnngclI \'on -k-Lautcil sufiix ::95 Zcic hell /IIi :::6.1
in Zischlalltc, j iin gcrc 3.1 t Wein 1io f. Zcichcll -tll {m} :::.\ 0
Vcrwanutst:ilaf l, hcthitisch- Wettcrgott ::: 85 Zeit, ur-idg. 3.\0
lyli.ische q fi Wortableitungell mit I·JjUe Zeit, nach-urid g. =55
Vcrwandtschaf t z wiscllCl 1 dem \'01\ Su Hi xell IB,I Zcilausdrucl. ::!:::I
Hethitischeu , Pl.llaischcn Wortar teu 1.10 Zcitan gabcu :: 00, =o. ~
und Luwischcl! IBo it, Wor tbildun g 1.10, 180, 183, Zcit a llg:ahcll , a us d cm IlIdo-
::! .17 ff. 19::!, ::: IS , =7 1, 3·15 gcrmanischen crerb tc 197
V crwand [Sel la f lsbczcic11- Wortbildull g, uomiuaie ::!50 Zcitbcgriifc ::8·1 . 3·17
lIunge n, ic\g. ~SB Wortisoglossc ll 3·"::, 3·17 Zd t d ancr :::9.1
VerwandtschaftSllalllcl\ ::!88 \Vortredupli \;:atiO!L IS.\ Zcntralspracbcn [35, 3 1 3,
Vcrwand tsc Ila f ts vc r h;i ltllisse, Wortschatz 139 f., ::.18, ::66, 3-13 L
idg. 3-10 33 6 , 3.10 lcrdchn tcs si tUI/I· 290
Vol,abular :l 15 Wortschatzdificrenzcn =7:: lcugnis mc hrc rc r idS'. Einzcl-
Vol.alc, illdogcrman ische 18[ \Vortschatzisoglosscn 3.13 sprachen 3.10
Vo](alcrweitcrun g 3::! 1 \Vortsc11atzisog lossclI, Alter Zil ipuri 191
VokaliiirbUllg, unilH.logcrtn. von 3'13 Zisch laut 3.11
Labili tiit in dCI" ~67 \Vortsippcn, auf Pronomina lu gchi:irigkcitssuffix 263, ::: CiB
Volmlfarbe pholleUi atischcr aufgebau tc ::Oi 7.ugch6rigl,ci lssuffix, hatti-
Bcdeu t ung ~6S Wortsippcn, hct hitischc 188 sehcs =70
Vol. alharmonic :::::5 \ Vorls lamffi ::77 Zusammcuiall 306
Vokalismus 308 \Vo rttrcllucr IS f , 168 Zwci-Gcnus-Syslcm :::53
Vokalschrcibuug 17.1 f. \Vortvcrglcich ~ .I B
Vol,aiscilrcibl1llg, ua ppelte \Vol"tzcichcll (Ideogramm)
nG
 V. E I NZELREGISTER ZUNI ARTIKEL G. NEUMANN

A. Sachrcgister
Aphiircsc 375 Gu tt ural 370 Proklitili.On 37~
.:\11olmpC 3713
Assimilation 376, 379 "Hcischciutur" 396 5atcmsprilcitc 363 . 368 , 379
Silbctlschrift sys tcm 37 1
Bahuvrihi 38:: "I';:c tlcn" 385 Silbcazcichcll 372
37:::
BikollSO llilll Z ]w lIlbi llatorist:il 30:;: f. , 365 . S lll r tcvanisch c Regel 377
Buchstahc nschrift 37£ 368 SYll lwpc 371i

E thnilmn 380 f. Labiovciar 378

EtYliloiogisicrlln g: 361 Lau tgcsclz 375
Lchnwor t 366 i. Volwiassill lilation 376
Frcmd wor t 366 Volm ll .<,m llonic 376
i\lctathcsc 379 Vo!w lq unlllit :itcn 372
"Gcllc tiv1l5 adiccli\'alis " 3uG, i\louus J88
3i:!I , 383 W orilr ClLn UIl g' 371
G leitcr 370 N asalierull g 377 , 389 ,3 92
Gleitlaut 37::, 376
Gr iizisicrun g 359

B. Lykisches Wortregister
-aln", -dli 38r, 383
-ali 38r
-a::a 180 p i j,;- -li'iili· 38 1
3 05, 375 f.
-w/i ll; 38 ,
"'i 39 2 -r i
csbc- 368 380 Z%tldNl/ltI 367
Z UZlllle 369 . 3i8
s(c) -clll:-/ti 386
!O11/1l j68 -:i 380
Sflll/ll 36 7 -: :i 38,

-IJIII 380 ti 386

-/d 381
(ulll:i- 365

C. Wortregister del' sonstigen Sprachen

Hetllilisch Imis!:i. 387 lid,;· , JSo
ap-fep-. 396 l:uisSll, 358 :Illthijfl", 3i9
{Ut/ tlll -, 377 /\'lIkklllllli5, 369 ::/IIIIJllllriii-. 396
lwppiriinli, 378 III[I!Iij.U-, 370
h!lsltii-, 379 - 11111,3!D Luw isc h
HiJII/ utUl, 378 lIIt/lidd u -, 375 IIMw , 3!H
kak kapil-, 37B /mlla r, 368 -lIlli· S u ff ix, 376
·';IIII/-!IIIIII-. 38 ! SIIIlIUI/!ilt- , 31)-1 -IWIi/ - Suffix, 380
!:(litera-, 38r SIII'I1::::. i-, 379, 381 /!lIlia, 390
k .:sscrll ', 370 duirw lIlfi- , 378 tl/lllrW, 39 1
gillllllrrru- , 370 lukllll-, 378 tl1II1; ' , 377
 EINZELREGISTER ZUi\I ARTUiliL G. NEUMANN

alm- , 38G IJn!Ill, 39.j H iereg typhe n-L uwisch

o/Jast'-, 37/j, 378, 379 lIis, 31B IISII1,'lI , 30B
appn(II), 377, 39! -pn, 393 lin, 39,j.
ns(/,., 379 pnri-, PflrijfW, 39z _WrJlfI, 368
-flssi- S uiiix , 381 par/Ill-, 377 srm:mUl, 368
-!so , 375 pijn-, 365 , 376 larsu , 39.'
f/(mdfl[UlII -, 3i8 pipijn-, 390
hnssn, 379 P,/l/tWllI//fr-, 375 AJ tpcrsisch
hnssal(/lIIrn-, 378 sarri, 376, 377, 39~ *Arfnlllllllrn, 375
-hillf- , 378 -.~s-, 379
Ci.flmjr{llJ(l , 379
imll1l1ri-, 370 Tnrlu/Il!-, 378 Ifi/JI', 367
i sm ri-, 370, 379 in/ijnl/- (AU'.), 385 s~III1;(lb(lmJ 367
-i;:;a- Suffix, 380 T Ullr isi:;;u-, 379
ViStii·~PIl, 379
knr.'i/I/ltl, 389 * fiinimj-, 377
lillis, 378 il/Pai-, 365, 377, 378
la/is/w, 387, 388 dU!IO- , 376, 377 Ul'artiiisch
IlIlihi,jll-, {alhiI'Il-, 376 1I/)pnJ"{/-, 376 1m/llri, 367
IIIlIllif-, 375 -;,!lflli- Suffix, 3Sr
JllflSS(llIi-, 377 -!,'nll/i- Snfiix , 38t Illclogc rmnnisclr
wllwufl//"ri-, 38r ZlIflli:;II-, 380 -t1irlllOs, 370
 VI. EINZELREGISTER ZUNI ARTIKEL A. HEUBECK

A. Sachrcgister

Ablau t .JZI Dati\'-Lol;a liv, AI;lHlsa liv, Pos;;cssivpronomc n s. PrOIIO-

Adjck liv .loB f. ' i\lodalis', 'Obliqutls ' 111':11
s. K(l SIlS NOlI/illrl/iTI , D(/till~ J';:o mp05itnrIl .II :::! L, .101.\ Pr:lcii],alsllo mcn .116
Lolw l ill, AM:usa(iv ; N I/mo.:- Kong ruc ll z .jI6 Priifix .109,.1r6
fil S SrI/g ular, Plurlll; G';IIIfS Konjunli:tionc(( .PS i. PriipositiollCll .\IS
C UII/llllllle, !Ycit/rum .\08 i. Konson:.m tclI .\03 fi. Pr;iscns .I I:-.:1-:, .,:::f.
Ad" crbicn .P5 J\opllJa .p :::! Pr;1tcrHul1l .: r:-·p4, .1::: f.
Aldwsativ .\06, ·Pi Pr.'i"crbieu 366, 390, .,oi,
Altliv .p~ LalJialc .\03 f. 'I I:! f., .\::3
Apodosis .p8 Labio vcbrc .Io:::!-.Io.: Prouomc n . ~ oCJ fl., P::, .j.::!3
Apposition .118 Lnutc .]03-5 s. Vo/w!.:, firm- s. lirrs ll .~ Nomi lwtiv, Da til/-
Assimilation 376, 379 • .10., s()JI(ml,:II, D(wall1lt h', D,;II- L olwli ll, .-Jklw.I'()tiv; NUII/c-
Itll,:, Gutturalc, Ltl uinl~, La- /'lI S SinJ;lIlnr, Plunll ; Ge lllls
Commune .\05 i., .1:0 u iof}d(! r~, Lil!lIid~ lI, Mcdi(f~. COII/mllll': , N.:ufrll lll .109 fi.
.V(lsf!l~, SpinlJ!fclI, TOIII;:S, P ro lOlsis .1IS
Dativ- Lolm li v .106,., 17, 0'::: I '~nchlllpilfl/tc
Dallcr la utc .\03 Liquidcn .103 L
D euLons lra tivprOllolllCl1 Lol.aliv s . Dllliv·Lollllliv Relat ivprO(IOnl Cli s. PI'OHCI I/I,:n
s. Pruuolllol Rciati"siitzc. 16, ~o f. , .17 £. ,
Dcnoll liualivull1 'II J i\iasJ;;uli uum .105 .p8
Denta te .103 f. Mcdiae .103 i.
Dc\'crbativllIll .113 Modalis .\ 06 • .pj
Dissimila lion .;03 i. Satzgcfii gc .j I7
Simplizia ., L\
Enclit il;:on (Enclilicum) .116 L, Nasale -103 f. Sin gular .!07 fl., .JIZ ii.
Ncbc llsiitw .1r8 SpirantclI .,00, .103 f.
.1IS
Eth llil;on 380 L, .1 09 Nega tio n ·lo9. ,115 Subj c kt .pu i.
NClltrum .]OJ, .1::0 Sub ~t:lUti\'l lll l .\0(, i. s. A"us /l s
FClIlininulIl 40:, .105 • .\::0 Komcn s. S/lUs./mlfiv II. ; 111- NOli/iII . , 'G.:n jiiv', Daf.-Lo{;. ,
j,;!:liv _.JJ:liII s.; !V I/m ailS Sillg.,
Gcuitiv .\06,., IU, .,:: Nomillaliv .IOj, .:oG, .\l6 Plllr.; G~ Il!l S Com HI/m e, N tr.,
Genl1s Nomin um c t Prouomi· Numcrus Nominu!!l ct IJrono- 'F.:.millilwm' .IOU f.
1\\1I1l .\oG, .~: o ; s. ;1. C(JIIl - mitlll1ll: Siugulnr .j oG i., Suffix .IO!), ·109, _I 13
IIIUII':, N.:utrltlll, 'F;:milli- Plura l .Ioj
IIl1m' N umerus Verl.lOru llI .1 1: iL,
Ge nus Vcrbi .p : Singular .Il:: fi., T cmpus ., I t-l.1 S. Prt7.~"II S,
Gen us Vcrbi s. A J:IiII, Pflssiv P lural .JlZ , ·P3 Prtil.:riflllll .In-14
Cutturaic .: 03 T ellUCS .103 i.
Obliqulls .106, _116
Hanp tsatz .,17 L
Objc].t 'P7 Verbum .111-.115, .P7 s. Nu-
b-Laut -I·:::!·I
merus Vcrborum Sing.,
IlIdccliua bilia .P 5 Partilw ln .115 i., .,111 L, ·1:0 Plur.; Te mpus Priiscns, P rii~
i ndcfi n itpronomcn .1t o, s. a. Par tizipicn 415 tc ritulll ; Gc nus Akti ..... Pas ·
PrOllomclI Passi" .pz, .p., siv ; Part izip
Infiniliv .PS Patronymii;:a . ~ o8 VcrschlnObutc .~03-j, ·123
Isoglosscn .11 9 PcrsonalprOlloIIICIl s . 1','0//0- Vcrwaud tschaftsbczcich-
1I1 ~ 1I llull gcn .,::0
i\i\SIIS .\06, .p6 Pcrsonalprollomc n .Iog, .1:0 Volmle .,03-5
i":asus s. Nominativ , Gcnitiv, P lura l .IO::!, .106 L, ·11:: Vol,aiclltfalt.ung .10j
 EINZELREGISTER ZUi\'I ARTIKEL A. HEUBECK

B. Wortregister
-a , Endg. Subst. Nom./AJdc is-, Pravcrb .1 13 ·\111'1, Endg. Proll. Dat. PIUr.
Ntr. Plur.( ?), .\06 -is, Endg. Suhst. Nom. Plur. .\og
-av, Endg. Subst. Dat. Plur., comm. .tOU
.!06, .~:::: -is, Endg. Adj. Nom. Sg . -,.sf-/'is, Encig. Verbum Par-
eomm .. \06, .108 i. tiz.( ?), .!IS
• d, E ndg. Verbum 3.Sg. Pras., oil, Endg. Verbum ]. Sg. Pr;is .
.pr, ·IIg, .~::3 .\r.\ OS, Sufiix Veruum, .1 13, ·~~3
-d, E ndg.Subst./Adj ./Pron. os , Euog. Verbum ::.Sg.
Nom·/Ald;:. Sg., .105, .pg, -k-, Sufiix Vcrbum, .P3 Pras.(?), 41.1, ·~::3
·\::3 llnu" Priiverb .p:: SIlV-, PrMi x SubsL/Pr;iverb,
da-, Prfivcrb, .P3 11r1/~, Priivcrb .\07, .113 ·107, .113
si·, Pravcrb, .107, .113
CII-, Praverb, .tI:! i. ·1, Endg. Verbum 3. Sg. Priis. - .~, EnrJg. Suhst.fAdj. Nom.
a-, Pravcrb,.P3 .,Il,·;Q,·!23 Sg-. conun., 40S-'109, .jIg
-I, Endg. Vcrbum Iniillitiv
fa-, Priivcrb, .tr:: f. ·PS _to, S'uW;"Vcrhum, .\07, .PS
fi!lI- « fa- +-en·), Praverb, -li-, Suiiix Adj. .\07 L, .p.t i. -f, Endg. Verbum 3.Sg. Priis.,
.107, .112 f. -A (-I), Endg. SubsL/Adj./ .\I.!, ·fI9, ·~::3
fift « fa- +- -C/-) , PrLivcrb, Pran. Dat. Sg., .\05 , .\22 f. -tad/-lad, Enclg. Vcrbum 3.5g.
4 0 7, ·\13 Priis. (Priit?) Pass., .~q
ji,' « fa- + ·is-), Pr;ivcrb -ti-, Suifix Adj., .\og
-I/I.~is (-mlid, -lillA, -/II'JIPJ),
.,12 f.
Suffix Adj., .Iog
-1/, Enclg. Verbum r.Sg. Priis.,
·iil, Endg. Adj. Nom./Ali:k. Sg.
-II- (-'1-), Suffix Verbum, .113 'ILl, .,.:::: f.
.106, 408 f.
-id, Endg. Vcrbum 3.Sg. Priis., 1111-, Pr5.iix PI·on., ., 10, .111, '\ 16
.p., IIi·, Priifix Adj.fPrall . . \og L, -v, Endg. Verbum I.Sg. Pras.,
-ifN, Enog. Verbum r. Sg. ·\IS
Prilt.(?) .P4 -vv, Endg. Verbum I.Piur.
oil, Endg. Verbum 3.Sg. Prilt., '\1(-11), Endg. Subst./Adj./Prou. Priis., .pr, .p.~ i., .123
·P·I, ·123 AIde Sg. eomm., ·105, .pg v t -, Pr;ivcrb, 413
-iJUl'J, Endg. Pron. Dat. PluI. -'I, Endg. Verbum I.Sg.
.\og Prat,(?), .p I, ·P ·I, .12::
 VII. EINZELREGISTER ZUNI ARTlKEL A. KAMMENHUBER

(Hattisch)

A. Sachregister

" ,,\uiativ" 5.12 EinfluO, llllrri scllcr (churriti- "gen ilivu;; possessivus"; "pos-
Ablaut, illdogcnnanischcr .~.16 scher) 1133 sessi\'cr Gcnitiy" .18::! , .\B .\,
Abschrciber, hcthit. .~.18 f. EillzahJ 5·1: 535
Abschrift, schlcchtc -1-19 Ei nzahl, uncl,tc Stnmrniorm: " gcn ilh' us 5ulJjcd iyu;;'! .:85
Abschriit, s p ,Hc h clh it., .:63 Ald, usal iv .175 " Gcuith 'c", t.\\'ci auicinandcr-
.-\djeJdiv -!- S ubs lauliv .~5I, Eiscu .136 fo lgcudc _IB7
.,09. 5H Enkli t iloou .101 8, .,S8 , 53.J GCll til izsuffix, weiblichc:; .13::!
Akkadisicrllng .137 Enkliliko n, "prol lo minalL-;;" Gen us s. G~·schl.:cllt
"Akk usaliv" 5.12 _1 87 Gcschlcc h t .~ 59 if.
"Akl,;usaliv" : "Nomi nativ" Ethlliko n .~ ..19 Gut tcfl la!nen, hattischc .15 0,
·174 E1Ylilologic .I.)::! ·IU G
"Al;];usaiiv Sg." ·lIl!:.!, 535 .5 .12 Guttin Is laI' .\38
Aln:cn tUlllcr!;c1licdc _, 88 FellliuilJU!U S.).:! gralllmatisc he 'rerminologic,
Ang lciehun!; des halt. Am;· FCSlritu a l S. RilulIl 5-13
lau lcs an heth. S ufib:c .Hi F lcxiou, s. NO lll ilWllkxioll, Graphil. ';·I:! -Hi, 5·\0
Appo:>itioll W ill "Genili,," .153 , -1:/'blllll~xioJ/ Gl'aphisch·Laut lichcs .1 30
:\ rbcitshYPOllw5C .1!)7 .. FlcxiollsJ,cnIl7.eichcI E" .;.:0
Assim ila tion ",, 8 f. Forschungsst:l.Iu.i .130 Hall isch, vorndnulich pr;ifi-
aSYlldctisch .'i.:J Forsc hungss talll..l bcim Vcr- gicrcndcs 5-1-1
Auslall t .1 50 bUln .199 halt. l3ildUl lgcn 53.1
:\ulochlhollCIl .' '':9 l-ortis .H8 hatt. Spraci llJlatcriai, me IEr
FUllktioll von ucs titllln{cn 53 ·1
BautH- und Holzbczcich- IE c th . Pr:ivel'hicll 510 l:fcb'l t (lrnrr. Hanptgo llhcit )
nUllgen .\37 Funktio ll cll: SIl!Jjel;lsl; asns -133
Bcbriffc, gcis ti gc H8 bci transitivcl1 ulld intransi- Hcrrschcr t itc l und -insigni cn
Bcrulsbczcichnungcn , ha tt. th'cl\ Verha _170 -!3:!
.:33 Heth. bcsilz t ];cincu Ar t il;cJ
BildungclI , rcduplizicrtc 53.: gCllctisch -H [ -159
Bilinguis, hattisc h-hc thitischc "Gclliti\'" 5.1: f. heth. -luII·. Pr!ivcrbicn cntsprc-
·'·13 "Gc llith''', adnou ri llalcr .J-7B , chcll illl Hnl L bcstimmtcn
.~SG Vcrualpr;iiixclL .196
Chronologie, chro JloJogisch
Gcniliv, fl'ci sc hwcbcnder, des hclh ilisrhc UCtl enlL llllgcll \ '0 11
.13 2 1\ 1I1 ~ llrfllll) , lioll ;irell un d
He tltiL .\UO
"Dali\' " .\87. 5.' -:: "G e niti ~-", !taU. .)Go, .\78 Hofhca llltcll aus UC!II ]'lalli-
(Dativ-)Lo),:aliv .j88 "Gc nitiv " nieht 1l1ll':IlIIiUlIdnal sche ll .\35
"Dativ Sg." ,,09,536 ·1 7~ Hethitisic{'Ung h~ tt . \Varl er
J)emonslralivum 355 "Gcnili v, possl!5sivcr" s. "ge- -1-17
DClllolIs lra livpro no men , hcth. /liti:)IIs 1'(I.~s~·5.iittlfs " Hc lltit isicru ng , unhcwlI Otc
"Gcn iljv", sclh5t:inuiger .178 -1-:7
·159
Dc tcrminati\' ·13M , .1.. 13 "Gcll itiv", vora u5gcstcll tcf hiuwe iscliI..Ic War ter 5.J-3
Dc tcnninicrcndes-Dclermi- ·\77 Hvehslmall <111 UClC Ug tCIi Ver-
nicrtcs ·~ S3 . 5-1-1· "Gcllith''' , z\\'citcr, a ls Appo- baipriifixcli bclriigt vicr
Doppclkoll50llall t. illl Anlaut sition _\8, 53 0
·150
"Gcnitiv", zwcitc r, in dcr H OIllOll y ltlC ·10'1 . ·195'
Sla!lllltiol'lU ., 87
Einilu13, hatt. .}33 "gcniti\'\Es materiac" ·17H ItlclIli U\t ues lksil7.crs lIIit
 EINZELREGISTER ZUl\l ARTIKEL A. KA1\EHENHUBER 585
dem gramm, Subjel,t ,177 Lehnwurter, hattischc .13I-8 Nuancen, ortliebe, am Verbum
IdeogramllL ·~30, H3 Lehn\\'orter, heth. +15 5:.!!
Illujanlm-i\lythos .;.3.~ Leuis .1-18 N umerus .1·63 if.
Impcrativ, heth., Akt. in cler Literatur, hattische .130
3. PI. Il. 2. Sg. 509 lolmler Bezug am Nomen .157, Objckt 53I
lnclilmtiv, hc th., im Priisens 5·~::: Objeli:tsl\enn7.eicilen 501,5:::5
50 9 "Loka tiv" .168, .IS7, 5·~::: Opierritual s . Ritual
Illdikaiiv, helh.,im Priitcritum "Lokativ", 1. .~69, 5.1::: Optativpriifix s. !Vull schprd.-
Ali:t.: 3. Sg., 3. PI. 509 "Loka iiv", I (Einzabl) ill del' fix
Iniinitiv 502 Stammiorm .j8 8 Original, hatt. 538
"lnslrulllcn tal" .170, 5·12 "Lokativ", 3. u. 2., am halt. Ortsl;enllzeiehen s. Orlspriifi:1:
lStar- Ins trumell t ·f37 Komen 5:::.~ Orlslllarkierungen, zusatzlkhe
"Lokati\''', cmlungs\oscr .188 .;68
l{armaclhiiraya- l\:o mpo;; i ta "Lokat iv" oime [cstc Stelle illl OrlsuamcIl .,88, .196
(dt. WeiIJ-uorn), idg. .15:! SOliz .ISS Ortsnamell, hethit. +10
Kasus siehl' "Ablativ" "Ali:- Ortspartikel s. Orlsprrifix,;
kusaliv", "Dativ", "Geni- Media .t.;8 Ortspr;1iixc, Ortsl,ennzeichell,
th''', Lol,ativ" (I.:!. 3.), .i\Iehrzahl, Nominati\' in del.' Ol'tsparlikcl .15J, .,6S f.,
, ..N ominativ", "Vol,ativ" Ilaci;:tcll Stamm(orm .~75 510,531,5.10 if.
"E a 511s" in del' Sta lllmfo rm l\lehrzahlbiidung. nicht nacb
·I SS dem Prinzip Bclellt: Un- POlar, m iinulich-wciblicill:s
), Kasus", eiuzclllcr, Charak- belebt .~6., ·;59
\erisiefll lig dnreh hestimlJlte ,,!\rod us" 50-1,5]I Partil,el, eJllditische .150,537,
Prii- u. Suffixe .1 09 l\iondmythos .IH 54:::
"J\asllsforlllen" .\!>5 , .,0S if. i\lorpllelllc, llnlerschiedliche Partikel, cnklitisehc, zusiitz-
l\asusgebrauch .joS if. ha ttischc ·1 H lichc .1813
"Kasus"-Sehelll<l, bbher er- Morphologic j.l::: Partizip 50:::
lIIitteitcs .l u9 if. ?'oiusildnstrument .138 Person des Subjcl,ts 5.~:::
l\eilschriit ·~·IO, 533 Personcubezeicilllullg 536
l\cilschriitio'.'lll .150 Nalliensmalcrial del' altassyri- Pcr;;unenbezcichnung am Verb
l';:omposita?? 53.' sehen T e:de 53 ' ~ 501, 509, 5~5
"I\omposita", Vorder- IlIlU Negation 53T PersoneIlllalllell +17, .191, 53·1-
Hintcrglied VOI1 .165 Negation, vcrbale 531 Personellnamen, Ilatti;;ehe
I\ornposita .'i.a. h-VIII/Jvs illl m. Ncubildung VOIl J';:omposita zu ·13:::, .19 0
Kompo;;ita-Typ "Landes- Komposita im Hattisehcn PerSOllenIl<1men del' Hethiter-
Konig" = i\o!tig tiber das ·1·95 zeit HO
Laud .186 Nomen ·~50 if., 53·1. Phollem ,I.I:.!
Komposita-Typen .196 "Nomen", deverhales 502 Phon cHI;:, hatt. 'H. ~
Kompositioll hatt. Typell Nomen, hatt., ;o.lehrzahlbil- phonetiscile Sehulung -!-/:!
.195 if. duug .165-.167, 5.12 Pleneschrciblllig 4.~7
l\OlllpositUIIl, dreiglieclriges Nomc n illl "Gellitiv" + :::. Poesie, allitcratioJlsartige .19.'
·1·17 KomcH = oil Gottername "Poesie", al literatiollsartige
Konjllu1,tiollell ·150, 536, 5'~3 ·\()7
l\:oIlsonanten .1-1-3 NO lllcn in cler Stammform +- Poesic, palaisehe 54 .1
KOllSollall tiSlllilS .1.,S-.150 Guttcrnaille = G6ttcruamC "Posscssi\'priifix" .,.p, .1 75,
l\oorrliniel'ung glcicllgeordlle- .j!]G 535,5·1·3
terSatze j .13 N"omcll, mit Prii- und Suffix Postpositionen (odeI' Priiver-
Kuitur, matcriellc "flekiicrt" .15T bien), zusatzliehe .188
K ul turgcgells Wilde Nomina, z\\'ei, ersteres in del' Priifix s. Or/sPrt1jix, PO.'is,:s-
Stammiorlll .197 sivPl'iifi:c, Vcr/)II[/m"iji:t:,
Lallnamell .196,5H Iloillinaic. "I\aslls", \'ersc hic- IVI/lls ch/mifi.\:
Lateralcll, lW.ul.asische H -t delle S.I::: Prafix 'I·P, 5·1·~
Lattl e S.: I- ukah', l{vllsVIUlI/- Nominalfiex ion .~68 Priiiixc, zehn verschiedene
ICI1 , T Cllllis , Ziscill"I1I,~ Nominalgattungen .150-9 Gruppell von, b eim Verbum
Lau tgtsctz s. LI/lllrcgcl ,,!\olllinall;:om posita" .\ (;9, 54:.!
Lautregcln, Lautgesctze .I.j.t ·1iG, ·195, 5-1-1 Pdfix, deildisches 535
533 f. Nominalmorpilelll .195 Prii- und Suffixe, nur am
Lautstallci, hatt. .1-l3 if. Nomillalsiit?:e 503 NOllLell verwcndctc .\6S
Laub'ertretung ".10 NomilialsuIfixe .19.1 f. Prafixe, an Nomen 11. Verbum
LehniibersetzllJlg .j 38 , .16.1 NomiJlativ ·170, 5·1::: verwendeic .16!:!
586 REGISTER

Prafixe, sons tigc, an l utransi· StUlI1mfOrlll, nominale .196 Verba lflcxiOIl 468
t iva uurl TrausitivOl 516 ft. Stallllllvol;;alismns 4.10 Verh alpriiiixe, a uf (gcwisse)
PrfisclLs h e tld t. Incli!w. ti vc: Struk lur des Hallisclictl 475 lntransitiva bc;;chranktc 510
3. 5g. Aled., I. pI. Ald. 509 StruJ(l uruutcrschied .138 Verba lpriifixe, a uf Trau sitiva
PriitcrituIn 5::5 SlIbjcl(1 iIll Nominalsatz .170 beschriinkle 51:!
.,ProIlDlnina" _1 50, -167 S,il.: S ubjc)(t in der E il17.ahi .!S8 Verbal prilfixc, Bedeutungs-
Dcmonstrativ pronomiua" Subjek tliasus in de[ Einzahl gehaltc de[ 5::6 if.
"Pronomina-artigc" \Vortclc- 469, 5·P VcrbalstJmme in h;ltL Nomi-
mCIl tcdC5 Hatt. 535 Subjc1{tslieIlnZcic1)erl Eiuzal)i nall;:ornposila .1 96
"pro nomillnic" \Va rter, auch 53 ' Verbals tallull, ein- bis :lwei-
Enlilitilm _168 Subjektsl(cnnzeicilen i\ lehr- silbiger 5H
"Pronominalcs" 53 .~ zalll 531 Ve rbum .138, 450 f., -16g,
Subordinierung VOll Satzcll ·199 ii., 533 i. , 5·1:!
Rcduplilw tiOIi .~98 535 , 543 Verbum, a!i:tives, im 1·l etll.
reflexive Nuance am Verbum Substantiv + Apposition 509
50' ·11)9 , 5-1-1 verbulII compositum, im Hatt.
RcflcxivpriHix 531 Subs t'l.Ilt iva cOlllmune .150 ieh lcnd ·196, 50::, 533
Rcilcxivulll 53 1 "Subs luntiva", hat t ische, oder Vcrbum, denominales 50::
RcihclLfolgc dec Vcrbalprllfixc "Adjcktiva" .15:! Verbum, inlransitivcs 5to,
53 0 "Sub~t.rat'''-Sp r :lchcn 4-16 5::·1, 5::5, 53 0 , 5·1::
Rcihcnfolgc Dctcrminicrcudcs Suffigi crung .\.1:: Verbum, IIlcdialcs, illl He lh.
+ Dctcrminicr tcs _186 S uffi x s. Gt.llli1i::sllffix, No- 50 9
Ri t ual -130, -l3,~, ·~36 mil/II/sllfii.!: VcrbUl n mi t Prafix .199,.15 1
Suffixcrl;:larungen un d De u- Verbum ohlle Tempus· und
Sat zhau ohne die heth. Ollcr- tungen, hurr. .HI Pcrsoncllb e zcichnlln~ SOl,
sctZU!lgcll .175 syntaktisches l~esu mc 5-1:! 50 9
Schmied, golUichc[ .\36 Syntax ·199 iL, 5·1:: ,," crbu m simplieium" 533
Schreiber, hethilischc 'I.':: f. Synt ax , h att. ·159 Verbu m, trans iti ves 530, 5.1:!
Schrcibichlc r -n7, +14 Srfltax, heill. 538 Vcrncinung: s. Ncgll fio/f
Scilreiuullg, babylonischc und Syntax cler Oberse tzungcn illt Vo];:alc, hall. -1 .,6
assyrischc - ~.H Widerspruell zur gelwin. "Vol,alhanHonic" +16
Schrdbvariantcn, hatt. 4H helh.Syutn:-;: .15= Volmlislllus 4.15
Schriftdul1.1us 538 Vobll,iir7.e .159
ScheiB- u nd Lauliragen .14-:!- Tatpuru~a .: 78, ·\95 Vo)mlHingc .159
Tclipinu-Mythos H4 "Voii:alrhythmi\(11 .H6
.15 0
Schrif hi ber! iefertln g ·HI i. Tempusbczcichnung am lmll. Vol; alschrcibun g illl Hatt. -\-17
Seinlll(tircndungen, indoger- Verb 509, 5'1:: Vol;alschwalli(cll ·I·II, .1-15
rnanischc 533 Ten uis .H8 Volmlscllwunlicll, unindoger-
Silbenred uplilta tion .196, .198
Tesub (hurr. Ha uptgotlheit) lIl<1uischcs 5].1
Silber .137 -133 Volmlwechscl HI)
Sonderta{cin .~3.1 Thro nnamen de. heth. Konigc "Vokativ" .170,5 .\::
Sonneng1.ittin .133 '13:: Voll(sctymologie .'.19
Sonllen,!;olt .133 Typologie, typologisch .\.11 Vor(]crglicd von i{omposita
Sprachc, a llilcratio llsar l ige, Oberlie[crungsliicke .I.~ I 478
poclischc 5-1-1- Ohcrsc lzungen 5I::
Sprachc, ci nc siidlicherc ein- Wcttcrgo tt .133
Obcrsetzungell, helh. 50S,
hcimischc <lllaloiischc .H9 \Vortanlaul .\-15 '
53S, 5·\3
Sprach gruppc, aile 441 Umgcst aitung' (Lautreduk- Wortbedculungcn, h atl. .J.I3
Sprachty pcn 45 I \Vortbeuc uhmgcu , ialsche hal-
lion ??) .1.17
Sprachvergicichungen des tische .1.11
Umlaut . ~'16
Halt. .~39 Untersuchungen, auss lehende Wortbilduflg 496
Sta mm, stnrrer -1-1 6 Wortbilduug (Pra- lind Suf-
-IS7
Stammform 453 Untersllchungsmcthodc " .10, fixe) .193 [f.
S tammforrn, naclde .151 , ;jfi:: \Vor l'gre!lzen 431
5-1-1
469, 5·':: Wo rlkategoriclI , hat t. . + 13
Stamm[orm, nacl, te, a ls vcr- Variantcn, graph ische WortreclupliJ;atioll .196, .198
bales Priidil.at 507 ·H ·\, ·\59 \Vorlrcduplil-:ntioll mit eincm
Stammform, nacktc, bei eillem Verb s. V.:.rbl/II! andcrCII l\:onsoll lln ten im
vall zwei syntal;:tisch gleich - Verbaiauifassung, l.cinc allzu zweitcn Gli cd 499
gcordnctcn Nomi na 54:! passive 543 Wor L- unuS ilbcnreduplil, atio n
 EINZELREGISTER ZU:iH ARTIKEL A. KAMMENHUBER

bcim Vcrbalstanlm schcincn Wortlrennllng, Hilschlichc 458 Zeit:mgabetl

zu fchlcn 50~ \Vullschpraiix 530, 531 Zischlallte
\VortstannTl, starrcr .168 Zusammenschrcibung .;6 ~
\Vortstcllung am hatt. Satz Zahlwort 450 zwcigliedrig 53.1
5'13 Zeichen ·13r, ·H3

B. Wort- bzw. Formantienregister

a - 5I~ -el, Gatterbezcichnungen aul, -i-Ii oder Ii-, Wortausl:J.llt .jGI
a-, abgclelmtes "dcildischcs" zu hat t. Appellativa .\6.:: -il, Namcn auf 53.~
,1 6 3 -el, oil, ;J.b;,;elciletc Nomina i/l - (Nominalpr5iix) .~9.~
a-, reflexives 531 mit, (ndnnJ. Wesen) .,Go L, • -if .161
flo, i-, !/(l- deutendc Pr5.fixc .,G.,
·;53 -d, oil (Nomina]sufiix) .II).~ 1I/~I-vV cc hsel H9
fl-III11-, alll-, vor Labialcn 51~ -el, oil (Zugeharigkeitssuiiix) IW-YIlII!/(Ia slIidd·UII, "Gcnitiv"
11·11/1 - 5I~ .13 8 ·1·91
a-all- (a-a/ll -) "sich-cr/sic-" d- (Eudung "Aldmsativ Hu- lias, unklares (Vcrbalprafix)
513 ral") .~75 5,6
a-as- "sieh-sic-" 5I~, 5I.~ cS-, nornill;J.]cs, (" Plural AI,- k(/lte~.~ [liIpi "Kunig + Gott"
alt, fI/i (Vokalschw<lnl,cn) .1-15 kus;J.tiv) .16.; ·195
ab- im Anlallt, -!J-- illl llliaut d- .\.70 ·!w- (Ortspriifix) .~61, 'Ifig ,
(Vcrbal-Priiiix) .11)1), SIt), -ef, GuUcrbezeicJmungen auf, .;1)1, ·1.9·1, 50::
5::1 zu hait. Appellativa .P):! !iIl- (Ortspriifix), bcim Verb
a[I-, -y- (mit Variantcn -ba-, ·ct, -if (Nomillalsuffix) 4~H ·P>9
-!;lw~ ?) S::!5 -ef, -it, ailgeleitctc Nomina jlll- (Vcrbalpr5fix) 5Ifi, 5~I,
ajll, {i)j{/. "gobon" Ilnd jaja mit, (weibL Wescn) .160 L, 5::3 L
"gobcn", Spczialuntorsn- ·IG.\
chung zu 487 -I, \Vortst<lmm <luf .IGo
-Ill, -el, \Vortauslaut .\G1 If.HVcchsel .\4.1,
/, 4·" lc- (Possessivpriiiix) .lfi3, .:fiG,
a/cj;ftl .17.1 j, graphisch !l1I1I//JIl, !lid,)i .; .18
(UI- Sf:: [fll-] (Kollektivpdfix) .\65 .\83
(a·Il-), Subjckt in dcr Eimahl le- 1l1c istells "Possessivllm"
51::! !I ·137, ·1··\ 8, ·160 ·177
1111- (al/l)- "crfsic-" 513 -!I (Nomitlalsuffix) .19.1, lc- (Pr5fix d e;; "Nominativ"
fll!- (Vcrbalpr;ifix) .1) 1 , .151) Ua- all bestillLIlIlen Inlransi- "Plur;J.]") .170
allda (heth.) .18g L liva 5::J, 5:::·1 [ c - . . . - (Volm! +)n ("Gcni-
a.;- 5 I:: !w- (Priifis. d es ,,3. Lokativ5") tiv"suffix) .16+, .170
(a.s-), Subjckt in cler ?lIehrzahl ·170, .190 /c- " sriue" (ein Besitzcr) .177
51 :: !III- (,,3 . Lol,ativ" Eim:ahl) ,,88 /c - "seinc" (mchrcrc bCSCS5cnc
(lS-, am Verbum .151), .IG J ~ {/fl- (Kornitlalprafix) .19·1 Gegenst;iude) .177
as- (e/is-, Id-) 5I.t ija- (Ortspr;-liix) 50:::, 510 It:- als "Nominativ" .177
lisa!; kcin "Dcutcpriifix" (1- !l1I-li- (Priifix d. ,,3. Lolmtiv5") Ie -1- Nomeu .:77
·153 ·170 h-/d- (Pluralpriifix beim No-
(dill! "Bos" (mil ?lIchrzahl !la-li- (,,3. Lo!mtiv" "Plural") men) .:59 , .:03, .\6G i., ·IH,
{1II,,-Il.;a[1 .15S, .;7.~ ·188 ·177, H3
(1l).{lWN!1 r{[wj] "Gatt (Gat- !W-{II1 I1 - (Priiiix d. ,,3. Loka- -Ii (Nominalsufiix) .~95
tin)" .j73 ti\,5") .;70
a[- (NomiIl;J.lpr;ifix) .19.~ [1lI-tlll,,-, scllene Variantcn [/n- 111-, <lllsiautcnclcs .1.\8
(/-[/(/-11111 .170 ttil-, /tn-i)j- (,,3. Lokativ" -1/111 (heth.) .18S
"Kolle"tiv" ) .188 mall,ip, i-lIIl1/lll)! ·153, .158
(-dl/), "Ablativ" HI), .19:: [l1l-tllI,,- . . . . resp. !la-Ii ("Lo- 1/11/- (Nolllinalpriifix) .19.~
\;:ativ" Plur;J.l) ., G.\ 1)111·, \Vorthiluung mit .169
-t~, -ia = Ilominaler "Dativ" 1II11-uallkll-lJ(/ld~1I .199
533 i- (Priifix) .151)
-c, -ia "ihm, ihr", I';:cllIlzeichcll i- (Nominalpriifix) .1 9.1 -/1- .1.\8
des indirel;ten Objclds 535 i-, Variantc u-? (dciktisches -II, "Genitiv" <lui .133
eli.{-, U5-, morphologisch irre- PrMix) .1.09, 5.13 -/I (Versehreihung von <lUSlall-
levantc ·Variantcn 51:! i-mnlbi/) '158 tcndcm -m) HB
-d- Ablcitung .,G::: -fa, -t: (" Dath," -Endnng) .;87 u/l-Wechsel H.I
5SS REGISTER

(Nominalpr;1fix) '19.~
1111- tn- 5 It II und Ii ( l\cilschriftzcichcn)
IW-US- (Nomiualpr;ifix) 49'~ /(1- an bcstilluntcn Tr,:msitiva .\.15
(Vcrbn!prfif ix) 516, 5.21 II/a, IIll (Voliaischwallkcn) 445
1m-(li-) .191 la- Ergcbnis ZU 522 u/t:, nilt:(i) (Vo!;:aischwan!(cn)
pc- (Priifix ,,~. Loka tiv" E in- -tn- (3. Pr:1fix :.un Verbum) -1-16
zalll) (graphisch Illcistcns ·157 II/i- {i/II) · Wechsel +!5
pi-co, sclten pi-) .~B7·9 /a- (RichtuligsprJ.fix) .199 !la - (Kollc!(tivprilfix) 0133,
pi- .~88 , 5II fa- an bcs timmicn iu transiti- -IB, ·.59, .,63, .!65 •.j67. 5::·~
pi- a n bcst irnmtcn l n tr<1llsiti va VCIl und Iransiti\'cn Vcrba Zcichcn !ttl, td, II -i, :I-i, 1/-e.
5~I. S:q (der Bcwcgun g) 5 IO ,i'e H:!
pi· (OrtspriHix) 510 In- und til ' , Varialltcn 505 !tf1aIP(1 (Graphik) .,.j:!
Zcicben PI + :\ usw, ta/:nUa .H9 {taa' (KollckUvprilfix) .133,
tWa, lICe, tU'''tlll1l und {Ill:, /alllli[ = {(illi!, kallhir = kii- -159. ·163, ·1(i7, 52.~
·f·l~ hCf, ka/fII!1 (hit/all) = ki!lab {/IIIl ' (\'creinzelt anch uii-, pi· )
pc-fpi- (Praiix cl. ,,::.1. Lolm- (llI/tllll) ·1-\7 (I\.ollckti\·priifix) .,65
tivs") -170, 50: la§-, vcrbalc!'i N"egationsprfifix (lllla" _ . _ - (Volia! -1- )n ("Gc-
·199, 503 nili,," Plural) .,0+
r-, l1ulaulclldcs .H8 fa s- (td-) "lIichl" 530 tlll'I-/1 §(I ~I, "imllcl(tivcs" .158
-r- .r.;S fas·/.:-, Verba mit 503, 5D5 ttll-, 1111,,' aIII Verbum .158 f.
.f' (Nominahnorphcm) ';95 tas·/.:-/n'll11tltt SIT -{ta" (Partil,el) 50::. 516,5::1,
/t;. (PDssessivpra fix ) ., 63, .,83, 5::q
sls-Wcchscl ,,",9 .192, 505 v,,·a (tlt'1-) (Nom inalflexion:
-J, WorhlU5laUt H7 1.:.- (Wurlschprafix) .199, 50.~ f. "Nominativ" " Kollcl;:tiv")
sub, a-sab, !I(l<l-!(l!~ 453 le- als Varianlc \ 1011 ta o, Verba ·liO
se- 505 mit 505 (Inn', ·17·,
{In-
se-, le-, teo, Posscssivpriifixc Id-, VariaBte fill' las- "nkh!." (1Il 1, - (Volm! -:-)0 (Nomi -
_. _
·:-1·\ •. ,fi3, .,66, ., 83 50·1, nnlflcxion: "Gc nitiv" "Ko)·
,{c- (VcrbalprJfix) 516, 5::.!I f. Id· = ·lc·(iI)s, "llJuge-" 50S. lci,tiv") .liO
" scltell -51/. (-li S, · s) (Suffix d. !ltI" -:i-IIi[IIl,,S 511
"Akkusativ" "Singular" ) tqlll" .169 lid· (Vcrhalp6Hix) 501
·\70 -Ii (hllrrit ischc r Dativ-LoJ;:a- 501
III(-; urll
-, scltell -jn (-c? ) ("Dali,,"suf· liv) .13i ·ltl (Nominalsuiiix) .195
ih:) .~70 -IiI, -:it (Nominalsllfiix) .195
-SII, r';:cn n zcicbcn der Einzahl II·Lallt .IH - (Vol;:al +) Il ("Genitiv" "Sin-
·\75 Il-Wam!1.!! H.I g ular") .!.:6, .\-70
suo, sufiigicrtcs .IU -III ("Ablativ"sufiix) .Iio
-511 "scin" Kcnnzcichcll des Ift- (Vcrbalpriifix) 516, 52 1, ,[lsJ H9
d ircktcn Objcil:ls 535 523 :;a .{-( ?), unklare;; (Verualprii-
-SII (Endung "A)dmsaliv Sg.") tlt-tn- (Ortspr;1fixc) 522 fix) 516
H9, ·158 , -187 -/11 (-dill .19:! :; i- (Ortsprilfix) , bcim Verb
-slIfllf (Nomin alsufiix ) 495 -t/ll (Nom inalsuffi x) .195 .,69, _191, 516, 521, sZ3
-fUll! (Nomin:llsufii x) -195 :;i-jll[I-I111 .19:!
"t"·Lau t .1.19 :i·jtl!I·SII .19:!
_to , Variantc nath tll- 522 t' .J.J2
-t, \Vortstamm auf .;uo 1/- (Nominnlprilfix) -19.~

... . ,.. ,

'j
11

J
Ji
I
,
•

,
I.
~

:.1
. ,I